Installation Guide DBS3900

DBS3900 V100R009C00

Installation Guide Issue

03

Date

2014-08-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

DBS3900 Installation Guide

About This Document

About This Document Purpose This document describes how to install the cabinets, boards, modules, and cables for the DBS3900 in indoor and outdoor scenarios. It also provides checklists for the hardware installation. The exteriors of components or cables in this document are for reference only. The actual exteriors may be different. NOTE

For details about the LampSite solution, see LampSite Installation Guide.

Product Version The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name

Solution Version

Product Version

DBS3900

l SRAN9.0

V100R009C00

l GBSS16.0 l RAN16.0 l eRAN7.0 l eRAN TDD 7.0

Intended Audience This document is intended for: Base station installation engineers

Organization 1 Changes in DBS3900 Installation Guide Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


ii


About This Document

This chapter describes the changes in DBS3900 Installation Guide. 2 Installation Preparations This chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It also specifies the skills that the onsite personnel must have. 3 Installation Scenarios A DBS3900 mainly consists of the BBU and RRUs. With RRUs remotely installed, the DBS3900 can be deployed indoors and outdoors. If a DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC or DC power supply, the BBU can be installed in an outdoor APM30H, TMC11H, TP48600A-H17B1 (shortened to TP48600A in this document), or OMB. If a DBS3900 is installed indoors with AC or DC power supply, the BBU can be installed in an IMB03, a 19-inch rack, or directly installed on the wall. 4 Unpacking Check Unpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact. 5 Obtaining the ESN The electronic serial number (ESN) is a unique identifier of a NE. Record the ESN of the base station before the installation for future commissioning. 6 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D). 7 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.D) Supplies Power to RRUs This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an indoor DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed indoors and an outdoor APM30H (Ver.D) supplies power to RRUs. 8 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D) This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H(Ver.D). 9 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.C) This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor AC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.C). 10 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.C) Supplies Power to RRUs This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an indoor DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed indoors and an APM30H (Ver.C) supplies power to RRUs. 11 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C) Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


iii


About This Document

This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C). 12 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor AC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B). 13 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B) This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor +24 V DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B). 14 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.B) Supplies Power to RRUs This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an indoor DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed indoors and an APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to RRUs. 15 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B). 16 Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB (Ver.C) This section describes the process for installing an OMB (Ver.C), components in the OMB (Ver.C), and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C). 17 Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB A BBU can be installed in an OMB in outdoor AC and DC scenarios. This section describes the process for installing an OMB, components in the OMB, and related cables. 18 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed on a Wall This chapter describes the process for installing a BBU, DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B, and related cables in an indoor wall-mounted scenario. 19 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a 19-Inch Rack This chapter describes the process for installing components and related cables when the BBU is installed in an indoor 19-inch rack. 20 Indoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IMB03 This chapter describes the process for installing an IMB03, components in the IMB03, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an indoor scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in an IMB03. 21 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TP48600A This chapter describes the process for installing components in a TP48600A and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor AC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in a TP48600A. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


iv


About This Document

22 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IBC10 This section describes the procedure for installing the cabinet, components, and cables in a DC scenario where BBUs are installed in an IBC10.

Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol

Description Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal injury. Calls attention to important information, best practices and tips. NOTE is used to address information not related to personal injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.

General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.


v


About This Document

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Format

Description

Key

Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.


vi


About This Document

Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Action

Description

Click

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.

Double-click

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag

Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.


vii


Contents

Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Changes in DBS3900 Installation Guide..................................................................................1 2 Installation Preparations..............................................................................................................4 2.1 Documents......................................................................................................................................................................5 2.2 Tools and Instruments....................................................................................................................................................5 2.3 Requirements for Onsite Personnel................................................................................................................................6

3 Installation Scenarios...................................................................................................................7 3.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply.................................................................................................8 3.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply...............................................................................................39 3.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply..................................................................................................46 3.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply..................................................................................................48

4 Unpacking Check........................................................................................................................53 5 Obtaining the ESN......................................................................................................................55 6 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D)....................57 6.1 Installation Clearance Requirements............................................................................................................................59 6.2 Installation Process.......................................................................................................................................................63 6.3 Installing a Cabinet.......................................................................................................................................................64 6.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor...................................................................................................................64 6.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole.................................................................................................................................81 6.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall................................................................................................................................85 6.4 Installing the ODM06D or OFD06...............................................................................................................................91 6.4.1 Installing an ODM06D/OFD06 on a Pole.................................................................................................................91 6.4.2 Installing the ODM06D/OFD06 on the Mounting Frame.........................................................................................93 6.5 Configuring the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable for a Cabinet.......................................................................103 6.6 Installing the PGND Cable for an ODM06D.............................................................................................................109 6.7 Installing Mandatory Components.............................................................................................................................111 6.7.1 Installing the BBU...................................................................................................................................................111 6.7.2 Installing the SLPU as a Transmission Signal Protection Unit...............................................................................117 6.8 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables...........................................................................................................118 6.8.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit..................................................................................119 Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


viii


Contents

6.8.2 Installing the SOU...................................................................................................................................................123 6.8.3 Installing the AC Heater..........................................................................................................................................125 6.8.4 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the APM30H........................................................................................................129 6.8.5 Installing the DCDU-12B........................................................................................................................................134 6.8.6 Installing the GPS Surge Protector..........................................................................................................................140 6.8.7 Installing the DDF...................................................................................................................................................145 6.8.8 Installing storage batteries.......................................................................................................................................148 6.8.9 Installing an HAU01A-01.......................................................................................................................................155 6.9 Installing Cables.........................................................................................................................................................164 6.9.1 Cabling Requirements.............................................................................................................................................164 6.9.2 Cable Holes..............................................................................................................................................................170 6.9.3 Installing Power Cables...........................................................................................................................................177 6.9.4 Installing Transmission Cables................................................................................................................................217 6.9.5 Installing Signal Cables...........................................................................................................................................226 6.9.6 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables in Case of Less than or Equal to 12 RRUs.....................................................249 6.9.7 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables in Case of More Than 12 RRUs.....................................................................252 6.10 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................259 6.11 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................261 6.12 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................267 6.12.1 Sealing the Cable Holes.........................................................................................................................................268 6.12.2 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................273

7 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.D) Supplies Power to RRUs.............................................................................................. 276 7.1 Installation Clearance Requirements..........................................................................................................................278 7.2 Installation Process.....................................................................................................................................................282 7.3 Installing a Cabinet.....................................................................................................................................................283 7.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor.................................................................................................................283 7.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole...............................................................................................................................292 7.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall..............................................................................................................................296 7.4 Installing a PGND Cable............................................................................................................................................301 7.5 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit.....................................................................................303 7.6 Installing Cables.........................................................................................................................................................305 7.6.1 Cable Holes..............................................................................................................................................................305 7.6.2 Cabling Requirements.............................................................................................................................................311 7.6.3 Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H.....................................................................................................318 7.6.4 Installing RRU Power Cables..................................................................................................................................321 7.6.5 Installing an RRU Monitoring Signal Cable...........................................................................................................323 7.6.6 Installing the CMUEA-SLPU Surge Protection Monitoring Cable........................................................................326 7.6.7 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable.................................................................................................................................327 7.7 Installation Checklist..................................................................................................................................................328 7.8 Powering On a Base Station.......................................................................................................................................331 Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


ix


Contents

7.9 Subsequent Operations...............................................................................................................................................335 7.9.1 Sealing the Cable Holes...........................................................................................................................................336 7.9.2 Repainting................................................................................................................................................................341

8 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D)....................344 8.1 Installation Clearance Requirements..........................................................................................................................346 8.2 Installation Process.....................................................................................................................................................350 8.3 Installing a Cabinet.....................................................................................................................................................351 8.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor.................................................................................................................351 8.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole...............................................................................................................................360 8.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall..............................................................................................................................364 8.4 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable................................................................................................369 8.5 Installing Mandatory Components.............................................................................................................................372 8.5.1 Installing the BBU...................................................................................................................................................372 8.5.2 Installing the SLPU as a Transmission Signal Protection Unit...............................................................................378 8.6 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables...........................................................................................................379 8.6.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit..................................................................................380 8.6.2 Installing the DCDU-12B........................................................................................................................................384 8.6.3 Installing the AC Heater..........................................................................................................................................390 8.6.4 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the TMC11H........................................................................................................395 8.6.5 Installing the GPS Surge Protector..........................................................................................................................400 8.6.6 Installing the DDF...................................................................................................................................................405 8.7 Installing Cables.........................................................................................................................................................408 8.7.1 Cabling Requirements.............................................................................................................................................408 8.7.2 Cable Holes..............................................................................................................................................................415 8.7.3 Installing Power Cables...........................................................................................................................................422 8.7.4 Installing Transmission Cables................................................................................................................................434 8.7.5 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.......................................................................................................443 8.7.6 Installing the Monitoring Signal Cables in a DBS3900 Expanded from 1 TMC11H to 2 TMC11Hs....................447 8.7.7 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable.................................................................................................................................449 8.7.8 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.........................................................................................................................450 8.8 Installation Checklist..................................................................................................................................................452 8.9 Powering On a Base Station.......................................................................................................................................455 8.10 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................459 8.10.1 Sealing the Cable Holes.........................................................................................................................................459 8.10.2 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................464

9 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.C)...................467 9.1 Installation Clearance Requirements..........................................................................................................................469 9.2 Installation Process.....................................................................................................................................................473 9.3 Installing a Cabinet.....................................................................................................................................................474 9.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor.................................................................................................................474 9.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole...............................................................................................................................485 Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


x


Contents

9.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall..............................................................................................................................489 9.4 Configuring the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable for a Cabinet.......................................................................495 9.5 Installing Mandatory Components.............................................................................................................................501 9.5.1 Installing the BBU...................................................................................................................................................501 9.5.2 Installing the SLPU as a Transmission Signal Protection Unit...............................................................................507 9.6 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables...........................................................................................................508 9.6.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit..................................................................................509 9.6.2 Installing the SOU...................................................................................................................................................513 9.6.3 Installing the AC Heater..........................................................................................................................................515 9.6.4 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the APM30H........................................................................................................519 9.6.5 Installing the GPS Surge Protector..........................................................................................................................524 9.6.6 Installing the Storage Batteries................................................................................................................................529 9.7 Installing Cables.........................................................................................................................................................533 9.7.1 Cabling Requirements.............................................................................................................................................534 9.7.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules .............................................................................................................................540 9.7.3 Installing Power Cables...........................................................................................................................................543 9.7.4 Installing Transmission Cables................................................................................................................................571 9.7.5 Installing Signal Cables...........................................................................................................................................580 9.7.6 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.........................................................................................................................607 9.8 Installation Checklist..................................................................................................................................................609 9.9 Powering On a Base Station.......................................................................................................................................612 9.10 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................618 9.10.1 Seal the Cable Holes on the Base..........................................................................................................................619 9.10.2 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................620

10 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.C) Supplies Power to RRUs...............................................................................................622 10.1 Installation Clearance Requirements........................................................................................................................624 10.2 Installation Process...................................................................................................................................................628 10.3 Installing a Cabinet...................................................................................................................................................629 10.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor...............................................................................................................629 10.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole.............................................................................................................................638 10.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall............................................................................................................................642 10.4 Installing a PGND Cable..........................................................................................................................................647 10.5 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit...................................................................................649 10.6 Installing Cables.......................................................................................................................................................651 10.6.1 Cabling Requirements...........................................................................................................................................651 10.6.2 Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H...................................................................................................657 10.6.3 Installing RRU Power Cables................................................................................................................................661 10.6.4 Installing an RRU Monitoring Signal Cable.........................................................................................................666 10.6.5 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable...............................................................................................................................669 10.6.6 Installing a CMUE-SLPU Surge Protection Transfer Cable.................................................................................670 Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


xi


Contents

10.7 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................671 10.8 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................674 10.9 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................678 10.9.1 Seal the Cable Holes on the Base..........................................................................................................................679 10.9.2 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................680

11 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C)...................682 11.1 Installation Clearance Requirements........................................................................................................................684 11.2 Installation Process...................................................................................................................................................688 11.3 Installing a Cabinet...................................................................................................................................................689 11.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor...............................................................................................................689 11.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole.............................................................................................................................698 11.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall............................................................................................................................702 11.4 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable..............................................................................................707 11.5 Installing Mandatory Components...........................................................................................................................710 11.5.1 Installing the BBU.................................................................................................................................................710 11.5.2 Installing the SLPU as a Transmission Signal Protection Unit.............................................................................716 11.6 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables.........................................................................................................717 11.6.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit................................................................................718 11.6.2 Installing the AC Heater........................................................................................................................................722 11.6.3 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the TMC11H......................................................................................................726 11.6.4 Installing the GPS Surge Protector........................................................................................................................731 11.7 Installing Cables.......................................................................................................................................................736 11.7.1 Cabling Requirements...........................................................................................................................................736 11.7.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules ...........................................................................................................................743 11.7.3 Installing Power Cables.........................................................................................................................................746 11.7.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................758 11.7.5 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable...............................................................................................................................767 11.7.6 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.....................................................................................................767 11.7.7 Installing the Monitoring Signal Cables in a DBS3900 Expanded from 1 TMC11H to 2 TMC11Hs..................771 11.7.8 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.......................................................................................................................773 11.8 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................775 11.9 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................778 11.10 Subsequent Operations...........................................................................................................................................782 11.10.1 Seal the Cable Holes on the Base........................................................................................................................782 11.10.2 Repainting............................................................................................................................................................784

12 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B).................786 12.1 Installation Clearance Requirements........................................................................................................................788 12.2 Installation Process...................................................................................................................................................792 12.3 Installing a Cabinet...................................................................................................................................................793 12.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor...............................................................................................................793 12.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole.............................................................................................................................804 Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


xii


Contents

12.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall............................................................................................................................808 12.4 Configuring the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable for a Cabinet.....................................................................814 12.5 Installing Mandatory Components...........................................................................................................................820 12.5.1 Installing the BBU.................................................................................................................................................820 12.5.2 Installing the SLPU as a Transmission Signal Protection Unit.............................................................................826 12.6 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables.........................................................................................................827 12.6.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit................................................................................828 12.6.2 Installing the SOU.................................................................................................................................................832 12.6.3 Installing the AC Heater........................................................................................................................................834 12.6.4 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the APM30H......................................................................................................838 12.6.5 Installing the GPS Surge Protector........................................................................................................................843 12.6.6 Installing the Storage Batteries..............................................................................................................................848 12.7 Installing Cables.......................................................................................................................................................852 12.7.1 Cabling Requirements...........................................................................................................................................853 12.7.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules ...........................................................................................................................859 12.7.3 Installing Power Cables.........................................................................................................................................862 12.7.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................890 12.7.5 Installing Signal Cables.........................................................................................................................................899 12.7.6 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.......................................................................................................................928 12.8 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................930 12.9 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................933 12.10 Subsequent Operations...........................................................................................................................................939 12.10.1 Seal the Cable Holes on the Base........................................................................................................................940 12.10.2 Repainting............................................................................................................................................................941

13 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B) ..........................................................................................................................................................943 13.1 Installation Clearance Requirements........................................................................................................................945 13.2 Installation Process...................................................................................................................................................949 13.3 Installing a Cabinet...................................................................................................................................................950 13.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor...............................................................................................................950 13.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole.............................................................................................................................961 13.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall............................................................................................................................965 13.4 Configuring the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable for a Cabinet.....................................................................971 13.5 Installing Mandatory Components...........................................................................................................................977 13.5.1 Installing the BBU.................................................................................................................................................977 13.5.2 Installing the SLPU as a Transmission Signal Protection Unit.............................................................................983 13.6 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables.........................................................................................................984 13.6.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit................................................................................985 13.6.2 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the APM30H......................................................................................................989 13.6.3 Installing the GPS Surge Protector........................................................................................................................995 13.7 Installing Cables.....................................................................................................................................................1000 Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


xiii


Contents

13.7.1 Cabling Requirements.........................................................................................................................................1000 13.7.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules .........................................................................................................................1007 13.7.3 Installing Power Cables.......................................................................................................................................1010 13.7.4 Installing Transmission Cables............................................................................................................................1020 13.7.5 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables...................................................................................................1029 13.7.6 Installing a PSU Monitoring Signal Cable and a PSU In-Position Signal Cable................................................1032 13.7.7 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable.............................................................................................................................1033 13.7.8 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.....................................................................................................................1034 13.8 Installation Checklist..............................................................................................................................................1036 13.9 Powering On a Base Station...................................................................................................................................1039 13.10 Subsequent Operations.........................................................................................................................................1042 13.10.1 Seal the Cable Holes on the Base......................................................................................................................1042 13.10.2 Repainting..........................................................................................................................................................1044

14 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.B) Supplies Power to RRUs.............................................................................................1046 14.1 Installation Clearance Requirements......................................................................................................................1048 14.2 Installation Process.................................................................................................................................................1052 14.3 Installing a Cabinet.................................................................................................................................................1053 14.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor.............................................................................................................1053 14.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole...........................................................................................................................1062 14.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall..........................................................................................................................1066 14.4 Installing a PGND Cable........................................................................................................................................1071 14.5 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit.................................................................................1073 14.6 Installing Cables.....................................................................................................................................................1075 14.6.1 Cabling Requirements.........................................................................................................................................1075 14.6.2 Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H.................................................................................................1081 14.6.3 Installing RRU Power Cables..............................................................................................................................1085 14.6.4 Installing an RRU Monitoring Signal Cable.......................................................................................................1090 14.6.5 Installing a CMUA-SLPU Surge Protection Monitoring Cable..........................................................................1093 14.6.6 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable.............................................................................................................................1094 14.7 Installation Checklist..............................................................................................................................................1095 14.8 Powering On a Base Station...................................................................................................................................1098 14.9 Subsequent Operations...........................................................................................................................................1102 14.9.1 Seal the Cable Holes on the Base........................................................................................................................1103 14.9.2 Repainting............................................................................................................................................................1104

15 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B).................1106 15.1 Installation Clearance Requirements......................................................................................................................1108 15.2 Installation Process.................................................................................................................................................1112 15.3 Installing a Cabinet.................................................................................................................................................1113 15.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor.............................................................................................................1113 15.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole...........................................................................................................................1122 Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


xiv


Contents

15.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall..........................................................................................................................1126 15.4 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable............................................................................................1131 15.5 Installing Mandatory Components.........................................................................................................................1134 15.5.1 Installing the BBU...............................................................................................................................................1134 15.5.2 Installing the SLPU as a Transmission Signal Protection Unit...........................................................................1140 15.6 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables.......................................................................................................1141 15.6.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit..............................................................................1142 15.6.2 Installing the AC Heater......................................................................................................................................1146 15.6.3 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the TMC11H....................................................................................................1150 15.6.4 Installing the GPS Surge Protector......................................................................................................................1155 15.7 Installing Cables.....................................................................................................................................................1160 15.7.1 Cabling Requirements.........................................................................................................................................1160 15.7.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules .........................................................................................................................1167 15.7.3 Installing Power Cables.......................................................................................................................................1170 15.7.4 Installing Transmission Cables............................................................................................................................1182 15.7.5 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables...................................................................................................1191 15.7.6 Installing the Monitoring Signal Cables in a DBS3900 Expanded from 1 TMC11H to 2 TMC11Hs................1194 15.7.7 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable.............................................................................................................................1196 15.7.8 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.....................................................................................................................1197 15.8 Installation Checklist..............................................................................................................................................1199 15.9 Powering On a Base Station...................................................................................................................................1202 15.10 Subsequent Operations.........................................................................................................................................1206 15.10.1 Seal the Cable Holes on the Base......................................................................................................................1206 15.10.2 Repainting..........................................................................................................................................................1208

16 Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB (Ver.C).............................1210 16.1 Installation Clearance Requirements......................................................................................................................1212 16.2 Installation Process.................................................................................................................................................1213 16.3 Installing an OMB..................................................................................................................................................1215 16.3.1 Installing an OMB on a Pole...............................................................................................................................1215 16.3.2 Installing an OMB on a Wall...............................................................................................................................1218 16.4 Installing the BBU..................................................................................................................................................1221 16.5 Installing the GPS Surge Protector.........................................................................................................................1227 16.6 Installing Cables.....................................................................................................................................................1231 16.6.1 Cabling Requirements.........................................................................................................................................1231 16.6.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules..........................................................................................................................1237 16.6.3 Installing a PGND Cable.....................................................................................................................................1240 16.6.4 Installing Power Cables.......................................................................................................................................1242 16.6.5 Installing Transmission Cables............................................................................................................................1248 16.6.6 Installing an HEUB-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable...........................................................................................1253 16.6.7 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable.............................................................................................................................1253 16.6.8 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.....................................................................................................................1254 Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


xv


Contents

16.7 Installation Checklist..............................................................................................................................................1256 16.8 Powering On a Base Station...................................................................................................................................1260 16.9 Repainting...............................................................................................................................................................1264

17 Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB...........................................1267 17.1 Installation Clearance Requirements......................................................................................................................1269 17.2 Installation Process.................................................................................................................................................1270 17.3 Installing an OMB..................................................................................................................................................1272 17.3.1 Installing an OMB on a Pole...............................................................................................................................1272 17.3.2 Installing an OMB on a Wall...............................................................................................................................1275 17.4 Installing the BBU..................................................................................................................................................1278 17.5 Installing Cables.....................................................................................................................................................1284 17.5.1 Cabling Requirements.........................................................................................................................................1284 17.5.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules..........................................................................................................................1290 17.5.3 Installing a PGND Cable.....................................................................................................................................1293 17.5.4 Installing Power Cables.......................................................................................................................................1294 17.5.5 Installing Transmission Cables............................................................................................................................1303 17.5.6 Installing an HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable...........................................................................................1311 17.5.7 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable.............................................................................................................................1312 17.5.8 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.....................................................................................................................1313 17.5.9 (Optional) Installing the GPS Clock Signal Cable..............................................................................................1315 17.6 Installation Checklist..............................................................................................................................................1318 17.7 Powering On a Base Station...................................................................................................................................1321 17.8 Repainting...............................................................................................................................................................1326

18 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed on a Wall..........................................1329 18.1 Installation Clearance Requirements......................................................................................................................1330 18.2 Installation Process.................................................................................................................................................1331 18.3 Installing Components on a Wall...........................................................................................................................1333 18.3.1 Installing the BBU...............................................................................................................................................1333 18.3.2 Installing the DCDU............................................................................................................................................1336 18.4 Installing Cables.....................................................................................................................................................1339 18.4.1 Cabling Requirements.........................................................................................................................................1339 18.4.2 Installing a PGND Cable.....................................................................................................................................1346 18.4.3 Installing Power Cables.......................................................................................................................................1349 18.4.4 Installing Transmission Cables............................................................................................................................1359 18.4.5 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables...................................................................................................1362 18.4.6 (Optional) Installing an EMUA/EMUB Monitoring Signal Cable.....................................................................1365 18.4.7 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable.............................................................................................................................1366 18.4.8 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.....................................................................................................................1367 18.4.9 (Optional) Installing the GPS Clock Signal Cable..............................................................................................1369 18.5 Installation Checklist..............................................................................................................................................1372 18.6 Powering On a Base Station...................................................................................................................................1375 Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


xvi


Contents

19 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a 19-Inch Rack...........................1379 19.1 Installation Clearance Requirements......................................................................................................................1380 19.2 Installation Process.................................................................................................................................................1380 19.3 Installing Components............................................................................................................................................1381 19.3.1 Installing the BBU...............................................................................................................................................1382 19.3.2 Installing a DCDU...............................................................................................................................................1387 19.3.3 (Optional) Installing a WGRU............................................................................................................................1389 19.4 Installing Cables.....................................................................................................................................................1394 19.4.1 Cabling Requirements.........................................................................................................................................1394 19.4.2 Installing a PGND Cable for the DCDU.............................................................................................................1400 19.4.3 Installing Power Cables.......................................................................................................................................1402 19.4.4 Installing Transmission Cables............................................................................................................................1412 19.4.5 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables...................................................................................................1415 19.4.6 (Optional) Installing an EMUA/EMUB Monitoring Signal Cable.....................................................................1418 19.4.7 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable.............................................................................................................................1419 19.4.8 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.....................................................................................................................1420 19.5 Installation Checklist..............................................................................................................................................1422 19.6 Powering On a Base Station...................................................................................................................................1425

20 Indoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IMB03............................................1430 20.1 Installation Clearance Requirements......................................................................................................................1431 20.1.1 Installation Clearances for a Wall-mounted IMB03............................................................................................1431 20.1.2 Installation Clearances for an IMB03 Mounted on an IFS06..............................................................................1433 20.2 Installation Process.................................................................................................................................................1435 20.3 Installing the IMB03...............................................................................................................................................1436 20.3.1 Installing an IMB03 on a Wall............................................................................................................................1437 20.3.2 Installing an IMB03 on an IFS06........................................................................................................................1448 20.4 Installing Components in the IMB03.....................................................................................................................1457 20.4.1 Installing the BBU...............................................................................................................................................1457 20.4.2 Installing the Power Equipment..........................................................................................................................1463 20.5 Installing Cables.....................................................................................................................................................1464 20.5.1 Cabling Requirements.........................................................................................................................................1464 20.5.2 Cable Installation Process....................................................................................................................................1471 20.5.3 Removing the protective plates at the bottom of the IMB03..............................................................................1472 20.5.4 Installing a PGND Cable.....................................................................................................................................1473 20.5.5 Installing Power Cables.......................................................................................................................................1476 20.5.6 Installing Transmission Cables............................................................................................................................1492 20.5.7 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable.............................................................................................................................1495 20.5.8 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.....................................................................................................................1496 20.5.9 Installing a Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Equipment.........................................................................1498 20.6 IMB03 Hardware Installation Checklist.................................................................................................................1500 20.7 Powering On a Base Station...................................................................................................................................1500 Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


xvii


Contents

20.8 Installing the Cover Plate of the IMB03 Subrack...................................................................................................1505

21 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TP48600A..............................1507 21.1 Installation Process.................................................................................................................................................1509 21.2 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable............................................................................................1511 21.3 Installing Mandatory Components.........................................................................................................................1514 21.3.1 Installing the BBU...............................................................................................................................................1514 21.3.2 Installing the SLPU as a Transmission Signal Protection Unit...........................................................................1520 21.4 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables.......................................................................................................1521 21.4.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit..............................................................................1522 21.4.2 Installing the EMUA/EMUB...............................................................................................................................1525 21.4.3 Installing the GPS Surge Protector......................................................................................................................1532 21.4.4 Installing a DCDU...............................................................................................................................................1536 21.4.5 Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T..............................................................................1540 21.4.6 Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS300D or IBBS300T..............................................................................1542 21.5 Installing Cables.....................................................................................................................................................1545 21.5.1 Cabling Requirements.........................................................................................................................................1545 21.5.2 Routing Cables Out of a Cabinet.........................................................................................................................1552 21.5.3 Installing Power Cables.......................................................................................................................................1554 21.5.4 Installing Transmission Cables............................................................................................................................1577 21.5.5 Installing Signal Cables.......................................................................................................................................1586 21.5.6 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.....................................................................................................................1595 21.6 Installation Checklist..............................................................................................................................................1597 21.7 Powering On a Base Station...................................................................................................................................1600 21.8 Subsequent Operations...........................................................................................................................................1605 21.8.1 Sealing the Cable Holes on the Base...................................................................................................................1605 21.8.2 Repainting............................................................................................................................................................1606

22 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IBC10......................................1609 22.1 Installation Clearance Requirements......................................................................................................................1611 22.2 Installation Process.................................................................................................................................................1611 22.3 Installing a Cabinet.................................................................................................................................................1612 22.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor (Using Expansion Bolt Assemblies)...................................................1613 22.3.2 Installing a Cabinet on an ESD Floor..................................................................................................................1617 22.4 Installing a PGND Cable........................................................................................................................................1623 22.5 Pre-routing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.....................................................................................................................1625 22.6 Installing Components............................................................................................................................................1626 22.6.1 Installing a USU..................................................................................................................................................1627 22.6.2 Installing a BBU..................................................................................................................................................1629 22.6.3 Installing Boards in a BBU..................................................................................................................................1631 22.7 Installing Cables.....................................................................................................................................................1633 22.7.1 Cabling Requirements.........................................................................................................................................1633 22.7.2 Cable Outlets.......................................................................................................................................................1640 Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


xviii


Contents

22.7.3 Installing DCDU-12C power cables....................................................................................................................1641 22.7.4 Installing USU Power Cables..............................................................................................................................1643 22.7.5 Installing BBU Power Cables..............................................................................................................................1645 22.7.6 (Optional) Installing BBU Alarm Cables............................................................................................................1647 22.7.7 Installing a Monitoring Signal Cable for a Fan Assembly..................................................................................1650 22.7.8 (Optional) Installing Interconnection Cables......................................................................................................1650 22.7.9 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables........................................................................................................................1655 22.7.10 Installing FE/GE Fiber Optic Cables.................................................................................................................1657 22.7.11 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables...................................................................................................................1660 22.8 Installation Checklist..............................................................................................................................................1663 22.9 Powering On a Base Station...................................................................................................................................1665

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


xix


1

1 Changes in DBS3900 Installation Guide

Changes in DBS3900 Installation Guide This chapter describes the changes in DBS3900 Installation Guide.

03 (2014-08-30) This is the fifth official release. Compared with issue 02 (2014-07-30), this issue includes the following new information: l

Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS300D/IBBS300T

l

Installing an HAU01A-01 in the IBBS300D

l

Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300D or IBBS300T (APM:IBBS = 1:2)

l

Scenario of 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts and Its Expansion Scenario

Compared with issue 02 (2014-07-30), this issue incorporates the following changes: Topic

Change Description

l Installing the Base

Added descriptions of IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

l Installing the Cabinet on a Base l Stacking Two Cabinets l 6.9.2 Cable Holes

Compared with issue 02 (2014-07-30), no information is deleted from this issue.

02 (2014-07-30) This is the second official release. Compared with issue 01 (2014-04-30), no information is added or deleted. Compared with issue 01 (2014-04-30), this issue incorporates the following changes: Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1



Topic

Change Description

Installing the Base

Modified drill holes with a depth ranging from 52 mm (1.94 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.) to a depth ranging from 55 mm (2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).

01 (2014-04-30) This is the first official release. Compared with issue Draft C (2014-03-26), no information is changed.

Draft C (2014-03-26) This is a draft. Compared with issue Draft B (2014-02-28), no information is changed or deleted. Compared with issue Draft B (2014-02-28), this issue includes the following new information: l

22 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IBC10 and it's child topics.

Draft B (2014-02-28) This is a draft. Compared with issue Draft A (2014-01-20), no information is added or deleted. Compared with issue Draft A (2014-01-20), this issue incorporates the following changes: Topic

Change Description

About This Document

Added the description of the LampSite solution.

Powering On a Base Station (Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D))

Added descriptions of the status of the indicators for CPRI ports.

Powering On a Base Station (Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)) Powering On a Base Station (Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB) Powering On a Base Station (Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed on a Wall)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


2



Topic

Change Description

Powering On a Base Station (Indoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IMB03) Powering On a Base Station (Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TP48600A)

Draft A (2014-01-20) This is a draft. Compared with multimode base station version V100R008C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R015C00, GSM-BTS V100R015C00, eNodeB V100R006C00, this issue includes the following information: l

Descriptions of the triple-mode base station using the UMPT+UMPT BBU interconnection mode.

l

Descriptions of the UBBP.

l

Descriptions of the EMUB.

l

Scenarios where a DBS3900 is configured with 15 RRUs.

Compared with multimode base station version V100R008C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R015C00, GSM-BTS V100R015C00, eNodeB V100R006C00, this issue includes the following changes: Topic

Change Description

All the sections

Renamed all EPC6 connectors in this document EPC4 connectors.

Compared with multimode base station version V100R008C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R015C00, GSM-BTS V100R015C00, eNodeB V100R006C00, no information is deleted from this issue.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


3


2 Installation Preparations

2

Installation Preparations

About This Chapter This chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It also specifies the skills that the onsite personnel must have. 2.1 Documents Before the installation, you must be familiar with the following reference documents. 2.2 Tools and Instruments This section lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before installation. 2.3 Requirements for Onsite Personnel Onsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsite personnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


4



2.1 Documents Before the installation, you must be familiar with the following reference documents. l

3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description

l

DBS3900 Hardware Maintenance Guide

l

TP48600A-H17B1 User Guide

l

TP48600A-H17B1 Quick Installation Guide

l

OCB User Guide

For how to install RRUs, see the related RRU Installation Guide. For how to install an IFS06 and IMB03, see DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.

2.2 Tools and Instruments This section lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before installation. Phillips screwdriver (M3 to M6)

Marker

Diagonal pliers

Flat-head screwdriver (M3 to M6)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

32 mm (1.26 in.) combination wrench

Socket wrench

Torque wrench

Power cable crimping tool

RJ45 crimping tool

Cable cutter

Rubber mallet

Soldering iron

Wire stripper

Hammer drill (Φ16)

Heat gun

Level


5



Multimeter

Measuring tape

Vacuum cleaner

ESD wrist strap

ESD gloves

Torque screwdriver

Gloves

Utility knife

Hydraulic pliers

Torx screwdriver

-

-

2.3 Requirements for Onsite Personnel Onsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsite personnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions. Before the installation, pay attention to the following: l

The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be familiar with the proper installation and operation methods.

l

The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and installation environment. Generally, three to five onsite personnel are necessary.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


6


3 Installation Scenarios

3

Installation Scenarios

About This Chapter A DBS3900 mainly consists of the BBU and RRUs. With RRUs remotely installed, the DBS3900 can be deployed indoors and outdoors. If a DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC or DC power supply, the BBU can be installed in an outdoor APM30H, TMC11H, TP48600A-H17B1 (shortened to TP48600A in this document), or OMB. If a DBS3900 is installed indoors with AC or DC power supply, the BBU can be installed in an IMB03, a 19-inch rack, or directly installed on the wall. 3.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply This section describes the outdoor installation scenarios where a DBS3900 is supplied with AC power. 3.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply This section describes the scenarios where the DBS3900 is installed outdoors and is supplied with DC power. 3.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply This section describes the scenarios where the DBS3900 is installed indoors and is supplied with AC power. 3.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply This section describes the indoor installation scenarios where a DBS3900 is supplied with DC power.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


7



3.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply This section describes the outdoor installation scenarios where a DBS3900 is supplied with AC power. The following table describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 is supplied with AC power. Table 3-1 BBU installation scenarios

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

BBU Installation Position

Scenario Description

Remarks

APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D)

BBU 0 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D), and RRUs are installed remotely. The APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) supplies power to the BBUs, and the APM30H (Ver.D) supplies power to the RRUs.

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D)

APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B)

The BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B) and RRUs are installed remotely. The APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

The same configuration principles apply to the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) and the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet. For details, see BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet, which uses an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.

TP48600A

The BBU is installed in a TP48600A and the RRUs are installed remotely. The TP48600A supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in a TP48600A

OMB

The BBU is installed in an OMB and the RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an OMB


8





Remarks

OMB (Ver.C)

The BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) and the RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

Configurations of Cabinets Used by a DBS3900 Overall principles for configuring a DBS3900 l

When being configured with an APM30H (Ver.D), a DBS3900 can support a maximum of 15 RRUs. When being configured with an OMB, a DBS3900 can support only one RRU. When being configured with an OMB (Ver.C), a DBS3900 can support a maximum of 6 RRUs. When being configured with other cabinets, a DBS3900 can support a maximum of 12 RRUs.

l

During initial deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right and the auxiliary cabinets such as the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet, if required, are positioned on the left. During capacity expansion, unless otherwise stated, the original cabinets remain in the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right side of original cabinets.

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an APM30H cabinet are as follows: l

An APM30H can be installed side by side with only one TMC11H, or it can be stacked on a maximum of two IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts. (An IBBS200D/ IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T can be stacked on another cabinet of the same type.)

l

An APM30H or TMC11H can be installed on the ground or stacked on an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T.

l

An APM30H (Ver.D) can be installed side by side with only one IBBS700D or IBBS700T.

l

If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TP48600A cabinet are as follows: l

A TP48600A can be installed together with a TMC11H (Ver.C) side by side.

l

A TP48600A can be installed together with an IBB300D, IBBS300T, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T side by side.

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) NOTE

APM30H (Ver.D) is shortened to APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.D) is shortened to TMC11H.

Single- or dual-mode base station An APM30H cabinet can supply power to a maximum of 15 RRUs. When a base station is configured with 7 to 12 RRUs, another DCDU-12B must be added to the APM30H. When a base station is configured with 13 to 15 RRUs, an ODM and an OFD must be configured. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


9



A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When backup power is not required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 3-1 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station without backup power

A single- or dual-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts on a 1:1 ratio has a cabinet configuration that varies by customer space requirements and carrier configurations. These setups are shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


10



Figure 3-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts on a 1:1 ratio


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


11





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


12




The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 3-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Power Supply

Backup Power Capacity

Space for Custom er Equipm ent

Carrier Configura tion

Cabinet Configuration

110 V AC or 220 V AC

No backup power

≤5U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 TMC11H


13



Power Supply


APM30H s and IBBS200 Ds/ IBBS200 Ts initially configure d on a 1:1 ratio

l APM3 0Hs and IBBS 200Ds / IBBS 200Ts / IBBS 300Ds / IBBS

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)




≤4U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

≤ 15 U

≤ 15 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 ODM+1 OFD

≤ 15 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H

≤ 15 U

≤ 15 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 ODM+1 OFD

≤5U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

≤4U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

≤4U

≤ 15 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 ODM+1 OFD

≤ 15 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T

≤ 15 U

≤ 15 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T+1 ODM+1 OFD

≤5U

≤ 6 RRUs

l 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RRUs

l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T


14



Power Supply


300Ts initiall y config ured on a 1:2 ratio l APM3 0Hs and IBBS 700Ds / IBBS 700Ts initiall y config ured on a 1:1 ratio




≤4U

≤ 12 RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T

≤4U

≤ 15 RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 ODM+1 OFD l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD

≤ 15 U

≤ 12 RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T

≤ 15 U

≤ 15 RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts+1 ODM+1 OFD l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD

NOTE

When APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio and there are more than six RRUs, ensure that two or more 100 Ah battery packs are configured in each IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T to avoid overcurrent of a single battery pack.

Triple- or quadruple-mode base station When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBUs are installed as follows: l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

When two BBUs are configured in the initial deployment, the BBUs are installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.


15



l

During capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.

When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the position of the BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure. When backup power is not required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruplemode base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario. Figure 3-5 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station without backup power

A triple- or quadruple-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts on a 1:1 ratio has a cabinet configuration that varies by customer space requirements. These setups are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


16



Figure 3-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts on a 1:1 ratio

A triple- or quadruple-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts on a 1:2 ratio has a cabinet configuration that varies by customer space requirements. These setups are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


17



Figure 3-7 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts on a 1:2 ratio

A triple- or quadruple-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts on a 1:1 ratio has a cabinet configuration that varies by customer space requirements. These setups are shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


18




The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 3-3 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Power Supply


Space for Customer Equipme nt




No backup power

≤2U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

≤ 13 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H


19



Power Supply





APM30Hs and IBBS200D s/ IBBS200T s initially configured on a 1:1 ratio

≤2U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T/ IBBS300D/IBBS300T

≤ 13 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T

l APM30 Hs and IBBS2 00Ds/ IBBS2 00Ts/ IBBS3 00Ds/ IBBS3 00Ts initially configu red on a 1:2 ratio

≤2U

≤ 12 RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T

≤ 13 U

≤ 12 RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T

l APM30 Hs and IBBS7 00Ds/ IBBS7 00Ts initially configu red on a 1:1 ratio

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet NOTE

APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) are shortened to APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.B) and TMC11H (Ver.C) are shortened to TMC11H.

Single- or dual-mode base station Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


20



When backup power is not required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 3-9 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station without backup power


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


21



Figure 3-10 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts on a 1:1 ratio


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


22




A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. An APM30H can be connected to a maximum of 6 RRUs with 6 groups of RRU power cables, which contain 12 groups of 2-wire fiber optical cables. A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APM30H cabinets are required. The BBU is installed in the main APM30H cabinet, which is on the left. The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


23



Table 3-4 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply

Backup Power Capacit y

Space for Customer Equipment

Carrier Configurati on



No backup power

≤5U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

≤ 12 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 APM30Hs

≤ 23 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H

APM30 Hs and IBBS20 0Ds/ IBBS20 0Tss initially configur ed on a 1:1 ratio

≤5U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

≤ 12 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts

≤ 23 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

APM30 Hs and IBBS20 0Ds/ IBBS20 0Tss initially configur ed on a 1:2 ratio

≤5U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 12 U

≤ 12 RRUs


≤ 23 U

≤ 12 RRUs


Triple- or quadruple-mode base station The principles for configuring a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l

When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, BBU 0 is installed in the basic APM30H on the left and BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H on the right.

l

When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the position of the BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure.

When backup power is not required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


24



Figure 3-12 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station without backup power


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


25





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


26





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Power Supply



Carrier Configuratio n



No backup power

≤ 10 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 APM30Hs

≤ 21 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H

APM30Hs and IBBS200D

≤ 10 U

≤ 12 RRUs



27



Power Supply



Carrier Configuratio n


s/ IBBS200Ts initially configured on a 1:1 ratio

≤ 21 U

≤ 12 RRUs


APM30Hs and IBBS200D s/ IBBS200Ts initially configured on a 1:2 ratio

≤ 10 U

≤ 12 RRUs


≤ 21 U

≤ 12 RRUs


BBU Installed in a TP48600A Single- or dual-mode base station The single-or dual-mode base station is configured with one BBU. A TP48600A provides power to a maximum of 12 RRUs. When no storage battery cabinet is configured in the initial configuration, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


28



Figure 3-15 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no storage battery cabinet is configured initially

A single- or dual-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts on a 1:1 ratio has a cabinet configuration that varies by customer space requirements and carrier configurations. These setups are shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


29



Figure 3-16 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station initially configured with TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts on a 1:1 ratio

A single- or dual-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts on a 1:1 ratio has a cabinet configuration that varies by customer space requirements. These setups are shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


30




A single- or dual-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts on a 1:2 ratio has a cabinet configuration that varies by customer space requirements. These setups are shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


31




The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 3-6 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Power Supply


Space for Customer Equipmen t




No storage battery cabinet is

≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A


32



Power Supply





configured initially.

≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)

TP48600As and IBBS700Ds / IBBS700Ts initially configured on a 1:1 ratio

≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/ IBBS700D

≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/ IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)


≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs


≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs



≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds

≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)

Triple- or quadruple-mode base station The principles for configuring a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l

When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, BBU 0 is installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-11C in the equipment compartment and BBU 1 is installed in the 2 U space under BBU 0.

l

When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the position of the BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure.

When no storage battery cabinet is configured initially, the cabinet configurations of a triplemode base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


33



Figure 3-19 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station with 48 V 300 Ah backup power

A triple- or quadruple-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts on a 1:1 ratio has a cabinet configuration that varies by customer space requirements. These setups are shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


34



Figure 3-20 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts on a 1:1 ratio


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


35





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


36





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Power Supply






No storage battery cabinet is

≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A


37



Power Supply





configured initially.

≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)


≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs


≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs



≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs


≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs



≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds

≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)

BBU Installed in an OMB When a DBS3900 is configured with an OMB, one OMB can supply power only to one RRU. RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, or U-steel. The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


38



Figure 3-23 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB

BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C) Each OMB (Ver.C) configured in a DBS3900 can supply power to six RRUs. The RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, U-steel, or angle steel. The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) is shown in the following figure. Figure 3-24 Cabinet configuration of a base station in which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

3.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply This section describes the scenarios where the DBS3900 is installed outdoors and is supplied with DC power. When the DBS3900 is supplied with DC power and the BBU is installed outdoors, the installation scenarios of the BBU are listed in Table 3-8. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


39



Table 3-8 BBU installation scenarios BBU Installation Position


Remarks

TMC11H (Ver.D)

The BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D) and RRUs are installed remotely. The TMC11H (Ver.D) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D)

TMC11H (Ver.C)

The BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C) and RRUs are installed remotely. The TMC11H (Ver.C) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

TMC11H (Ver.B)

The BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) and RRUs are installed remotely. The TMC11H (Ver.B) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

The same configuration principles are used for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) and the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C). For details, see BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C), which uses a TMC11H (Ver.C) as an example.

APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V)

The BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power and RRUs are installed remotely. The APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) Supplied with +24 V DC Power

OMB

The BBU is installed in an OMB and the RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an OMB

OMB (Ver.C)

The BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) and the RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

NOTE

TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D) are referred to as TMC11H.

Configurations of Cabinets Used by a DBS3900 For details, see Configurations of Cabinets Used by a DBS3900.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


40



BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D) Single- or dual-mode base station A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the TMC11H. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 3-25 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios

A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. A single TMC11H can provide power to a maximum of 12 RRUs and support a maximum of 12 RRU power cables and 24 dual-wire fiber optic cables. The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations in the -48 V DC scenario. Table 3-9 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply


Carrier Configuration


-48 V DC

≤9U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)

≤8U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)

Triple- or quadruple-mode base station When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBUs are installed as follows: l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

In the initial deployment scenario, two BBUs are configured. The BBUs are installed in a TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input) and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H (only providing transmission space). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41



l

In the capacity expansion scenario, if there is space for a second BBU in the TMC11H, the BBU is installed in the TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input). Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (only providing transmission space).

When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, the BBU is installed in the position of BBU 0 in the following figure. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario. Figure 3-26 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are described in the following table. Table 3-10 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Power Supply




-48 V DC

≤6U

≤ 12 RRUs



42



Power Supply




≤ 17 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 TMC11H (with three DCDUs: two DCDUs in a TMC11H and one DCDU in the other)

BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) Single- or dual-mode base station A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the TMC11H. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dualmode base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 3-27 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios

A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. A single TMC11H can provide power to a maximum of 12 RRUs and support a maximum of 12 RRU power cables and 24 dual-wire fiber optic cables. The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations in the -48 V DC scenario. Table 3-11 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply




-48 V DC

≤9U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)

≤8U

≤ 12 RRUs


Triple- or quadruple-mode base station Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


43



The principles for configuring a triple-mode or quadruple- base station are as follows: l

Two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured. BBU 0 is installed in the main TMC11H cabinet, which is on the left. BBU 1 is installed in the extension TMC11H cabinet, which is on the right.

l

When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, the BBU is installed in the position of BBU 0 in the following figure.

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are described in the following table. Figure 3-28 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios

Table 3-12 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station Power Supply




-48 V DC

≤ 18 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 TMC11Hs

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) Supplied with +24 V DC Power When the BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power, this APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs. When +24 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station are shown in the following figure and table. Figure 3-29 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in +24 V DC scenarios

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


44



Table 3-13 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply




+24 V DC

≤5U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V)

When +24 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are described in the following table. Figure 3-30 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station in +24 V DC scenarios

Table 3-14 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station Power Supply




+24 V DC

≤ 10 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 APM30Hs (Ver.B, +24 V)

BBU Installed in an OMB In scenarios where the DBS3900 uses an OMB, an OMB supplies power to three RRUs, and the RRU can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, or U-steel. The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


45



Figure 3-31 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB

BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C) In scenarios where the DBS3900 uses an OMB (Ver.C), an OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to six RRUs, and the RRU can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, or U-steel. The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) is shown in the following figure. Figure 3-32 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

3.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply This section describes the scenarios where the DBS3900 is installed indoors and is supplied with AC power. The following table describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 is supplied with AC power. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


46



Table 3-15 Installation scenarios BBU Installation Position


Reference

IMB03

The BBU is installed in an IMB03 and the RRUs are installed remotely. The IMB03 supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an IMB03

IFS06

The BBU is installed in an IMB03. The IMB03 and RRUs are installed in an IFS06.

For details, see DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.

BBU Installed in an IMB03 When external 110 V or 220 V AC power is provided, an AC/DC power device or ETP48100B1 is required to supply power to the BBU and RRUs, as shown in the following figure. Figure 3-33 BBU installed in an IMB03 (without backup power)

The following table lists the cabinet and module configurations when the BBU is installed in an IMB03 and there is no backup power. Table 3-16 Cabinet and module configurations when the BBU is installed in an IMB03 (without backup power) Power Supply

Cabinet and Module Configuration

110 V/220 V

1 IMB03+1 AC/DC power device+1 RRU 1 IMB03+1 ETP48100-B1+3 RRUs

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


47



3.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply This section describes the indoor installation scenarios where a DBS3900 is supplied with DC power. The following table describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 is supplied with DC power. Table 3-17 Installation scenario BBU Installation Position


Reference

19-inch rack

19-inch racks consist of the INS12 rack provided by Huawei and the 19inch rack provided by the customer.

BBU Installed in a 19-Inch Rack

The BBU and the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B are installed in a 19-inch rack indoors, and the RRUs are remotely installed outdoors. The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and outdoor RRUs.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Wall

The BBU and DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B are installed on a wall indoors, and the RRUs are remotely installed outdoors. The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and outdoor RRUs.

BBU Installed on a Wall

Indoor

The BBU is installed indoors. RRUs are remotely installed outdoors. The APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), or APM30H (Ver.D) supplies power only to the RRUs and monitors only the RRUs.

BBU Installed Indoors and RRUs Installed Outdoors (Powered by an APM30H)

IMB03

The BBU is installed in an IMB03 and the RRUs are installed remotely outdoors. The IMB03 supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an IMB03

The BBU is installed in an IMB03. The IMB03 and RRUs are installed in an IFS06.

For details, see DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.


48





Reference

IBC10

The BBU is installed in an IBC10. The DCDU-12C supplies power to the BBU.

BBU Installed in an IBC10

BBU Installed in a 19-Inch Rack When -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B can be installed in a 19-inch rack, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario, the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station. Figure 3-34 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station

The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station configured with two BBUs. A triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station can also be configured with one BBU, and the cabinet configurations in this scenario are the same as those in the preceding figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


49



Figure 3-35 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station

BBU Installed on a Wall When -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B can be installed indoors on a wall, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario, the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs, as shown in the following figure. Figure 3-36 BBU installed on a wall

BBU Installed Indoors and RRUs Installed Outdoors (Powered by an APM30H) When the BBU is installed indoors and supplied with -48 V DC power, RRUs can be installed outdoors and supplied with power and monitored by an APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), or APM30H(Ver.D). The APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), or APM30H(Ver.D) can be Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


50



supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power. The following figure shows the installation scenarios. Figure 3-37 BBU installed indoors and RRUs installed outdoors

BBU Installed in an IMB03 When -48 V DC power is supplied, the BBU can be installed in an IMB03, which supplies power to the BBU as well as six RRUs installed outdoors, as shown in the following figure. Figure 3-38 BBU installed in an IMB03

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


51



BBU Installed in an IBC10 When -48 V DC power is supplied, the BBU can be installed in an IBC10, which supplies power to the BBU, as shown in the following figure. Figure 3-39 BBU installed in an IBC10

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


52


4 Unpacking Check

4

Unpacking Check

Unpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.

Context

CAUTION The gravity center of some cabinets is in the front, for example, the BTS3900AL, IBBS700T and IBBS300T . Therefore, avoid toppling of the cabinet when the door of the cabinet is opened, especially when you unpack the cabinet or before it has been secured onto a base.

NOTICE l Power on a cabinet or BBU within seven days after unpacking it. l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it. NOTE

When transporting, moving, or installing the equipment, components, or parts, you must: l

Prevent them from colliding with doors, walls, shelves, or other objects.

l

Wear clean gloves, and avoid touching the equipment, components, or parts with bare hands, sweatsoaked gloves, or dirty gloves.

Procedure Step 1 Check the total number of articles in each case according to the packing list.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


53


4 Unpacking Check

If...

Then...

The total number tallies with the packing list

Go to Step 2.

The total number does not tally with the packing list

Find out the cause and report any missing articles to the local Huawei office.

Step 2 Check the exterior of the packing case. If...

Then...

The outer packing case is intact

Go to Step 3.

The outer packing is severely damaged or Find out the cause and report the situation to soaked the local Huawei office. Step 3 Check the type and quantity of the equipment in the cases according to the packing list. If...

Then...

Types and quantity of the articles tally with Sign the Packing List with the customer. those on the packing list There are any goods missing, incorrectly delivered, or damaged

Report the situation to the local Huawei office.

CAUTION To protect the equipment and prevent damage to the equipment, you are advised to keep the unpacked equipment and packing materials indoors, take photos of the stocking environment, packing case or carton, packing materials, and any rusted or eroded equipment, and then file the photos. ----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


54


5 Obtaining the ESN

5

Obtaining the ESN

The electronic serial number (ESN) is a unique identifier of a NE. Record the ESN of the base station before the installation for future commissioning.

Procedure Step 1 Record the ESN on the BBU. l If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a mounting ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 5-1. Record the ESN and base station information. l If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the label and a mounting ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 5-2. Remove the label and record the base station information on the label printed with Site. NOTE

The base station information includes the name, ID, and location of the base station.

Figure 5-1 ESN position (1)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


55


5 Obtaining the ESN

Figure 5-2 ESN position (2)

Step 2 Report the ESN and base station information to the base station commissioning personnel or remove the label and give it to the base station commissioning personnel. NOTE

For base stations configured with multiple BBUs, record the ESNs on all BBUs and submit them to the personnel responsible for the base station commissioning.

----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


56

6 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D)


6

Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D)

About This Chapter This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D). 6.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing cabinets. The clearances are retained for cable layout and future maintenance. 6.2 Installation Process The DBS3900 installation process includes installing cabinets, installing components in the cabinets, installing cables, installation check, power-on check, and subsequent operations. 6.3 Installing a Cabinet This section describes the procedures for installing the cabinet on a concrete floor. pole, and wall. This document uses the APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet as an example.The installation procedures are the same for the APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C)/ TMC11H (Ver.C) and the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinet. 6.4 Installing the ODM06D or OFD06 When more than 12 RRUs are configured, the ODM06D or OFD06 needs to be installed to supply power to the RRUs and distribute trunk fiber optic cables on the RRU side. The ODM06D or OFD06 can be installed on a pole or mounting frame. 6.5 Configuring the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable for a Cabinet A PGND cable connects PGND screws on a cabinet and an external ground bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets. 6.6 Installing the PGND Cable for an ODM06D This section describes how to install the PGND cable and equipotential cable. The PGND cable connects PGND screws on a cabinet and an external ground bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. The equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


57



6.7 Installing Mandatory Components This chapter provides the reference for installing mandatory components in a DBS3900. 6.8 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables This chapter describes procedures for installing the optional modules and their cables onsite. 6.9 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. 6.10 Installation Checklist After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation environment, and cable-related items. 6.11 Powering On a Base Station This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply to the components in a cabinet. 6.12 Subsequent Operations This chapter describes the operations that need to be performed after the installation, which include sealing the cable holes on the base of the cabinet and repainting the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


58



6.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing cabinets. The clearances are retained for cable layout and future maintenance.

Clearance Requirements for Installing Cabinets on a Concrete Floor On a concrete floor, a cabinet can be stacked, or installed independently or side by side. A minimum of 40 mm (1.57 in.) clearance and a maximum of 150 mm (5.91 in.) clearance are required between two cabinets installed side by side. If a noise reduction module (NRM) is to be installed, the minimum clearance between cabinets is 300 mm (11.81 in.). The following figure shows clearance requirements for installing cabinets when a DBS3900 is configured with cabinets such as the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, and IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Figure 6-1 Clearance requirements for installing cabinets on a concrete floor (1)

The following figure shows the installation clearances for the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, and IBBS300D/IBBS300T configured at a DBS3900 site. Figure 6-2 Clearance requirements for installing cabinets on a concrete floor (2)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


59



The following figure shows clearance requirements for installing cabinets when a DBS3900 is configured with cabinets such as the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, and IBBS700D/IBBS700T. NOTE

If the site space is sufficient when an IBBS700D or IBBS700T is installed, the front doors of the cabinets are preferentially aligned with each other. If the front doors of the cabinets cannot be aligned with each other due to insufficient site space, the rears of the cabinets should be aligned with each other.

Figure 6-3 Clearance requirements for installing cabinets on a concrete floor (3)

NOTE

l Only the APM30H and TMC11H can be installed on a pole or wall. l When an APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with 15 RRUs, the ODM06D or OFD06 needs to be installed and the ODM06D or OFD06 can be installed on a pole.

Clearance Requirements for Installing a Cabinet on a Pole The diameter of a pole for installing a single cabinet ranges from 60 mm (2.36 in.) to 114 mm (4.49 in.). The recommended diameter is 80 mm (3.15 in.). The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing a cabinet on a pole.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


60



Figure 6-4 Clearance requirements for installing a cabinet on a pole

The ODM06D can be installed on a pole with a diameter ranging from 48 mm to 114 mm (1.89 in. to 4.49 in.). The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing an ODM06D on a pole. Figure 6-5 Clearance requirements for installing an ODM06D on a pole

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


61



The OFD06 can be installed on a pole with a diameter ranging from 48 mm to 114 mm (1.89 in. to 4.49 in.). The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing an OFD06 on a pole. Figure 6-6 Clearance requirements for installing an OFD06 on a pole

Clearance Requirements for Installing a Cabinet on a Wall The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing a single cabinet on a wall.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


62



Figure 6-7 Clearance requirements for installing a cabinet on a wall

6.2 Installation Process The DBS3900 installation process includes installing cabinets, installing components in the cabinets, installing cables, installation check, power-on check, and subsequent operations. The following figure shows the DBS3900 installation process. NOTE

The procedure for installing an RRU is not described in this document. For details about how to install an RRU, see the associated RRU installation guide according to the RRU model.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


63



Figure 6-8 Installation process

6.3 Installing a Cabinet This section describes the procedures for installing the cabinet on a concrete floor. pole, and wall. This document uses the APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet as an example.The installation procedures are the same for the APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C)/ TMC11H (Ver.C) and the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinet.

6.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor This section describes the procedures for installing the cabinet on a concrete floor.

Installing the Base This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the base for a cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


64



Context For the procedure for installing the base for an IBBS700D/IBBS700T, see Installing the Base in IBBS700D&IBBS700T User Guide.

Procedure l

To install the base for an APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T, perform the following operations: 1.

Place the base on the correct position. a.

Determine the position to install the cabinet according to the engineering drawing and 6.1 Installation Clearance Requirements.

b.

Mark anchor points on the concrete pad, as shown by the circles in the following figure.

c.

After drawing the lines between anchor points, use a measuring tape to measure the distance between anchor points to ensure that the dimensions are accurate.

Figure 6-9 Anchor points for the base

(1) Wall

2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Installation holes

Drill holes at the anchor points and insert expansion bolt assemblies in the holes, as shown in the following figure.


65



NOTICE l Take proper safety measures to protect your eyes and respiratory tract against the dust before drilling holes. l After dismantling the expansion bolt assembly, ensure that the top of the expansion tube is level with the concrete floor. Otherwise, the cabinet cannot be installed on the concrete floor evenly and securely. NOTE

In most cases, the concrete floor is smooth. Therefore, use a chisel to make a dent on the floor before using a hammer drill. Skip this step if the ground is easy to drill.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

a.

Use a hammer drill with a Φ16 drill bit to drill holes with a depth ranging from 52 mm (2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).

b.

Use a vacuum cleaner to clear the dust out from inside and around the holes, and measure the distances between holes. If any of the hole is beyond the acceptable range, mark a new anchor point and drill a new hole.

c.

Tighten an expansion bolt slightly and place it vertically into each hole.

d.

Hit the expansion bolt with a rubber mallet until the expansion tube completely enters the hole.

e.

Turn the M12x60 bolt counterclockwise and remove the bolt, spring washer, and flat washer.


66



Figure 6-10 Drilling a hole and inserting an expansion bolt assembly

(1) M12x60 bolt

3.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube

Place the base on the concrete pad, as shown in the following figure. a.

Place the base in the determined position on the concrete pad, using the expansion tubes as reference.

b.

Insert the M12x60 bolts, spring washers, and flat washers, but do not tighten them.


67



Figure 6-11 Installing the base in the correct position

4.

Adjust the base to a horizontal plane, as shown in the following figure. a.

Place the level on the base and observe the position of the mercury.

b.

The base is horizontal only when the mercury is in the center of the level. Add spacers between the base and the concrete pad to adjust the level if necessary.

Figure 6-12 Adjusting the base until it is horizontally level

(1) Levels

5.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Spacer

Use a torque wrench to tighten the M12x60 bolts in diagonally opposite sequence to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68



Figure 6-13 Tightening the bolts

6.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the three M4 countersunk screws from the front cover panel of the base, and remove the cover panel, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

Do not lose the removed screws and cover panel. They will be necessary later.

Figure 6-14 Removing the front cover plate

7.

Remove the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of the base, as shown in the following figure. a.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the M4 screw assemblies on both sides of the base and remove the baffle plates.


69



b.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two M4 screw assemblies on the rear left side of the base and slide the baffle plates to the left. Then, remove the baffle plates on the right one by one.

Figure 6-15 Removing the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of the base

l

Install the base for an IBBS300D/IBBS300T. 1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Install the base in the correct position. a.

Determine the position for installing the cabinet according to the engineering drawing and 6.1 Installation Clearance Requirements.

b.

Mark anchor points on the concrete pad, as shown by the circles in the following figure.

c.

After drawing the lines between anchor points, use a measuring tape to measure the distance between anchor points to ensure that the dimensions are accurate.


70



Figure 6-16 Anchor points for the base

(1) Wall

2.


Drill holes at the anchor points and insert expansion bolt assemblies in the holes, as shown in the following figure.

NOTICE l Take proper safety measures to protect your eyes and respiratory tract against the dust before drilling holes. l After dismantling the expansion bolt assembly, ensure that the top of the expansion tube is level with the concrete floor. Otherwise, the cabinet cannot be installed on the concrete floor evenly and securely. NOTE

In most cases, the concrete floor is smooth. Therefore, use a chisel to make a dent on the floor before using a hammer drill. Skip this step if the ground is easy to drill.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


71



a.


b.


c.


d.


e.

Turn the M12x60 bolt counterclockwise and remove the bolt, spring washer, and flat washer.


(1) M12x60 bolt

3.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube

Place the base on the concrete pad, as shown in the following figure. a.


b.



72



Figure 6-18 Installing the base for the IBBS300D/IBBS300T in the correct position

4.

Adjust the base to a horizontal plane, as shown in the following figure. a.


b.


Figure 6-19 Adjusting the base for the IBBS300D/IBBS300T until it is horizontally level

(1) Levels

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Spacer


73



5.

Use a torque wrench to tighten the M12x60 bolts in diagonally opposite sequence to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-20 Tightening the bolts on the base for the IBBS300D/IBBS300T

6.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the three M4 countersunk screws from the front cover panel of the base, and remove the cover panel, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

Do not lose the removed screws and cover panel. They will be necessary later.

Figure 6-21 Removing the front cover plate from the base for the IBBS300D/ IBBS300T

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


74



7.

Remove the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of the base, as shown in the following figure. a.


b.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two M4 screw assemblies on the rear left side of the base and slide the baffle plates to the left. Then, remove the baffle plates on the right one by one.

Figure 6-22 Removing the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of the base for the IBBS300D/IBBS300T

----End

Installing the Cabinet on a Base This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a cabinet on a base.

Context l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

The procedures for installing the APM30H, TMC11H, IBBS200D/IBBS200T, and IBBS300D/IBBS300T are the same. The following uses the APM30H as an example. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75



l

If the space is insufficient for you to install bolts at the bottom of the APM30H, remove one or two air baffles or filler modules from the bottom of the cabinet and reinstall them after the installation. NOTE

The APM30H (Ver.D) series cabinets are configured with air baffles. The APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) series cabinets are configured with filler modules.

l

For how to install an IBBS700D/IBBS700T on a base, see Installing a Cabinet in IBBS700D&IBBS700T User Guide.

Procedure Step 1 Lift the APM30H onto the base and align the bolt holes in the cabinet with those in the base, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-23 Lifting the APM30H cabinet onto the base

Step 2 Optional: Remove the one to two air baffles or filler modules from the bottom of the APM30H. l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Remove one or two air baffles from the bottom of an APM30H (Ver.D) series cabinet, as shown in the following figure.


76



Figure 6-24 Removing the air baffle

l

Remove one or two filler modules from the bottom of an APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) series cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 6-25 Removing the filler module

Step 3 Use four M12x35 bolts to secure the APM30H cabinet onto the base, and use a torque wrench to tighten the bolts to 45 N·m (398.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. NOTE

If an IBBS300D/IBBS300T is installed on a base, the gasket with an oblong hole shown in the following figure is not required.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


77



Figure 6-26 Securing the APM30H cabinet onto the base

(1) M12x35 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Waterproof rubber foot (5) Gasket with an oblong hole

Step 4 Optional: Reinstall the removed air baffles or filler modules. Secure the filler modules to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.). ----End

Stacking Two Cabinets This section describes the procedures and precautions for stacking two cabinets.

Context The DBS3900 supports the following stacking scenarios: an APM30H or TMC11H stacked on an IBBS200D/IBBS200T or IBBS300D/IBBS300T, an IBBS200D/IBBS200T stacked on another IBBS200D/IBBS200T, and an IBBS300D/IBBS300T stacked on another IBBS300D/ IBBS300T.

Procedure Step 1 Install the lower cabinet on the base. For detailed operations, see Installing the Cabinet on a Base. Step 2 Remove the cover plates from the cable holes at the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


78



Figure 6-27 Removing the cover plates from the cable holes

Step 3 Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-28 Removing the plastic screws

Step 4 Stack the cabinets and ensure that the installation holes on the upper cabinet are aligned with the installation holes on the lower cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


79



Figure 6-29 Stacking the cabinets

Step 5 Use a torque wrench to secure the four M12x35 bolts inside the cabinet in diagonally opposite sequence to 45 N·m (398.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. NOTE

If two IBBS300Ds or IBBS300Ts stack on each other, the gasket with an oblong hole shown in the following figure is not required.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


80





----End

6.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on a Pole This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the cabinet on a pole.

Context l

The cabinet can be installed at a maximum height of 10 m (32.81 ft).

l



Procedure Step 1 At an appropriate height on the pole, use four M12x180 bolts to secure a ladder-shaped bracket onto the pole, and tighten the bolts to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as show in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


81



Figure 6-31 Installing the ladder-shaped bracket

(1) Attachment plate

(2) Ladder-shaped bracket

(3) Pole

(4) Bolt

(5) Spring washer

(6) Flat washer

Step 2 Remove the two plastic bolts at the rear top of the cabinet, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-32 Removing the plastic bolts

Step 3 Install a bar at the top of the cabinet and use a socket wrench to tighten two M12x35 bolts on the bar, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


82



Figure 6-33 Installing a bar

(1) Bar


Remove one or two air baffles from the bottom of an APM30H (Ver.D) series cabinet, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-34 Removing the air baffle

l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



83




Step 5 Place the cabinet onto the ladder-shaped bracket, use four M12x35 bolts to secure the cabinet onto the ladder-shaped bracket, and use a torque wrench to tighten the bolts to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-36 Securing the cabinet

(1) Gaskets with oblong holes

Step 6 Put an U-shaped bracket through the holes in the bar at the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


84



Figure 6-37 Installing the U-shaped bracket

(1) Flat washer

(2) Spring washer

(3) Nut


6.3.3 Installing the Cabinet on a Wall This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the cabinet on a wall.

Context l


l



Procedure Step 1 Place a marking-off template against the wall, use a level to verify that the marking-off template is placed horizontally, and then use a marker to mark six anchor points, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


85



Figure 6-38 Marking the anchor points

(1) Anchor points

(2) Marking-off template

Step 2 Drill holes at the anchor points and install expansion bolts in the holes, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Use a hammer drill with a Ф16 drill bit to drill holes with a depth of 55 mm (2.17 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).

NOTICE Take proper safety measures to protect your eyes and respiratory tract against the dust before drilling holes. 2.

Partially tighten expansion bolts and place them vertically into holes.

3.

Use a rubber mallet to pound the expansion bolts until them go into the holes completely. Then tighten the bolts.

4.

Remove the bolts, spring washers, and flat washers in sequence.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


86



Figure 6-39 Drilling holes and installing the expansion bolts

(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube

Step 3 Align the ladder-shaped bracket with the four lower holes in the wall and use four M12x60 bolts to tighten the ladder-shaped bracket to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-40 Installing the ladder-shaped bracket

(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

Step 4 Remove the two plastic bolts at the rear top of the cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


87



Figure 6-41 Removing the plastic bolts

Step 5 Install a bar at the top of the cabinet and use a socket wrench to tighten two M12x35 bolts on the bar, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-42 Installing a bar

(1) Bar


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



88




l



Step 7 Place the cabinet onto the ladder-shaped bracket, use four M12x35 bolts to secure the cabinet onto the ladder-shaped bracket, and use a torque wrench to tighten the bolts to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


89



Figure 6-45 Securing the cabinet


Step 8 Use two bolts to secure the bar on the cabinet onto the wall, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-46 Securing the bar

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


90




6.4 Installing the ODM06D or OFD06 When more than 12 RRUs are configured, the ODM06D or OFD06 needs to be installed to supply power to the RRUs and distribute trunk fiber optic cables on the RRU side. The ODM06D or OFD06 can be installed on a pole or mounting frame.

6.4.1 Installing an ODM06D/OFD06 on a Pole This section describes the procedure for installing an ODM06D or OFD06 on an outdoor pole.

Context The diameter of a pole for installing an ODM06D or OFD06 should range from 48 mm to 114 mm (1.89 in. to 4.49 in.). An ODM06D is installed with the ports at the bottom, as shown in the following figure Figure 6-47 Correct installation of an ODM06D

An OFD06 is installed with the ports at the bottom, as shown in the following figure

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


91



Figure 6-48 Correct installation of an OFD06

NOTE

l The distance between the pole and the APM30H cabinet cannot exceed 2.5 m (8.2 ft). The maximum length of the cable between an ODM06D and an APM30H is 6 m (19.69 ft). l The procedures for installing an ODM06D and an OFD06 on poles are the same. This section describes the procedure for installing an ODM06D on a pole.

Procedure Step 1 Use six M4 screws to secure the mounting ears onto the ODM06D to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-49 Installing mounting ears

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


92



Step 2 Put the hose clamp through the holes in the middle of the mounting kit. Step 3 Place the ODM06D to the installation position, circle the hose clamp around the pole, put the steel strip of the hose clamp through the locking head, press the screw on a proper position to partially tighten it, and use an M6 inner hexagon wrench to tighten the screw to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. NOTE

When tightening the hose clamp, you need to be close to the ODM06D to prevent the ODM06D falling.

Figure 6-50 Tightening an ODM06D

----End

6.4.2 Installing the ODM06D/OFD06 on the Mounting Frame This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the ODM06D or OFD06 on the mounting frame on the cabinet side.

Context l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

An ODM06D or OFD06 mounting frame can be installed on one side of a single cabinet, or two ODM06D or OFD06 mounting frames can be installed on one side of stacked Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93



cabinets or both sides of a single cabinet. The ODM06D or OFD06 mounting frame can be installed depending on site space and the number of ODM06Ds or OFD06s to be installed. l

An ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame or two ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frames are preferentially installed on the right side of a single cabinet or stacked cabinets. If an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame or two ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frames are installed on the left side of a single cabinet or stacked cabinets, only one ODM06D or OFD06 can be installed one ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame.

l

When the rack is installed on the left side of the cabinet and two modules are installed side by side on the rack, the opening angle of the door cannot exceed 90 degrees.

l

Installing a mounting frame or two mounting frames on one side of a single cabinet or mounting frames or both sides of a single cabinet

Procedure

1.

Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-51 Installing a mounting kit on the top

2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Use four M12x30 nuts to secure a mounting kit on the top of the cabinet, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the nuts to 45 N·m (398.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.


94



Figure 6-52 Installing a mounting kit on the top

3.

Place the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on one side of the cabinet, and use two M6x14 screws to tighten the mounting frame to the mounting kit on the top to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-53 Securing an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame to one side of the cabinet

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


95



4.

Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the bottom of the ODM06D/ OFD06 mounting frame to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-54 Tightening an attachment plate on an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame (1)

5.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the back of the cabinet base to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.


96



Figure 6-55 Tightening an attachment plate on an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame (2)

6.

l

Optional: If two ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frames need to be installed on both sides of a single cabinet, the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the other side of the cabinet according to Step 3, Step 4 and Step 5.

Installing mounting frames on one side of stacked cabinets 1.

Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-56 Installing a mounting kit on the top

2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Use four M12x30 nuts to secure a mounting kit on the top of the cabinet, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the nuts to 45 N·m (398.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97



Figure 6-57 Installing a mounting kit on the top

3.

Place the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on one side of the cabinet, and use two M6x14 screws to tighten the mounting frame to the mounting kit on the top to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-58 Securing an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame to one side of the cabinet

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


98



4.

Install mechanical parts used for carrying upper and lower supports on the ODM06D/ OFD06 mounting frame, and use four M6X14 screws to tighten the mechanical parts to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-59 Install attachment plate

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

5.

Use four M6x14 screws to secure the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on the installed ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame, as shown in Figure 6-60.

6.

Use three M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the bottom of the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.


99



Figure 6-60 Tightening the second attachment plate (1)

7.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the back of the cabinet base to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.


100



Figure 6-61 Tightening the second attachment plate (2)

l

Installing the ODM06D or OFD06 1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Use six M4 screws to secure the mounting ears onto the ODM06D or OFD06 to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.


101



Figure 6-62 Installing mounting ears

2.

Place the ODM06D or OFD06 on the bulges of pre-securing parts on the ODM06D/ OFD06 mounting frame, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the right side of the cabinet, the ODM06D or OFD06 can be installed on one side or in the middle of the mounting frame. l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the left side of the cabinet, the ODM06D or OFD06 can be installed only in the middle of the mounting frame.

Figure 6-63 Pre-securing the ODM06D or OFD06

(1) Pre-securing part

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


102



3.

Use four M6x14 screws to secure the ODM06D or OFD06 onto the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.). This is a recommended tightening torque. Figure 6-64 Securing the ODM06D or OFD06

----End

6.5 Configuring the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable for a Cabinet A PGND cable connects PGND screws on a cabinet and an external ground bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.

Context The principles for grounding a DBS3900 site are as follows: l

The stacked cabinets or side-by-side cabinets are connected using equipotential cables.

l

When an IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T is configured, the lower cabinets are connected to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T under the primary APM30H using equipotential cables.

l

When an IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T is configured, the IBBS200D/ IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T under the primary APM30H is connected to the external ground bar using PGND cables. When an IBBS700D/IBBS700T is configured, the IBBS700D/IBBS700T on the left of the primary APM30H is connected to the external ground bar using PGND cables.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


103



The following table lists the specifications of PGND cables and equipotential cables in the APM30H series cabinets. Table 6-1 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable Cable

Application Scenario

Cross-Sectional Area of the Cable and Size of the OT Terminal

Color

PGND cable

For APM30H (Ver.B) series cabinets and the APM30H (Ver.B) +24 V cabinet

OT terminal (M6, 16 mm2 or 0.025 in.2)

Green and yellow

For the APM30H (Ver.C) series cabinets


l 220 V AC or -48 V DC input: green and yellow

For the APM30H (Ver.D) series cabinets




Green and yellow





l OT terminal (M6, 16 mm2 or 0.025 in.2) for the stacked cabinets

Equipotenti al cable

l 110 V AC input: green l 220 V AC input: green and yellow l 110 V AC input: green


l OT terminal (M6, 25 mm2 or 0.039 in.2) for the cabinets installed side by side

NOTE

The PGND cable is installed in the same way in the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H (Ver.D) series cabinets. This section uses the APM30H (Ver.D) series cabinets as an example.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


104



Procedure Step 1 Prepare the PGND cable and equipotential cable. 1.

Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Add OT terminals to both ends of the cables according to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the PGND cable, as shown in Figure 6-66 and Figure 6-67. 1.

Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T under the primary APM30H or in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T on the left of the APM30H, and secure the OT terminal to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

2.

Connect the other end of the PGND cable to the ground busbar outside the cabinet. NOTE

When installing a PGND cable, tightly press the OT terminal in the correct direction, as shown in Figure 6-65.

Figure 6-65 Installing an OT terminal correctly

Figure 6-66 Installing the PGND cable (when the IBBS200D/IBBS200T is configured)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


105




(1) Ground bar in the cabinet

(2) PGND cable

(3) External ground bar

Step 3 Install the equipotential cable, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


106



Figure 6-68 Installing the equipotential cable (when the IBBS200D/IBBS200T is configured)



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Equipotential cable


107






Step 4 Install the PGND cable and equipotential cable for the APM30H (Ver.B) +24 V cabinet, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar on the inner wall of the cabinet under the APM30H (Ver.B) +24 V cabinet, and secure the screws on the OT terminal to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.). Then, connect the other end to the external ground bar.

2.

Install the equipotential cable.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


108



Figure 6-71 Installing a PGND cable and an equipotential cable

(1) Ground bar on the inner wall the cabinet

(2) PGND cable (3) Equipotential cable (4) Ground busbar

Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 6 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole on the cabinet. Step 7 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. ----End

6.6 Installing the PGND Cable for an ODM06D This section describes how to install the PGND cable and equipotential cable. The PGND cable connects PGND screws on a cabinet and an external ground bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. The equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.

Context The following table lists the specifications of the PGND cable for an ODM06D.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


109



Table 6-2 Specifications of the PGND cable Cable


Size of the OT Terminal and CrossSectional Area of the Cable

Color

PGND cable

ODM06D

OT terminal (M6) at one end connecting to a cable with a crosssectional area of 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) and cord end terminal at the other end

Green and yellow

Procedure Step 1 Prepare a PGND cable. 1.


2.

Add an OT terminal and a cord end terminal at the ends of a PGND cable according to the instructions in Installing the Cord End Terminal and Installing the OT Terminal.

Step 2 Install the PGND cable for the ODM06D, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Partially loosen the PG connector to route the cable through the PG connector.

2.

Route PGND cable for the ODM06D through the PG connector.

3.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to secure the cord end terminal onto the terminal block.

4.

Use the cable clip to secure the cable and tighten the screw on the cable clip to ensure that the cable clip contact with the shield layer of the cable.

5.

Secure the PG connector of the cable.

NOTICE Tighten the PG connector to waterproof the device.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


110



Figure 6-72 Installing the PGND Cable for an ODM06D

Step 3 Connect the other end of the PGND cable for the ODM06D to the external ground bar. ----End

6.7 Installing Mandatory Components This chapter provides the reference for installing mandatory components in a DBS3900.

6.7.1 Installing the BBU This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the BBU.

Context l

When the DBS3900 is configured with the APM30H, TMC11H, or TP48600A, a maximum of two BBUs are installed according to the onsite conditions. When the DBS3900 is configured with the IMB03, OMB, or OMB (Ver.C), only one BBU is installed.

l

The following figure shows the positions for installing the BBUs when the DBS3900 is configured with an APM30H (Ver.D). NOTE

1. If two BBUs are configured in initial site deployment, they are installed in an APM30H and the transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H. 2. During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the second BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the second BBU is installed in a TMC11H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


111



Figure 6-73 Positions for installing the BBUs

l

The following figure shows the positions for installing the BBUs when the DBS3900 is configured with a TMC11H (Ver.D). NOTE

1. In the initial deployment scenario, two BBUs are configured. The BBUs are installed in a TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input) and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H (only providing transmission space). 2. In the capacity expansion scenario, if there is space for a second BBU in the TMC11H, the BBU is installed in the TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input). Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (only providing transmission space).


l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

The installation position of the BBU in the APM30H (Ver.B) is the same as that in the APM30H (Ver.C), and the installation position of the BBU in the TMC11H (Ver.B) is the same as that in the TMC11H (Ver.C), as shown in the following figure.


112




(1) The BBU is installed in the APM30H.

l

(2) The BBU is installed in the TMC11H.

The following figure shows the installation position of the BBU in the OMB, OMB (Ver.C), or IMB03. Figure 6-76 Installation position of the BBU in the OMB, OMB (Ver.C), or IMB03

l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

The following figure shows the installation position of the BBU in the INS12.


113



Figure 6-77 Installation position of the BBU in the INS12

l

The following figure shows the installation position of the BBU in the TP48600A. Figure 6-78 Installation position of the BBU in the TP48600A

Procedure Step 1 Install a BBU. l When the BBU is installed in a TMC11H, OMB, or Indoor centralized support, check the installation direction of the mounting ears for the BBU. If the mounting ears are installed in standard mode, skip this step. If the mounting ears are installed reversely, reinstall them in standard mode as follows: 1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Remove the mounting ears on the BBU, as shown in the following figure.


114



Figure 6-79 Removing the mounting ears on the BBU

2.

Remove the two ground screws, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-80 Removing the ground screws

3.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Reinstall the mounting ears in standard mode, as shown in the following figure.


115



Figure 6-81 Reinstalling the mounting ears in standard mode

Step 2 Optional: Install cable claws for the BBU in the APM30H or TMC11H. Align a cable claw with the holes on one side of the BBU. Then use two M4 screws to secure the cable claw to the BBU and tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-82 Installing a cable claw on the BBU

Step 3 Slide the BBU into the cabinet, and tighten the four M6x16 screws on the panel of the BBU to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

NOTICE When installing a BBU equipped with boards, hold the bottom of the BBU with your hands and slide it into the cabinet slowly to prevent it from falling.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


116



Figure 6-83 Installing the BBU

----End

6.7.2 Installing the SLPU as a Transmission Signal Protection Unit When an outdoor base station transmits signals through an E1/T1 or FE/GE port, you need to install the SLPU as a transmission signal protection unit.

Context The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space below the fan assembly at the top of the APM30H, TMC11H, or TP48600A.

Procedure Step 1 Move the cable claws, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the four M4 screws from the mounting ear on each side of the SLPU.

2.

Place a cable claw between the mounting ear and the SLPU on each side, move the mounting ear backwards by one hole, and align the mounting holes in the cable claw with those in the mounting ear and the SLPU.

3.

Use the two removed M4 screws to secure the mounting ear and cable claw to the SLPU and tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


117



Figure 6-84 Moving the cable claw on the SLPU

Step 2 Slide the SLPU into the cabinet and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two M6x12 screws on the mounting ears to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-85 Installing the SLPU

----End

6.8 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables This chapter describes procedures for installing the optional modules and their cables onsite.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


118



6.8.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit When an outdoor base station uses 1 to 16 customerized alarm inputs, you need to install the SLPU as a monitoring signal protection unit and its cables.

Context l

The following table lists the specifications of the cables for the SLPU. Table 6-3 Cable specifications

l

Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

Surge protection transfer cable for the monitoring signals

RJ45 connector

RJ45 connector

Gray shielded straight-through cable

External dry contact monitoring signal cable

Bare wire

Depending on the external equipment

-

The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space under the BBU.

Procedure Step 1 Select the step according to the types of the APM30H. If...

Then...

An APM30H(Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.C), TMC11H(Ver.B), or TMC11H (Ver.C) is used

Go toStep 2.

An APM30H(Ver.D) or TMC11H(Ver.D) is used

Go toStep 3.

Step 2 Optional: If there is a filler module in the installation position, remove the filler module, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting ear on each side of the filler module.

2.

Slide the filler module out of the cabinet. NOTE

The removed filler modules must be installed in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet from top down. If vacant slots are all occupied with filler modules, other redundant filler modules are discarded.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


119




Step 3 Optional: If there is an air baffle in the installation position, remove the air baffle, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

The removed air baffles must be installed in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet from top down. If vacant slots are all occupied with air baffles, other redundant air baffles are discarded.


Step 4 Move the cable claws, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


120





Step 6 Install the surge protection transfer cable for the monitoring signals, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the cable to the OUT0 port on the USLP2 in slot 3 of the SLPU.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the EXT_ALM0 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


121



Figure 6-90 Installing the surge protection transfer cable for the monitoring signals

NOTE

A maximum of three surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals are installed according to the actually customerized alarm inputs, as shown in the following figure. For details about the customerized alarm inputs and cable connections, see section "Customized Alarm Input Principles" in the corresponding hardware description.

Figure 6-91 Connections of the surge protection transfer cable for the monitoring signals

Step 7 Install external dry contact monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Cut the external dry contact monitoring signal cable to the length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Strip an 8 mm (0.31 in) length of the jacket off the cable connected to the USLP2 to expose the wires.

3.

Use a screwdriver to press the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP, insert the external dry contact monitoring signal cables into the ports, and move the screwdriver away.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


122



Figure 6-92 Installing the external dry contact monitoring signal cable

Step 8 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 6.9.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 9 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End

6.8.2 Installing the SOU This section describes the procedure for installing the service outlet unit (SOU) and its power cable when a DBS3900 is configured with an APM30H.

Context There are four types of mounting brackets designed in different specifications and used in different countries, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-93 Specifications of SOU mounting brackets

(1) British standard

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Universal

(3) American standard


(4) European standard

123



Procedure Step 1 Slide the SOU into the cabinet, and then tighten the four M6x12 screws to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. NOTE

The SOU is preferentially installed in the bottom 1 U space of the cabinet.

Figure 6-94 Installing the SOU

Step 2 Install the SOU power cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the protective cover for the AC OUTPUT port on the EPS or EPU subrack.

2.

Connect the C13 connector at one end of the SOU power cable to the power input port on the SOU.

3.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the brown, and blue wires of the SOU power cable to the L2 and N2 terminals in the AC OUTPUT port on the EPS or EPU subrack, respectively. Connect the green and yellow wire of the SOU power cable to the PGND terminal in the left mounting ear, and tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

4.

Install the protective cover for the AC OUTPUT port on the EPS or EPU subrack and the AC baffle plate, and tighten the screws to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).. NOTE

The following figure describes the procedure for installing the SOU power cable in the APM30H (Ver.D). The procedure for installing the SOU power cable in the APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B) is the same.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


124



Figure 6-95 Installing the SOU power cable

Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. ----End

6.8.3 Installing the AC Heater When the environmental temperature of a cabinet is low, the cabinet can be configured with a heater so that the temperature in the cabinet is kept in a proper range. This section describes the procedure for installing a heater in an APM30H or TMC11H.

Context The procedure for installing an AC heater is the same for the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H (Ver.D). The procedure for installing an AC heater is the same for the TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D). The figures in this section use the APM30H (Ver.D) and TMC11H (Ver.D) as examples. If a service outlet unit (SOU) is not installed in the cabinet, install the AC heater in the 1U space at the bottom of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 6-96. If an SOU is installed in the cabinet, install the AC heater above the SOU, as shown in Figure 6-97.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


125



Figure 6-96 Position of the AC heater (1)


(2) SOU

(1) AC heater

Procedure Step 1 Slide the AC heater into the cabinet along the guide rails, and then tighten the four M6x12 screws on the panel to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-98 Installing the AC heater

Step 2 Install the AC heater power cable. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


126



If...

Then...

The AC heater is installed in an APM30H

Perform Step 2.1

The AC heater is installed in a TMC11H

Perform Step 2.2

1.

Install the AC heater power cable in the APM30H. a.

Remove the cover plate of the AC junction box.

b.

Connect the C13 connector at the other end of the AC heater power cable to the power input port on the AC heater.

c.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown, blue, and green and yellow wires of the AC heater power cable to the L0, N0, and PE terminals in the AC junction box, respectively.

d.

Install the cover plate of the AC junction box and tighten the screws on the cover plate to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Figure 6-99 Installing the AC heater power cable

2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Install the AC heater power cable in the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 6-100 and Figure 6-101. a.


b.


c.


d.

To install the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H, do as follows: Route the cables into the cabinet from the left side of the cabinet, connect the OT Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127



terminals at one end of the cables to the L and N terminals in the AC junction box in the TMC11H and the other end of the cables to the external power equipment. e.


Figure 6-100 Installing the heater power cables

Figure 6-101 Installing power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


128



Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 6.9.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. ----End

6.8.4 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the APM30H When an outdoor base station uses 17 to 32 customerized alarm inputs, you need to install the EMUA/EMUB and its cables.

Context l

The EMUA/EMUB is installed in a reserved slot in the cabinet. In normal cases, it is installed in the 1 U space under the installed devices in the cabinet.

l

The following table lists the specifications of the cables for the EMUA/EMUB. Table 6-4 Cable specifications Cable EMUA/ EMUB power cable

Color

One End

The Other End

RTN(+) wire

Black

EPC4 connector

Cord end terminal

NEG(-) wire

Blue DB9 male connector

RJ45 connector

EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable

l

Black

The figures showing how to install an EMUA are the same as those showing how to install an EMUB. The following figures show how to install an EMUB.


Then...

An APM30H(Ver.B) or APM30H(Ver.C) is used

Go toStep 2.

An APM30H(Ver.D) is used

Go toStep 3.



2.

Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


129


DBS3900 Installation Guide NOTE






Step 4 Optional: Align the cable claws with the holes of the mounting ears on the EMUB, and stick the cable claws onto both sides of the EMUB, as shown in the following figure. If you want to install an EMUA, skip this step.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


130



Figure 6-104 Sticking cable claws onto both sides of an EMUB

(1) Double-sided tape

Step 5 Install the EMUA/EMUB, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Slide the EMUA/EMUB into the installation position.

2.

Tighten the four M6 screws on the mounting ear on both sides of the EMUA/EMUB to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).

Figure 6-105 Installing the EMUA/EMUB

Step 6 Prepare the EMUA/EMUB power cable. 1.

Cut the power cable to the length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Add the cord end terminal to one end of the EMUA/EMUB power cable according to the instructions in Assembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.

3.

Add the corresponding connector to the other end of the EMUA/EMUB power cable according to the type of the power equipment, as listed in the following table.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


131



Table 6-5 Method of adding the connectors on the EMUA/EMUB power cable Base Station


Power Equipment

Method of Adding the Connector

BTS3900A (Ver.D) -

EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04

DBS3900

The EMUA/EMUB is installed in the APM30H (Ver.D).


Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable

BTS3900A (Ver.B)

-

EPS 01A or EPS 01C

BTS3900A (Ver.C)

-


DBS3900

The EMUA/EMUB is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B).

EPS 01B or EPS 01D

The EMUA/EMUB is installed in the APM30H (Ver.C).


Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(1)

Step 7 Install the EMUA/EMUB power cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the cord end terminal at one end of the EMUA/EMUB power cable to the PWR1 port on the EMUA/EMUB.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the corresponding power equipment, as listed in the following table. Table 6-6 Installation position of the EMUA/EMUB power cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Base Station


Power Equipment

Installation Position

BTS3900A (Ver.B)

-

EPS 01A or EPS 01C

DC output terminal LOAD7

DBS3900


EPS 01B or EPS 01D

BTS3900A (Ver.C)

-


DBS3900





132



Base Station


Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) -


DC output fuse terminal LOAD5

DBS3900



Figure 6-106 Installing the EMUA/EMUB power cable

3.

Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 6.9.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them.

4.

Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label.

Step 8 Install the EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the cable with a DB9 male connector to the RS-485 port on the EMUA or the COM_485 port on the EMUB.

2.

Connect the RJ-45 connector at the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the PMU in the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


133



Figure 6-107 Installing the EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable

3.


4.

Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.

----End

6.8.5 Installing the DCDU-12B You need to install the DCDU-12B and its cables when RRUs are added to a base station configured only with RFUs.

Context l

The following figure shows the position for installing the DCDU-12B in a cabinet. Table 6-7 Position for installing the DCDU-12B

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Base Station



BTS3900A (Ver.D)

-

1 U space at the top of the RFC

DBS3900

Configured with a APM30H (Ver.D), 7 to 12 RRUs are installed in a cabinet

Depending on site requirements


134



Base Station



Configured with a TMC11H (Ver.D), 7 to 12 RRUs are installed in a cabinet

Figure 6-108 Position of a DCDU-12B

l

The following table lists the specifications of the DCDU-12B power cable. Table 6-8 Cable specifications Base Station

Applic ation Scenari o

Cable

BTS390 0A (Ver.D)

AC

BTS390 0A (Ver.D)

DC

Color Most Region s

UK

RTN(+)

Black

Blue

NEG(-)

Blue

Grey

RTN(+)

Black

Blue

CrossSection al Area

Connector One End

The Other End

25 mm2 or 0.039 in.2, one group

OT terminal (M6)

OT terminal (M6)

l 35 mm2 or 0.05 4 in.

OT terminal (M6)

Dependi ng on the external equipme nt

2

(low smo ke zero halo

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


135



Base Station


Cable

NEG(-)

Color Most Region s

UK

Blue

Grey


Connector One End

The Other End


OT terminal (M6)

OT terminal (M6)

l 35 mm2 or 0.05 4 in.

OT terminal (M6)


gen), one grou p l 16 mm2 or 0.02 5 in. 2, two grou ps

DBS390 0

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Configu red with a APM30 H (Ver.D), 7 to 12 RRUs are installed in a cabinet

RTN(+)

Black

Blue

NEG(-)

Blue

Grey

Configu red with a TMC11 H (Ver.D), 7 to 12 RRUs are

RTN(+)

Black

Blue


2

(low smo

136



Base Station


Cable

installed in a cabinet

NEG(-)

Color Most Region s

UK

Blue

Grey


Connector One End

The Other End

ke zero halo gen), one grou p l 16 mm2 or 0.02 5 in. 2, two grou ps

Procedure Step 1 Remove the four M6 screws on both sides of the slot for installing the DCDU-12B. Step 2 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12B, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-109 Installing a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12B


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


137



Step 3 Install the DCDU-12B, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears on both sides of the DCDU-12B contact the columns.

2.

Tighten the four M6 screws on both sides of the DCDU-12B to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).

Figure 6-110 Installing the DCDU-12B

(1) DCDU-12B

(2) Cable claw

Step 4 Prepare the DCDU-12B power cable. 1.

Cut the cable to the length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Add new connectors to both ends of the cable. Table 6-9 Cable Connector Base Station


Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) AC


DBS3900


Add new connectors to both ends of the power cable according to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.


BTS3900A (Ver.D) DC

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

External power equipment


Add new OT terminals to one end of the power cable according to the 138



Base Station


DBS3900

Configured with a TMC11H (Ver.D)

Power Equipment

Method of Adding the Connector instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. The connector at the other end depends on the site requirements.

Step 5 Install the DCDU-12B power cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the protective cover for the terminals of the DC input power cable from the DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12B, and tighten the screws on the DCDU-12B to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

2.

Reinstall the protective cover, and use a screwdriver to tighten the screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the other end of the power cable to the corresponding port on the power equipment, as described in the following table. Table 6-10 Cable Installation Position Base Station


Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) AC


DC output terminal RFC2 on the EPU in the APM30H, and tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.)

DBS3900




Corresponding port on the external power equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) DC

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


139



Base Station


DBS3900


Power Equipment


Figure 6-111 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable


6.8.6 Installing the GPS Surge Protector The GPS surge protector can be installed at a site to provide surge protection for GPS signals.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


140



Context A satellite card needs to be installed onsite only for a USCU that uses two satellite cards. To install a satellite card, perform steps 1 to 3.

Procedure Step 1 Optional: Loosen the two M3 screws on the panel of the USCU and pull it out, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-112 Removing the USCU

Step 2 Optional: Install a satellite card on the USCU, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the three M1.6 screws on the USCU.

2.

Place the satellite card on the USCU, aligning the mounting holes on the satellite card with the bolts on the USCU.

3.

Use the three M1.6 screws removed in step a to secure the satellite card, and tighten the screws to 0.1 N·m (0.89 1bf·in.).

4.

Connect one end of the RF jumper for the satellite card to the RF port on the satellite card, and connect the other end to the GPS port on the USCU.

NOTICE There are six mounting holes on the satellite card, but you need to install only three screws, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


141



Figure 6-113 Installing a satellite card on the USCU

(1) Satellite card

(2) RF jumper for the satellite card

Step 3 Optional: Install the USCU in the BBU, and tighten the captive screws on the USCU to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.). Step 4 Secure the GPS clock signal cable onto the support, and tighten the screws to 6.5 N·m (57.53 lbf in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


142



Figure 6-114 Securing the GPS clock signal cable onto the support

(1) GPS clock signal cable

(2) Support

Step 5 Secure the support onto the left inner wall of the cabinet, and tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-115 Securing the support onto the cabinet

Step 6 Connect the GPS clock signal cable to the GPS port on the LMPT, USCU, or UMPTa6, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

If the BBU is configured with an LMPT or UMPTa6, the GPS clock signal cable is preferentially connected to the GPS port on the LMPT or UMPTa6.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


143



Figure 6-116 Connecting the GPS clock signal cable to the USCU

(1) BBU

(2) GPS support

Step 7 Use a torque wrench to secure the Protect port on the GPS surge protector onto the Type N50 straight female connector at one end of the GPS signal cable, and tighten the screw to 4 N·m (35.40 lbf in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-117 Installing the GPS surge protector

(1) GPS surge protector NOTE

The exterior of the GPS surge protector in this section is for reference only. The actual exterior may be different.

Step 8 Use a torque wrench to secure the GPS jumper to the Surge port on the GPS surge protector, and tighten the screw to 4 N·m (35.40 lbf in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


144



Figure 6-118 Installing the GPS jumper


6.8.7 Installing the DDF The digital distribution frame (DDF) distributes alarm cables and E1/T1 cables.

Context l

The DDF is installed in the 1 U space reserved in the cabinet.

l

In the following figure showing the digital distribution module, a, b, and s have different meanings. – a and b indicate signal cables. – s indicates a PGND cable.

l

Alarm cables are routed on the left side of the DDF, and E1/T1 cables are routed on the right side of the DDF. All cables are routed from the top down.

l

The following procedure uses a twisted pair cable as an example. When installing an E1 coaxial cable, install an insulating pad between the wiring terminal and the DDF.

Procedure Step 1 Distribute the twisted pair cable on the DDF on the BBU side. This twisted pair cable is connected to the BBU. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


145



1.

Insert the bare wires at one end of the twisted pair cable to the corresponding digital distribution module according to the colors and labels of the wires.

2.

Use an impact tool to seat the wires of the twisted pair cable into the terminal blocks on the DDF, as shown in Figure 6-119.

Step 2 Distribute the twisted pair cable on the DDF on the peer equipment side. This twisted pair cable is connected to the peer equipment. 1.


2.


Step 3 Arrange the wires on the DDF, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-119 Cabling on the DDF

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


146



l After distributing cables on the DDF, ensure that no bare wire is exposed outside the DDF. l When interconnecting cables on both sides of the DDF, interconnect wires according to actual situations. The colors of interconnected wires must be the same, as shown in Figure 6-119.

Step 4 Select the step according to the types of the cabinet. If...

Then...


Go toStep 5.

An APM30H(Ver.D) or BTS3900AL(Ver.A) is used

Go toStep 6.



2.






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


147




Step 7 Check whether floating nuts are installed on both sides of the 19-inch rack. If no, install the floating nuts delivered with the DDF to both sides of the rack. Step 8 Align the DDF with the cabinet, slide it into the cabinet, and use a screwdriver to tighten two M6x12 screws on each side of the DDF to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-122 Installing the DDF

----End

6.8.8 Installing storage batteries This section describes the procedure for installing storage batteries in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T and IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

Installing the Batteries This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the batteries and related cables in the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS700D, and IBBS700T.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


148



Prerequisites A screwdriver and ESD gloves are available. Before installing the storage battery, please check if the voltage of the storage battery is normal. l

The voltage of a 2 V storage battery ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.

l


l

The total voltage of the storage batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.

Context

DANGER l During the installation, avoid any contact between the exposed metal conductors in the power cables and the metal housing of the cabinet. l During the installation, avoid short circuits or reverse connections between the positive and negative poles of the batteries. l All tools used for installation must be insulated to avoid burning of batteries and to ensure personal safety. This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing batteries in an IBBS200D or IBBS200T. For the procedure for installing batteries in an IBBS700D/IBBS700T, see 21.4.5 Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T in IBBS700D&IBBS700T User Guide.

Procedure Step 1 Check that the power input and output switches for the batteries are turned off to avoid overcurrent. The correct positions of the switches are shown by 1 and 2 in Figure 6-123.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


149



Figure 6-123 Power switches for a storage battery

(1) BAT circuit breaker on the panel of the EPU in the (2) BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breakers on the APM30H power distribution box in the battery cabinet

Step 2 Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown in Figure 6-124. NOTE

Slide the storage batteries along the guide rails into the cabinet so that some spacing remains between them.

Figure 6-124 Installing the storage batteries

Step 3 Install power cables for the new storage batteries, as shown in Figure 6-125. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


150



1.

Remove terminal covers from the storage batteries.

2.

Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring batteries for series connections.

3.

First connect the negative power cable and then the positive power cable for each storage battery. Negative power cables are black, and positive power cables are red. Figure 6-125 Installing power cables for the storage batteries

The following figure shows the route of power cables in the battery cabinet. Figure 6-126 Route of power cables for storage batteries

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


151



----End

Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS300D/IBBS300T When an outdoor base station requires the long-term backup power, you need to install storage batteries and the power cables in the battery cabinet (IBBS300D/IBBS300T).

Prerequisites A screwdriver and ESD gloves are available. Before installing the storage battery, please check if the voltage of the storage battery is normal. l


l


l


Context

DANGER l During the installation, avoid any contact between the exposed metal conductors in the power cables and the metal housing of the cabinet. l During the installation, avoid short circuits or reverse connections between the positive and negative poles of the batteries. l All tools used for installation must be insulated to avoid burning of batteries and to ensure personal safety.

Procedure Step 1 Check that the input and output power switches on the storage batteries has been turned off. If the switches are turned on, an excessively large current may occur. The following figure shows the positions of switches.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


152



Figure 6-127 Power switches for storage batteries

Step 2 Install storage batteries in the sequence shown in the following figure. NOTE

The storage batteries should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is reserved between the storage batteries.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


153



Figure 6-128 Installing storage batteries

Step 3 Install the power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end of the black cable to the NEG(-) terminal in the DC junction box in the inner left side of the battery cabinet, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.). Connect OT terminal at the other end of cable to the negative wiring terminal on the storage batteries, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw.

2.

Connect the M6 OT terminal at one end of the red cable to the terminal on the circuit breaker in the battery cabinet, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.). Connect OT terminal at the other end of cable to the negative wiring terminal on the storage batteries, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw. NOTE

There are two types of screws for copper bars and wiring terminals on storage batteries, M6 and M8. They are tightened to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.) and 14 N·m (123.90 lbf·in.), respectively.

Figure 6-129 Installing power cables for storage batteries

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


154



Step 4 Install copper bars for the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the terminal covers from poles of the storage batteries.

2.

Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring storage batteries. Figure 6-130 Installing copper bars for storage batteries

Step 5 Close the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries. ----End

6.8.9 Installing an HAU01A-01 This section describes the procedure for installing an HAU01A-01 in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T and IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

Installing an HAU01A-01 in the IBBS700D This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an HAU01A-01 and its cables in the IBBS700D.

Context The mounting ears and M4 countersunk screws for the heater are placed in an accessory bag that is located at the bottom of the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


155



Procedure Step 1 Use M4 countersunk screws to secure the mounting ears to the HAU01A-01, and then use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-131 Installing the mounting ears

Step 2 Install the HAU01A-01 in the corresponding slot in the cabinet, and use an M6 torque screwdriver to tighten the four M6x12 screws on the HAU01A-01 to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


156



Figure 6-132 Installing the heater

Step 3 Install the HAU01A-01 power cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws on the cover plate of the AC junction box, and then open the cover plate.

2.

Connect the C13 connector at one end of the HAU01A-01 power cable to the AC_IN port on the HAU01A-01.

3.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the brown, blue, green and yellow wires of the HAU01A-01 power cable to the L0, N0, and PE terminals in the AC junction box, respectively. Then use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

4.

Reinstall the cover plate of the junction box, and use an M3 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws on the cover plate to 0.4 N·m (3.54 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


157



Figure 6-133 Installing the HAU01A-01 power cable

Step 4 Install the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable. 1.

Connect the bare wires at the other end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable to the ALM_ALL port on the HAU01A-01, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

One end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable has been connected to the IN0 port on the CMUEA or CMUF before delivery.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


158



Figure 6-134 Installing the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable

2.

Optional: In the scenario where the battery cabinet is used with the BTS3900AL or TP48600A-H17B1 and configured with a CCU, connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the HAU01A-01, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

One end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable has been connected to the D_COM3 port on the CCU before delivery.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


159



Figure 6-135 Installing the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable


Installing an HAU01A-01 in the IBBS300D This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an HAU01A-01 and its cables in the IBBS300D.

Context The mounting ears and M4 recessed pan head screws of the heater are packed in an accessory bag that is bound to the bottom of the cabinet.

Procedure Step 1 Use M4 recessed pan head screws to install the sides of mounting ears with round holes on the heater, and use an M4x8 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


160



Figure 6-136 Installing the mounting ears for the heater

Step 2 Install the heater on the front door, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the four M4x8 screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


161



Figure 6-137 Installing the heater

Step 3 Install the HAU01A-01 power cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cover plate of the AC junction box. Then open the cover plate.

2.

Connect the C13 connector at one end of the HAU01A-01 power cable to the AC_IN port on the heater.

3.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown, blue, and green and yellow wires in the HAU01A-01 power cable to the L0, N0, and PE terminals in the AC junction box and use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

4.

Install the cover plate of the AC junction box and use an M3 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws on the cover plate to 0.55 N·m (4.87 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


162



Figure 6-138 Installing an HAU01A-01 Power Cable

Step 4 Install an HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the HAU01A-01.

2.

Connect the other end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable to the D_COM0 port on the CCU01D-03.

Figure 6-139 Installing an HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


163




6.9 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite.

6.9.1 Cabling Requirements Cables must be laid out according to the specified cabling requirements to prevent signal interference. NOTE

If a cable listed below is not required, skip the cabling requirements of the cable.

General Cabling Requirements Bending radius requirements l

The bending radius of a 7/8'' feeder must be greater than 250 mm (9.84 in.), and the bending radius of a 5/4'' feeder must be greater than 380 mm (14.96 in.).

l

The bending radius of a 1/4'' jumper must be greater than 35 mm (1.38 in.). The bending radius of a super-flexible 1/2'' jumper must be greater than 50 mm (1.97 in.), and the bending radius of an ordinary 1/2'' jumper must be greater than 127 mm (5 in.).

l

The bending radius of a power cable or PGND cable must be at least three times its diameter.

l

The bending radius of a fiber optic cable is at least 20 times of its diameter, and the bending radius of a breakout cable is at least 30 mm (1.18 in.).

l

The bending radius of an E1/T1 cable must be at least three times its diameter.

l

The bending radius of a signal cable must be at least five times its diameter.

Cable binding requirements l

Cables of the same type must be bound together.

l

Different types of cables must be separately laid out and bound, with a minimum distance of 30 mm (1.18 in.) from each other.

l

The cables must be bound tightly and neatly. The sheaths of the cables must not be damaged.

l

The cable ties must face the same direction, and those at the same horizontal line must be in a straight line.

l

The excess of the indoor cable ties is cut off. The excess of 5 mm (0.197 in.) of the outdoor cable ties is reserved, and the cut surfaces are smooth without sharp edges.

l

After cables are installed, labels or nameplates must be attached to the cables at their ends, curves, and interconnection positions.

Security requirements Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


164



l

When routing cables, avoid sharp objects, for example sharp edges on the wall. If necessary, use tubes to protect the cables.

l

When routing cables, keep the cables away from heat sources and use heat insulation materials to insulate the cables from the heat sources.

l

Reserve a proper distance (0.1 m or 3.937 in. is recommended) between equipment and cables especially at the cable curves to protect the cables and equipment.

Indoor cabling requirements l

Route each cable into the room through the feeder window.

l

Reserve drip loops for all cables outside the feeder window before routing them into the room. Ensure that the radiuses of the drip loops are greater than or equal to the minimum bending radiuses of the cables.

l

When routing a cable into the room, ensure that a person is assisting you in the room.

l

Apply waterproof treatment to the feeder window.

Outdoor Cabling Requirements l

Protect outdoor cables against potential damage. For example, put the cables through tubes.

l

The cables to be protected include AC power cables, transmission cables, and cables laid out underground.

l

When routing cables through tubes on the ground below the cabinet, put a 30 mm to 50 mm (1.18 in. to 1.97 in.) length of the tubes into the base of the cabinet but do not put the tubes into the cabinet. Use waterproof tape or waterproof silicon gel to block both ends of the tubes and use sheet metal tabs to secure the tubes to the cable holes in the base.

l

When routing cables through tubes along a metal cable trough below the cabinet, do not put the tubes into the base of the cabinet but cover the cable trough and connect the tubes to the cable holes in the base.

l

Use clips to secure cables outdoors. For the method of installing a clip, see the installation guide delivered with the clip.

l

Arrange cables neatly along the routing direction and use clips to secure the cables.

l

Determine the positions where the clips are installed according to the actual situation. For example, 7/8" feeders are secured with clips at an interval of 1.5 m to 2 m (4.92 ft to 6.56 ft), CPRI fiber optic cables and power cables are secured with clips at an interval of 1 m to 1.5 m (3.28 ft to 4.92 ft). Ensure that the clips are evenly spaced and in the same direction.

l

When fastening cables with a clip, ensure that the cables are aligned neatly and are routed through the holes in the clip. Do not stretch the cables too tightly. NOTE

There are two types of clips: 3-hole clip and 6-hole clip, which are described as follows: l

A 3-hole clip is shown by illustration a in the following figure. It is often used to fasten feeders.

l

A 6-hole clip is shown by illustration b in the following figure. It is often used to fasten power cables and CPRI fiber optic cables.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


165



Figure 6-140 Exterior of the clips

(1) Cable hole for feeders

(2) Cable hole for fiber optic cables

(3) Cable hole for power cables

The following figure shows the cables secured on a cable tray. Figure 6-141 Cables secured on a cable tray

(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip

The following figure shows the cables secured on a tower.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


166



Figure 6-142 Cables secured on a tower

(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip

Special Cabling Requirements Cabling of power cables l

Power cables must be installed in the position specified in engineering design documents.

l

If the length of power cables is insufficient, replace the cables rather than adding connectors or soldering joints to lengthen the cables.

l

Cables can only be laid out under well-planned instructions. The cabling activities of fiber optic cables are allowed only when qualified personnel and communication facilities are available.

l

Do not circle and twist cables.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


167



l

After routing a DC power cable onto the platform on a tower, route it along the shortest path to the rails surrounding the platform, and route it along the inside of the rails.

l

After routing a DC power cable close to the equipment on a tower, use clips to secure the power cable onto a pole or the rails surrounding the platform. Ensure that there is no excessively long distance between the equipment and the position where the power cable is secured.

Cabling of PGND cables l

PGND cables for a base station must be connected to the same group of ground bars.

l

PGND cables must be buried in the ground or routed indoors.

l

The external conductor of the coaxial wire and the shield layer of the shielded cable must have proper electrical contact with the metal surface of the equipment to which they are connected.

l

PGND cables and signal cables must be installed separately. A certain distance must be reserved between them to prevent interference from each other.

l

Switches or fuses must not be installed on the PGND cables.

l

Other devices must not be used for electrical connections of the PGND cables.

l

All the metal parts in the housing of the equipment must be reliably connected to the ground terminal.

Cabling of E1 cables l

E1 cables must not cross power cables, PGND cables, or RF cables when laid out. If transmission cables are laid out with power cables, PGND cables, or RF cables in parallel, the spacing between them must be greater than 30 mm (1.18 in.).

l

E1 cables are lined up straight and bound neatly with cable ties.

l

Sufficient slack is provided for E1 cables at turns.

l

E1 cables must not be pressed by the door of the cabinet when routed, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-143 E1 cables routed in the cabinet

Cabling of fiber optic cables l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

At least three people are required for laying out fiber optic cables. The cabling activities of fiber optic cables are allowed only when qualified personnel and communication facilities are available. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168



l

The operating temperature of fiber optic cables ranges from -40ºC to +60ºC (-40ºF to +140ºF). If the actual temperature is beyond this range, take protective measures or select another route.

l


l

Do not bind a fiber optic cable at the position where it bends.

l

Do not stretch, step on, or place heavy objects on fiber optic cables. Keep the fiber optic cables away from sharp objects.

l

When fiber optic cables are routed, the excess of the fiber optic cables must be coiled around special devices, such as a fiber coiler.

l

An unarmored fiber optic cable must be bound using binding straps. If a fiber optic patch cord needs to be secured in a cabinet or a piece of equipment, use binding straps to bind it and then use cable ties to secure the binding straps to the cabinet or equipment. Ensure that the fiber optic cables can flexibly move in the cable ties. Do not bend the fiber optic cables sharply. The following figure shows how to bind the fiber optic cables correctly. Figure 6-144 Binding fiber optic cables

l

When coiling fiber optic cables, apply even strength. Do not bend the fiber optic cables with force.

l

Unused optical connectors must be covered with dustproof caps.

l

The fiber optic cables must not be pressed by the door of the cabinet when routed, as shown in the following figures. Figure 6-145 CPRI fiber optic cables routed in the cabinet (1)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


169



Figure 6-146 CPRI fiber optic cables routed in the cabinet (2)

Figure 6-147 FE/GE fiber optic cables routed in the cabinet

l

After routing a fiber optic cable onto the platform on a tower, route it along the shortest path to the rails surrounding the platform, and route it along the inside of the rails.

l

After routing a fiber optic cable close to the equipment on a tower, use clips to secure the fiber optic cable onto a pole or the rails surrounding the platform. Ensure that there is no excessively long distance between the equipment and the position where the cable is secured.

l

Coil the excess of the fiber optic cables near the equipment on the tower before securing the cables on the tower.

6.9.2 Cable Holes The DBS3900 cabinets are maintained at the front of the cabinets. All cables for DBS3900 cabinets are routed into and out of the cabinets through the cable holes at the bottom of the cabinets.

Cable Holes in the APM30H The following figure shows a planform for the cable holes at the bottom of the APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


170



Figure 6-148 Planform for the cable holes in the APM30H

(1) Left cable hole

(2) Right cable hole

The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in an APM30H. Table 6-11 Cable routing through the cable holes in an APM30H Item

Description

Left cable hole

Used for routing the following cables: the APM30H input power cables, equipotential cables between cabinets, power cables for the heating film in the IBBS200D, power cables for the junction box in the TMC11H, CPRI fiber optic cables, GPS clock signal cables, GPS jumpers, and monitoring signal cables for the battery cabinet.

Right cable hole

Used for routing the following cables: the RRU input power cables, power cables for the battery cabinet, TMC11H input power cables, power cables for the fan in the IBBS200D, power cables for the TEC in the IBBS200T, E1/T1 cables, FE/GE Ethernet cables, FE/GE fiber optic cables, and CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cables.

Cable bags are used in the cable holes of the APM30H. This facilitates the routing of all types of cables. The following figure shows the cable bags in an APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


171



Figure 6-149 Cables holes in an APM30H

Cable Holes in a TMC11H The following figure shows a planform for the cable holes at the bottom of the TMC11H. Figure 6-150 Planform for the cable holes in the TMC11H

(1) Left cable hole


The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in a TMC11H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


172



Table 6-12 Cable routing through the cable holes in a TMC11H Item

Description

Left cable hole

Used for routing the following cables: the TMC11H input power cables, DCDU-12B input power cables, power cables for the junction box in the TMC11H, power cables for the heating film in the IBBS200D, equipotential cables between cabinets, monitoring signal cables between cascaded CMUEAs (in different battery cabinets), CPRI fiber optic cables, GPS clock signal cables, and GPS jumpers.

Right cable hole

Used for routing the following cables: the RRU power cables, monitoring signal cables between cascaded CMUEAs, E1/T1 cables, FE/GE Ethernet cables, FE/GE fiber optic cables, and CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cables.

Cable bags are used in the cable holes of the TMC11H. This facilitates the routing of all types of cables. The cable bags in the TMC11H are the same as those in the APM30H, as shown in Figure 6-153.

Cable Holes in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T The following figure shows a planform for the cable holes at the bottom of the IBBS200D/ IBBS200T. Figure 6-151 Planform for the cable holes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T

(1) Left cable hole


The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in an IBBS200D/ IBBS200T.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


173



Table 6-13 Cable routing through the cable holes in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T Item

Description

Left cable hole

Used for routing the following cables: the input power cables, power cables for the junction box, equipotential cables between cabinets, monitoring signal cables between cascaded CMUEAs (in different battery cabinets), CPRI fiber optic cables, GPS clock signal cables, and GPS jumpers.

Right cable hole

Used for routing the following cables: RRU input power cables, power cables for the battery cabinet, input power cables, power cables for the fan in the IBBS200D, power cables for the TEC in the IBBS200T, monitoring signal cables between cascaded CMUEAs, E1/T1 cables, FE/GE Ethernet cables, FE/ GE fiber optic cables, and CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cables.

Cable bags are used in the cable holes of the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. This facilitates the routing of all types of cables. The cable bags in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T are the same as those in the APM30H, as shown in Figure 6-153.

Cable Holes in the IBBS300D/IBBS300T The following figure shows a planform for the cable holes at the bottom of the IBBS300D/ IBBS300T. Figure 6-152 Planform for the cable holes in the IBBS300D/IBBS300T

(1) Left cable hole


The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in an IBBS300D/ IBBS300T. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


174




Description

Left cable hole

Used for routing the following cables: power cables for the AC junction box in an TMC11H, equipotential cable between cabinets, heater power cables in an IBBS300D, battery cabinet monitoring signal cables, and monitoring signal cables between the cascaded CCU01D-03 modules (in different battery cabinets).

Right cable hole

Cables routed through this cable hole are as follows: the TMC11H input power cable, storage battery power cable, power cable for cascaded storage batteries, power cable for the TEC in an IBBS300T, and power cable for the fan in an IBBS300D.

Cable bags are used in the cable holes of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. This facilitates the routing of all types of cables. The following figure shows the cable bags in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Figure 6-153 Cable bags in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T

Cable Holes in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T The following figure shows a planform for the cable holes at the bottom of the IBBS700D/ IBBS700T.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


175



Figure 6-154 Planform for the cable holes at the bottom of an IBBS700D/IBBS700T

(1) Left cable hole


Cable bags are used in the cable holes of an IBBS700D/IBBS700T. This facilitates the routing of all types of cables. The following figure shows the cable bags in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T. Figure 6-155 Cable bags in an IBBS700D/IBBS700T

The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in an IBBS700D/ IBBS700T. Table 6-15 Cable routing through the cable holes in an IBBS700D/IBBS700T

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Item

Note

Left cable hole

Cables routed through this cable hole are as follows: PGND cable, power cable for the AC junction box, power cable for the power distribution box, CCU monitoring signal cable, and battery cabinet monitoring signal cable.


176



Item

Note

Right cable hole

Cables routed through this cable hole are as follows: power cable for the temperature control system and power cables connected to the power distribution box.

6.9.3 Installing Power Cables This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables.

Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H In an APM30H (Ver.D), the input power cables for the APM30H refer to EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cables. The cables feed power into the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 in the APM30H (Ver.D) from the external power equipment.

Context The APM30H supports 220 V AC three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110 V AC duallive-wire power supplies, which require different types of input power cables for the APM30H, as listed in the following table. Table 6-16 Specifications of the input power cables for the APM30H Cable

Color

One End

The Other End

L1

Brown

L2

Black



L3

Gray

N

Blue

EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cables in a 220 V AC single-phase scenario

L

Brown

N

Blue



EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cables in a 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenario

L1

Black

L2

Red



N

White

EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cables in a 220 V AC three-phase scenario

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


177



l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l Determine whether to install a polyethylene (PE) wire based on local regulations.

Procedure Step 1 Prepare EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cables. 1.


2.

Add M6 OT terminals to the cables on the EPU side according to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cables, as shown in Figure 6-156, Figure 6-157, or Figure 6-158. 1.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the M3 screw from the protective cover for the AC input terminals, and open the protective cover.

2.

Optional: When 220 V AC three-phase power is supplied, remove the short-circuiting bar from the L1, L2, and L3 AC input terminals. NOTE

When 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied, do not remove the short-circuiting bar. When 110 V AC dual-live-wire power is supplied, the EPU is not configured with any short-circuiting bar.

3.

Route the power cables into the cabinet along the inner left side of the cabinet, connect each wire to the corresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

4.

Install the protective cover for AC input terminals, and tighten the screws to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).

Figure 6-156 Installing the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cable (220 V AC three-phase)

(1) Short-circuiting bar

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


178



Figure 6-157 Installing the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cable (220 V AC single-phase)

Figure 6-158 Installing the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cable (110 V AC dual-live-wire)


Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H Power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H consist of the DCDU-12C power cables and the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H. The power cables feed power from the APM30H into the TMC11H. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


179



Context The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H. Table 6-17 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H Cable DCDU-12C power cables

Power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H

Color

One End

The Other End

RTN (+)

Black

EPC4 connector


NEG (-)

Blue

L

Brown

N

Blue

OT terminal (M4, 1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.2)


NOTE

The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Procedure Step 1 Prepare the DCDU-12C power cables and the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H. 1.


2.

Add a connector or terminals to each end of the input power cables for the TMC11H and the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H according to Table 6-17. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the DCDU-12C power cables, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Open the protective cover for the power input terminals.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the DCDU-12C power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H, and tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the DCDU-12C power cables to the LOAD7 port on the EPU in the APM30H.

4.

Reinstall the protective cover, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

CAUTION Ensure that the TMC11H power cable for a TMC11H added to a running base station must be connected to the TMC11H first and then to the APM30H. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


180



Figure 6-159 Installing the DCDU-12C power cables

Step 3 Install the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the L3 and N3 terminals in the AC junction box in the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the L and N terminals in the AC junction box in the TMC11H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).

4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


181





Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (APM:IBBS = 1:1) Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T consist of the power cables for the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, fan power cables in the IBBS200D, heating-film power cables in the IBBS200D, and TEC power cables in the IBBS200T.

Context A site can only be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


182



Table 6-18 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D Cable

Color

One End

OT terminals (M8, 35 mm2 or 0.054 in.2) (3634)

Power cables for the IBBS200D or IBBS200T

RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black

Fan power cables in an IBBS200D

RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue

L

Brown

N

Blue

TEC power cables in an IBBS200T (Optional) heating-film power cables in the IBBS200D

The Other End

EPC4 connector


NOTE

l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l The method of installing the TEC power cables in the IBBS200T is the same as the method of installing the fan power cables in the IBBS200D. This section describes the method of installing the fan power cables in the IBBS200D as an example.

Procedure Step 1 Prepare the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. 1.

Cut the power cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Add a connector or terminals to each end of the power cables according to Table 6-18. For detailed operations, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable and Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the power cables for an IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled BAT in the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled BAT on the EPU in the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

4.

Reinstall the protective cover for the power input terminals, and tighten the screws to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


183



Figure 6-161 Installing the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Step 3 Install the fan power cables in the IBBS200D, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the power cables to the INPUT port labeled FAN/TEC in the power distribution box in the IBBS200D.

2.

Connect the other end of the power cables to the LOAD8 port on the EPU in the APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


184



Figure 6-162 Installing the fan power cables in the IBBS200D

Step 4 Optional: Install the heating-film power cables in the IBBS200D, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect one end of the power cables to the L2 and N2 terminals in the AC junction box on the left inner wall of the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the other end of the power cables to the L and N terminals in the heating-film AC junction box on the left inner wall in the IBBS200D. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).

4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


185



Figure 6-163 Installing the heating-film power cables in the IBBS200D

(1) AC junction box

(2) Heating-film AC junction box

CAUTION When connecting the heating-film power cables to the heating-film AC junction box in the IBBS200D, do not connect the cables in the manners shown in Figure 6-164. l Do not expose the wires of the heating-film power cables outside the heating-film AC junction box. l The heating-film power cables must be routed into the heating-film AC junction box from the top, not from the bottom.

Figure 6-164 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cables in the heating-film AC junction box in the IBBS200D

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


186




Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (APM:IBBS = 1:2) Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T consist of the power cables for the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts, fan power cables in the IBBS200D, fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds, heating-film power cables in the IBBS200Ds, TEC power cables in the IBBS200T, and TEC power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ts.

Context A site can only be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. Table 6-19 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cable

One End



RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black

Power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts

RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black

Fan power cables in an IBBS200D

RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue

RTN(+)

Black

TEC power cables in an IBBS200T Fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Color

The Other End


EPC4 connector

EPC4 connector


187



Cable

Color

TEC power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ts

NEG(-)

Blue

(Optional) heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D

L

Brown

N

Blue

One End

The Other End


NOTE

l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l The method of installing the TEC power cables in the IBBS200T is the same as the method of installing the fan power cables in the IBBS200D. This section describes the method of installing the fan power cables in the IBBS200D as an example. l The method of installing the cascading TEC power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ts is the same as the method of installing the fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds. This section describes the method of installing the fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds as an example.



2.




2.

Connect one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled BAT in the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled BAT on the EPU in the APM30H.

4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


188




Step 3 Install the power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect each end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled BAT in the lower part of the power distribution boxes in the cascaded IBBS200D or IBBS200T. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


189



Figure 6-166 Installing the power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts

Step 4 Install the fan power cables in the IBBS200D, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the power cables to the INPUT port labeled FAN/TEC in the power distribution box in the IBBS200D.

2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


190



Figure 6-167 Installing the fan power cables in the IBBS200D

Step 5 Install the fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the power cables to the OUTPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the power distribution box in the IBBS200D below the APM30H.

2.

Connect the other end of the power cables to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the power distribution box in the other IBBS200D.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


191



Figure 6-168 Installing the fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds

Step 6 Install the heating-film power cables in the IBBS200Ds, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect one end of the heating-film power cables to the L2, N2, L1, and N1 terminals in the AC junction box on the left inner wall of the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.61 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the other end of the power cables to the L and N terminals in the heating-film AC junction boxes on the left inner wall in the IBBS200Ds. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.61 lbf·in.).

4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


192



Figure 6-169 Installing the heating-film power cables in the IBBS200Ds

(1) AC junction box


CAUTION When connecting the heating-film power cables to the heating-film AC junction box in the IBBS200D, do not connect the cables in the manners shown in Figure 6-170. l Do not expose the wires of the heating-film power cables outside the heating-film AC junction box. l The heating-film power cables must be routed into the heating-film AC junction box from the top, not from the bottom.

Figure 6-170 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cables in the heating-film AC junction box in the IBBS200D

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


193




Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300D or IBBS300T (APM:IBBS = 1:2) Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300D/IBBS300T consist of the power cables for the IBBS300D/IBBS300T, power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, fan power cables in the IBBS300D, fan power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds, TEC power cables in the IBBS300T, and TEC power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ts.

Context A site can only be configured with either the IBBS300D or IBBS300T. The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300D/ IBBS300T. Table 6-20 Specifications of the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300D/IBBS300T Cable

Color

One End

RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black


Power cables RTN(+) for the fan in an IBBS300D, fan power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds, power cables for the TEC in

Black

IBBS300D/ IBBS300T power cables and power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



The Other End

EPC4 connector

194



Cable

Color

an IBBS300T, and TEC power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ts

NEG(-)

Blue

Power cable for the AC junction box (optional) and cascading power cable for the AC junction box (optional)

L

Brown

N

Blue

One End

The Other End


NOTE

l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l The method of installing the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS300T is the same as the method of installing the power cable for the fan in the IBBS300D. This section describes the method of installing the power cable for the fan in the IBBS300D as an example. l The method of installing the TEC power cable between cascaded IBBS300Ts is the same as the method of installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS300Ds. This section describes the method of installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS300Ds as an example.

Procedure Step 1 Prepare the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. 1.


2.


Step 2 Install the power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


195



1.

Connect the OT terminal at one end of the black negative power cable to the NEG(-) terminal in the DC junction box on the left inner wall of the lower IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

2.

Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the black negative power cable to the NEG(-) terminal in the DC junction box on the left inner wall of the upper IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the OT terminal at one end of the red positive power cable to the RTN(+) terminal in the DC junction box on the right inner wall of the lower IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

4.

Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the red positive power cable to the RTN(+) terminal in the DC junction box on the right inner wall of the upper IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

Figure 6-171 Installing power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

Step 3 Install the power cables for an IBBS300D/IBBS300T, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the OT terminal at one end of the black negative power cable to the terminal labeled NEG(-) in the DC junction box on the left inner wall of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

2.

Connect the OT terminal at one end of the red positive power cable to the RTN(+) terminal in the DC junction box on the right inner wall of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the battery power port on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H and tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


196



Figure 6-172 Installing power cables for the IBBS300D/IBBS300T

Step 4 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS300D, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the copper bar labeled NEGon the left DC junction box and to the copper bar labeled RTN+ on the right DC junction box in the battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

2.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the DC output port LOAD8 on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


197



Figure 6-173 Installing the power cable for the fan in the IBBS300D


Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the copper bar labeled NEGon the left DC junction box and to the copper bar labeled RTN+ on the right DC junction box, respectively, in the lower battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the copper bar labeled NEG- on the left DC junction box and to the copper bar labeled RTN+ on the right DC junction box, respectively, in the upper battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


198



Figure 6-174 Installing fan power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds

Step 6 Optional: Install the power cables for the AC junction box, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown and blue wires to the L and N terminals in the AC junction box and use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the L2 and N2 terminals in the AC junction box on the left inner wall of the APM30H. Then, tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

4.

Install the cover plate of the AC junction box and use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws on the cover plate to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


199



Figure 6-175 Installing power cables for AC junction boxes

Step 7 Optional: Install the cascading power cables for the AC junction box, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown, blue, and green and yellow wires to the L1, N1, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in the basic IBBS300D/IBBS300T and use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the brown, blue, and green and yellow wires to the L, N, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in the extension IBBS300D/IBBS300T and use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


200



Figure 6-176 Installing the cascading power cable for AC junction boxes


Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS700D or IBBS700T (APM:IBBS = 1:1) Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS700D or IBBS700T consist of the power cables for the IBBS700D or IBBS700T, the power cable for an AC junction box, the power cable for the temperature control system.

Context A site can only be configured with either the IBBS700D or IBBS700T. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


201



The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS700D or IBBS700T. Table 6-21 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS700D/IBBS700T Cable

Color

One End



RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black

Power cable for the temperature control system

RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue

Power cable for an AC junction box

L

Brown

N

Blue

The Other End

EPC4 connector


NOTE

Colors and structures of cables vary in different regions. If cables are purchased at local markets, they must comply with local rules and regulations.



2.




2.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+)_1 and NEG(-)_1 terminals in the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled BAT on the EPU in the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


202




Step 3 Install the power cable for the temperature control system in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the power cables to the DC INPUT port in the power distribution box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T.

2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


203



Figure 6-178 Installing the power cable for the temperature control system in the IBBS700D/ IBBS700T

Step 4 Optional: Install the power cable for an AC junction box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect one end of the power cables to the L2 and N2 terminals in the AC junction box on the left inner wall of the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the other end of the power cables to the L and N terminals in the AC junction box in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).

4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


204



Figure 6-179 Installing the power cable for an AC junction box in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T

(1) AC junction box


Installing BBU Power Cables This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing BBU power cables.

Context The following table lists the specifications of a BBU power cable. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


205



Table 6-22 Specifications of a BBU power cable Cable BBU power cable

Color

One End

The Other End

RTN(+)

Black

EPC4 connector

3V3 connector

NEG(-)

Blue

NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Add an EPC4 connector to one end of each BBU power cable. For details, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable. NOTE

A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connector must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.

Step 2 Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port on the UPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Step 3 Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the BBU power cable to the LOAD0 port on the EPU, as shown in the following figure.

CAUTION Ensure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station must be connected to the BBU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury. NOTE

When the BBU is configured with two UPEUs, each UPEU must be connected to the power equipment by using a BBU power cable. The 3V3 connector at one end of the second BBU power cable is connected to the -48V port on the UPEU, and the EPC4 connector at the other end is connected to the LOAD1 port on the EPU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


206



Figure 6-180 Installing BBU power cables

Step 4 Optional: Install the power cable for the second BBU, as shown in Figure 6-180. 1.

Prepare the BBU power cable following the operations in Step 1.

2.

Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port on the UPEU in the BBU.

3.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the BBU power cable to the LOAD6 port on the EPU.


Installing RRU Power Cables in Case of Less Than or Equal to 12 RRUs This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing RRU power cables.

Context A maximum of 12 RRU power cables can be installed in an APM30H. An RRU power cable feeds DC power into an RRU. The following table lists the specifications of an RRU power cable.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


207



Table 6-23 Specifications of an RRU power cable Cable RRU power cable

RTN(+)

Color

One End

The Other End

Black (North American)

EPC5 connector

Depending on the port on the RRU

Brown (European ) NEG(-)

Blue

NOTE

l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of the RRU. For details about how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installation guide.

Procedure Step 1 Optional: Relocate the ground clips, as shown in Figure 6-182. NOTE

When the APM30H is stacked on an IBBS200D or IBBS200T, the ground clips in the APM30H must be relocated to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

1.

Remove the two nuts securing the two PGND cables on which the two ground clips are installed from the inner right side of the APM30H. Then remove the two ground clips.

2.

Secure the PGND cables with the ground clips to the two pivot screws on the inner right side of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. Then tighten the screws on the ground clips to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.). NOTE

When installing a ground clip for the RRU power cables, comply with the following rules: l When one to three RRU power cables are installed, put all the RRU power cables on one side of the ground screw, as shown by illustration 1 in the following figure. l When four or six RRU power cables are installed, put two or three RRU power cables on each side of the ground screw, as shown by illustration 2 in the following figure. l When five RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread three cables through one ground clip and two cables through the other group clip, or thread four cables through one ground clip or one cable through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration 3 in the following figure. l When seven to ten RRU power cables or twelve RRU power cables are installed, use two ground clips and comply with the preceding rules. l When eleven RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread five cables through one ground clip and six cables through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration 4 in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


208



Figure 6-181 Installing the ground clips (side elevation view)

Figure 6-182 Relocating the ground clips

Step 2 Route the RRU power cable into the IBBS200D or IBBS200T through the right cable bag. Step 3 Install the ground clip, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Route the RRU power cable into the IBBS200D or IBBS200T through the right cable bag, and strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away from the cable bag to expose the shield layer. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209



If the RRU power cable is routed into the IBBS200D or IBBS200T through the left cable bag, strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable immediately after routing it into the cabinet to expose the shield layer.

2.

Strip the shield layer off the RRU power cable to expose the two wires at the position 350 mm (13.78 in.) away from the cable bag for the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

3.

Route the RRU power cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield layer securely contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.). NOTE

A ground clip can be used to secure a maximum of six RRU power cables.

Figure 6-183 Installing the ground clip

Step 4 Add an EPC5 connector to the RRU power cable on the EPU or DCDU-12B side according to the instructions in Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable. Step 5 Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the RRU side to the power port on the RRU.

CAUTION Ensure that the RRU power cable for an RRU added to a running base station must be connected to the RRU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


210



Step 6 Connect the EPC5 connector at the other end of the RRU power cable to one of the RRU0 to RRU5 ports on the EPU or one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12B, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

RRU power cables are routed into the APM30H through the right cable bag in preference. If the space in the right cable bag is insufficient, you can route the RRU power cables through the left cable bag.

Figure 6-184 Installing RRU power cables


Installing RRU Power Cables in Case of More Than 12 RRUs This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing RRU power cables.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


211



Context When more than 12 RRUs are configured for an APM30H, the cable bag in the APM30H supports nine groups of RRU power cables with a maximum cross-sectional area of 8.2 mm2 (0.013 2) of each RRU power cable, three groups of RRU power cables with a maximum crosssectional area of 4 mm2 (0.006 2) of each RRU power cable, and one group of ODM power cables feeding power into three RRUs. An RRU power cable feeds DC power into an RRU. The following table lists the specifications of RRU power cables. Table 6-24 Specifications of RRU power cables Cable ODM06D power cable

RRU power cable

Wire Color

One End

The Other End

RTN (+) wire

Brown

Cord end terminal

OT terminal (M6)

NEG(-) wire

Blue

RTN (+) wire

Black (North American standards)

EPC5 connector


NEG(-) wire

Blue

Brown (European standards)

NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Route the RRU power cables through the cable bag in an APM30H according to operations from Step 1 to Step 6 in Installing RRU Power Cables in Case of Less Than or Equal to 12 RRUs. NOTE

This section describes the procedure for installing RRU power cables that are routed out of an ODM06D.

Step 2 Route the ODM06D power cable out of the cabinet through the cable bag on the left side of the cabinet from top to bottom.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


212



NOTICE l If 12 groups of RRU power cables have been installed, the ODM power cable only can be routed from top to bottom. When the space in the cable bag is insufficient, the bottom of the cable bag is easily damaged if the ODM power cable is routed from bottom to top. l Before routing the ODM power cable from top down, you must bind all other installed cables to prevent them from being affected by the ODM power cable. Step 3 Install the ground clip for the ODM06D power cable on the APM30H side. 1.

Use a utility knife to strip 63 mm (2.48 in.) long jacket off the power cable to expose the shield layer. Figure 6-185 Stripping the jacket off the power cable

2.

Wrap the copper sheet of the ground clip around the shield layer of the power cable, and use the cable tie to bind the copper sheet tightly. Then cut the excess cable tie from the head without leaving any sharp edge. Figure 6-186 Wrapping and tying the copper sheet of the ground clip

(1) Hole for a cable tie (12 AWG/4 mm2 [0.006 in.2]) (2) Hole for a cable tie (≥ 6 mm2 [0.009 in.2])

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


213



3.

Wrap three layers of waterproof tape and three layers of insulation tape around the ground clip. Figure 6-187 Wrapping the waterproof tape and insulation tape

(1) Waterproof tape

(2) Insulation tape

(3) Cable tie

(4) Power cable

(5) PGND cable

-

NOTE

l Cut the cable tie at a position 3 mm to 5 mm (0.12 in. to 0.20 in.) away from the stub of binding strap. l An M8 OT terminal is installed at the end of ground clip connecting to the ground by default. The M8 OT terminal needs to be replaced by an M6 OT terminal onsite. For detailed operations, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

4.

Install the OT terminal at one end of the ground clip on the ground terminal on the left side of the cabinet, and tighten the terminal to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

Step 4 Add the cord end terminal to the ODM06D power cable on the ODM side according to the instructions in Assembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable. Step 5 Open the cover for the ODM06D, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Use a T20 Torx screwdriver to loosen the three screws on the cover for the ODM06D, and then open the cover.

2.

Open the protective cover.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


214



Figure 6-188 Opening the cover for the ODM06D

Step 6 Prepare the cable according to the cabling label on the protective cover. Step 7 Install the RRU power cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw on the cable clip. NOTE

The screw on the cable clip can be adjusted to adapt to cables with different cross-sectional areas.

2.

Partially loosen the PG connector to route the cable through the PG connector.

3.

Route the RRU power cable through the PG connector.

4.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to secure the cord end terminal onto the terminal block.

5.

Use the cable clip to secure the cable and tighten the screw on the cable clip to ensure that the cable clip contact with the shield layer of the cable.

6.

Secure the PG connector of the cable.

NOTICE Tighten the PG connector to waterproof the device.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


215



Figure 6-189 Installing RRU Cables

(1) RRU power cable

(2) ODM06D power cable

Step 8 Close the cover for the ODM06D, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Close the protective cover.

2.

Close the cover and use a T20 Torx screwdriver to secure the three screws on the cover.

Figure 6-190 Closing the cover for the ODM06D

Step 9 Connect the ODM06D power cable to the DCDU-12B in an APM30H. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


216



1.

Add the OT terminal to the ODM06D power cable on the cabinet side according to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

2.

Verify that the circuit breakers on the RRUs connecting to the ODM06D are turned off.

3.

Optional: If 3 RRUs are added to 12 RRUs, set RFC1 breaker in the APM30H to OFF.

4.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminals RTN (+) and NEG(-) on the DCDU-12B in the APM30H. Figure 6-191 Installing the ODM06D power cable

5.

Optional: Set RFC1 breaker in the APM30H to ON.


6.9.4 Installing Transmission Cables This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing transmission cables. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


217



Installing the E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable.

Context l

The following figure shows a GU base station using separate transmission. For cable connections for the E1/T1 surge protection transfer in other types of base stations, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

l

The connection positions and routing of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable are the same in the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H (Ver.D). This section uses the APM30H (Ver.D) as an example.

Procedure Step 1 Connect the DB26 connectors at one end of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable to the E1/ T1 ports on the GTMU/UTRP/WMPT/UMPT in the BBU, and then tighten the plastic screws on the connectors to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-192 Installing the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable

Step 2 Connect the DB25 connectors at the other end of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable to the INSIDE ports on the UELP in the SLPU, and then tighten the plastic screws on the connectors to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.), as shown in the preceding figure. Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


218



Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End

Installing the E1/T1 Cables This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the E1/T1 cables.

Prerequisites

NOTICE Ensure that both ends of the E1/T1 cable are disconnected from any equipment. Then, solder a connector to each E1/T1 cable during the same session.

Context l

The following figure shows a GU base station using independent transmission. For the E1/ T1 cable connections in other types of base stations, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

l

The connection positions and routing of the E1/T1 cable are the same in the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C) and APM30H (Ver.D). This section uses the APM30H (Ver.D) as an example.

l

The E1/T1 cable on the SLPU side is routed along the left side of the cabinet interior.

Procedure Step 1 Connect the DB26 male connector on the E1/T1 cable to an OUTSIDE port on the UELP, and tighten the plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


219



Figure 6-193 Installing the E1/T1 cable

Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cabinet through the cable bag on the bottom left of the cabinet, and then connect the cable to the external transmission equipment. Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End

Installing the FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable.

Context l

The following figure shows a GL base station using separate transmission. For cable connections for the FE/GE surge protection transfer in other types of base stations, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

l

The connection positions and routing of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable are the same in the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C) and APM30H (Ver.D). This section uses the APM30H (Ver.D) as an example.

Procedure Step 1 Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to an FE electrical port on the GTMU/WMPT/UMPT/LMPT, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


220



Figure 6-194 Installing the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable

Step 2 Connect the other end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to the FE0 or FE1 port near the INSIDE on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 6-194. Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End

Installing the FE/GE Ethernet Cables This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE Ethernet cables.

Context l

An FE/GE Ethernet cable is a shielded straight-through cable.

l

When the APM30H is stacked on an IBBS200D/IBBS200T, ensure that the ground clip has been moved from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T before installing the FE/ GE Ethernet cable.

l

The following figure shows a GL base station using separate transmission. For the FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in other types of base stations, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

l

The connection positions and routing of the FE/GE Ethernet cable are the same in the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C) and APM30H (Ver.D). This section uses the APM30H (Ver.D) as an example.

Procedure Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cable through a cable bag or a cable outlet module into the cabinet. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


221



Step 2 Install the ground clip, as shown in the following figure. 1.

At a position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away from the cable bag in an APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet or within 1 m (3.28 in.) away from the cable hole on APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B) cabinet, strip a length of 50 mm (1.97 in.) jacket off the FE/GE Ethernet cable to expose the shield layer.

2.

Route the FE/GE Ethernet cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield layer securely contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).


Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE0 or FE1 port near the OUTSIDE silkscreen on the UFLP, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


222



Figure 6-196 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable

Step 4 Connect the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the external transmission equipment. Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End

Installing FE/GE Fiber Optic Cables This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables.

Context l

The single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and the multimode optical module is labeled as MM.

l

The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multimode optical module is black or gray.

l

The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.

l

An FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC, SC, or LC connector at the other end.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


223



l

SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not used simultaneously.

l


l

The connections and routing of FE/GE fiber optic cables in APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H (Ver.D) are the same. This section describes the connections and routing of the FE/GE fiber optic cables in the APM30H (Ver.D).

NOTICE The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20 minutes.

Procedure Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 6-197 and Figure 6-198. 1.

Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding FE/GE optical port on the corresponding board in the BBU.

2.

Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.

3.

Lower the puller of the optical module.

4.

Insert the optical module into the FE/GE optical port.

5.

Raise the puller of the optical module.

Figure 6-197 Removing the dustproof cap from the port

Figure 6-198 Installing the optical module

Step 2 Install the fiber optic cables, as shown in Figure 6-199 and Figure 6-200. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


224



1.

Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors at the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cables, and insert the connectors into the optical module on the BBU.

2.

Route the fiber optic cables out of the cable bag on the bottom right side of the cabinet.

3.

Connect the other end of the fiber optic cables to the external transmission equipment.

NOTICE The TX and RX ports (FE/GE optical ports) on the BBU must be connected to the RX and TX ports on the transmission equipment, respectively. Figure 6-199 Removing the dustproof caps from the fiber optic cable

Figure 6-200 Installing FE/GE fiber optic cables

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


225



Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End

6.9.5 Installing Signal Cables This chapter describes the procedures and precautions for the installing signal cables in a cabinet or between cabinets.

Scenario: 1 APM30H Expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H This section describes the procedure for installing monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H.

Context l

When a base station is configured with one APM30H, one monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.

l

If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H, as shown in the following figure, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.

l

When a triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, the second BBU is installed in the APM30H or TMC11H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function.

Figure 6-201 1 APM30H expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

Procedure Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly.

2.

Connect the other end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


226



Figure 6-202 Installing a monitoring signal cable in one APM30H

Step 2 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H, install another CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of the added TMC11H.

2.

Connect the other end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the APM30H.

Figure 6-203 Installing a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and the TMC11H

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


227



Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole on the cabinet. Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End

Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T Expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H +1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T This section describes the procedure for installing monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

Context NOTE

l When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T, two monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite. l If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H, as shown in Figure 6-204, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite. l When a triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, the second BBU is installed in the APM30H or TMC11H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function.

Figure 6-204 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T+1 TMC11H


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Connect one end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228



2.



Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between the battery cabinets, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


229



Figure 6-206 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with 1 APM30H +1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T (2)

Step 3 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H, another CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable connecting the APM30H and the added TMC11H must be added, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the APM30H.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the added TMC11H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


230



Figure 6-207 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with 1 APM30H +1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H

Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole on the cabinet. Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End

Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts Expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H This section describes the procedures for installing the monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.

Context NOTE

l When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, three monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite. l If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, as shown in Figure 6-208, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite. l When a triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, the second BBU is installed in the APM30H or TMC11H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


231



Figure 6-208 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H



2.



Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinets, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


232



1.


2.


Figure 6-210 Installing a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and the IBBS200D or IBBS200T

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs in the two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUE on the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T below the APM30H.

2.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE on the door of the second IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


233



Figure 6-211 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs in the two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts

Step 4 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, another CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable connecting the APM30H and the added TMC11H must be installed, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


234



Figure 6-212 Installing a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and the TMC11H


Scenario of 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts and Its Expansion Scenario This section describes the procedures for installing the monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H.

Context NOTE

l When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, three monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite. l If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H, as shown in Figure 6-213, one monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite. l When a triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, the second BBU is installed in the APM30H or TMC11H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


235



Figure 6-213 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H



2.



Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinets, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


236



1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CCU01D-03 on the door of the IBBS300D or IBBS300T.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.

Figure 6-215 Installing a monitoring signal cable in the configuration of 1 APM30H+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for CCU01D-03 modules between cascaded IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CCU01D-03 on the door of the left IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CCU01D-03 on the door of the right IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


237



Figure 6-216 Installing a monitoring signal cable in the configuration of 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

Step 4 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H, another CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable connecting the APM30H and the added TMC11H must be added, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


238



Figure 6-217 Installing a monitoring signal cable in the configuration of 1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H


Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T Expanded to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H +1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T This section describes the procedure for installing monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T to 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


239



Context NOTE

l When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T, two monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite. l If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H, as shown in Figure 6-218, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite. l When a triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, the second BBU is installed in the APM30H or TMC11H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function.

Figure 6-218 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T+1 TMC11H



2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


240




Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and the IBBS700D or IBBS700T, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


241




Step 3 If this base station is expanded to 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H, another CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable connecting the APM30H and the added TMC11H must be added, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


242



Figure 6-221 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with 1 APM30H +1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H


(Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables This section describes how to install an inter-BBU signal cable for a triple- or single-mode base station.

Prerequisites l

A new BBU has been added.

l

Optical modules, fiber optic cables, and electrical cables meeting the following requirements are available: – The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type. – The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s. – The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


243



l The single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and the multimode optical module is labeled as MM. l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode optical module is black or gray. l Figure 6-222 shows the label on an optical module.

Figure 6-222 Label on an optical module

(1) Maximum rate

(2) Wavelength

(3) Transmission mode

Context The following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections. Table 6-25 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected Interconnection Mode

Installation Position BBU 0

BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT

M0 port on the UCIU

CI port on the UMPT_U

M1 port on the UCIU

CI port on the UMPT_L

HEI port on the WBBPf


CI port on the UMPT

CI port on the UMPT

UMPT+UMPT

NOTICE A color-coding tape marked Master is attached to one end of an inter-BBU cable that connects two UMPTs in different BBUs. When installing the cable, connect the end marked Master to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 0 and the other end to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 1. NOTE

BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


244




Procedure Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding port on the BBU and install the optical modules in BBU 0 and BBU 1, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Insert the optical module into the port.

3.



Step 2 Remove dustproof caps from both ends of the fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 6-224. Figure 6-224 Removing the dustproof caps from the fiber optic cable

Step 3 Install one or two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT. The following figure shows the installation of two inter-BBU signal cables. NOTE

l You need to install two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+UL mode. l You need to install only one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+L or GL+U mode.

1. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Connect one end of the cables to the M0 and M1 ports on the UCIU in BBU 0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

245



2.

Connect the other end of the cables to the CI ports on the UMPT_U and UMPT_L in BBU 1.

Step 4 Optional: Install an inter-BBU signal cable between the WBBPf boards in the two BBUs, as shown in the following figure. This cable is required only when baseband interconnection is supported. 1.

Connect one end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 0.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 1. NOTE

l If the two BBUs are installed in the APM30H by referring to Figure 6-225. If BBU0 is installed in the APM30H and BBU1 in the TMC11H by referring to Figure 6-226. l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type. On BBU 1, install optical modules of the same type as those on BBU 0. l You need to connect the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cable to BBU 0, and the end labeled 1A and 1B on the fiber optical cable to BBU 1. l The TX and RX ports on BBU 0 must be connected to the TX and RX ports on BBU 1, respectively.

Figure 6-225 Installing inter-BBU signal cables (1)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


246




Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements. If a fiber optic patch cord is used as a BBU interconnection signal cable, use binding straps to bind the BBU interconnection signal cable before using cable ties to secure it. If another type of cable is used as a BBU interconnection signal cable, directly use cable ties to secure it. Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End

Installing a BBU Alarm Cable A BBU alarm cable transmits the alarm signals from external alarm devices to the BBU.

Procedure Step 1 Install a BBU alarm cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the BBU alarm cable to the EXT-ALM0/EXTALM1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

2.

Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable to the external alarm device.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


247



Figure 6-227 Installing the BBU alarm cable

Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in 6.9.1 Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind it. Step 3 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End

Installing an ODM06D Surge Protection Alarm Cable An ODM06D surge protection alarm cable transmits information about the surge protection box in an ODM06D to a central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA).

Procedure Step 1 Prepare an ODM06D surge protection alarm cable. 1.

Cut off the RJ45 connectors on both ends of the network cable, and cut the power cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Strip the sheath of 7 mm (0.28 in.) off the network cable at both ends, and three pairs of wires in the twisted pair that are exposed.

NOTICE When stripping the jacket off a twisted pair to expose the shield layer, do not scratch the insulation layer of wires in the twisted pair. Step 2 Install the ODM06D surge protection alarm cable, a shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the ODM06D surge protection alarm cable with the bare wire to the IN0 port on the central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA) in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the other end of the ODM06D surge protection alarm cable with the bare wire to the surge protector in the ODM06D.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


248



Figure 6-228 Installing an ODM06D surge protection alarm cable


6.9.6 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables in Case of Less than or Equal to 12 RRUs CPRI fiber optic cables transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RRUs.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


249



Context NOTE

l The single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and the multimode optical module is labeled as MM. l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode optical module is black or gray. l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports. l For details about the CPRI fiber optic cable connections, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.


Procedure Step 1 Install optical module in the BBU side, as shown in Figure 6-229 and Figure 6-230. 1.

Remove the dustproof cap from the CPRI port on the GTMU, UBRI, WBBP, UBBP or LBBP in the BBU.

2.


3.


4.

Insert the optical module into a CPRI port on the GTMU, UBRI, WBBP, or LBBP.

5.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


250



Step 2 Install fiber optic cables on the BBU side, as shown in Figure 6-231 and Figure 6-232. 1.

Remove the dustproof cap from the connectors at the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cables.

2.

Insert the connectors into the optical module in the BBU.

Figure 6-231 Removing the dustproof caps from the fiber optic cable

Figure 6-232 Installing the CPRI fiber optic cables

Step 3 Route the CPRI fiber optic cables along the left side of the cabinet through the cable bag on the bottom left side of the cabinet, and to the corresponding RRUs. Step 4 Install the same type of optical modules in both the RRU and BBU sides and insert the end labeled 1A and 1B on the fiber optic cables to the optical module in the RRU side. For details about how to install the optical modules and CPRI fiber optic cables on the RRU side, see the related RRU installation guide.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


251



NOTICE l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type. l When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout cables on the BBU side and on the RRU side are 0.34 m (13.386 in.) and 0.03 m (1.181 in.), respectively. l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX and RX ports on the BBU must be connected to the TX and RX ports on the RF module, respectively. Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label. ----End

6.9.7 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables in Case of More Than 12 RRUs A CPRI fiber optic cable transmits CPRI signals between a BBU and an RRU.

Context NOTE

l Single-mode optical modules are labeled as SM and multi-mode optical modules are labeled as MM. l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode optical module is black or gray. l Optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports. l For details about the CPRI fiber optic cable connections, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. l When more than 12 RRUs are configured, you can use a CPRI fiber optic cable to connect a BBU to an RRU according to the instructions in 6.9.6 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables in Case of Less than or Equal to 12 RRUs.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


252



NOTICE When installing a single-core bi-directional fiber optic cable for the RRU3804 or RRU3806, pay attention to the following: l

The single-core bi-directional optical module must be used in pairs. Therefore, the singlecore bi-directional optical modules used in the BBU must match those used in the RRUs.

l

The rate of a single-core bi-directional optical module supported by the single-core bidirectional fiber optic cable is 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s.

l

When installing a fiber optic cable, split the DLC connector at each side into two LC connectors, and connect only one LC connector at each end of the fiber optic cable. The other LC connector at each end of the fiber optic cable can be left idle on the equipment side or cut off.


Remove the dustproof cap from the CPRI port on the GTMU, UBRI, WBBP, or LBBP in the BBU.

2.


3.


4.


5.



Figure 6-234 Installing an optical module

Step 2 Layer 12 CPRI fiber optic cables hierarchically and wrap the CPRI fiber optic cables with winding plastic tape, as showing in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


253


6 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) NOTE

Wrap the end of the fiber optic cable with a winding pipe and then wrap it with a tape to avoid dropping of the protective caps.

Figure 6-235 Wrapping CPRI fiber optic cables with winding plastic tape

Step 3 Route the OFD trunk fiber optic cable into the cabinet through the cable bag on the left side of the cabinet, and remove the winding plastic tape after the trunk fiber optic cable is routed into the cabinet. Step 4 Install the OFD trunk fiber optic cable on the BBU side, as shown in Figure 6-236 and Figure 6-237. 1.

Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors at the end labeled 0A and 0B to 5A to 5B on the fiber optic cables.

2.

Insert the connector into the optical module in the BBU.

Figure 6-236 Removing dust-proof caps from the fiber optic cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


254



Figure 6-237 Installing a CPRI fiber optic cable

NOTE

When putting fiber optic cables through the PG connector of an OFD06D, put them through it one by one rather than all together.

Step 5 Install the OFD trunk fiber optic cable on the OFD06D. 1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Remove the cover from the OFD06, remove the M20 PG connector from the cable hole on the right side of the OFD06, and remove the rubber plug inside, as shown in the following figure.


255



Figure 6-238 Removing a rubber plug

2.

Insert the PG connector and the removed rubber plug onto the fiber optic cable, and route the fiber optic cable through the cable hole on the right side.

3.

Insert the six DLC connectors on the trunk fiber optic cable into the six SFP ports facing upwards in the OFD06, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

If the fiber optic cable in the OFD06 is excessively long, wind the fiber optic cable for some circles to ensure the convenient connection between the fiber optic cable and ports.

Figure 6-239 Installing the trunk fiber optic cable

4.

Remove the M32 PG connectors in the two cable holes on the left side and remove the rubber plugs inside.

5.

Put the PG connectors onto the three breakout fiber optic cables, pull apart the holes in the rubber plug, and insert the breakout fiber optic cables into the holes, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


256



Figure 6-240 Holes in the rubber plug

6.

Insert the two rubber plugs into the two cable holes on the left side of the OFD06.

7.

Insert the six DLC connectors on the breakout fiber optic cables into the six SFP ports facing downwards in the OFD06, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

If the fiber optic cable in the OFD06 is excessively long, wind the fiber optic cable for some circles to ensure the convenient connection between the fiber optic cable and ports.

Figure 6-241 Installing the breakout fiber optic cables

8.

Use a cable tie to bind the trunk fiber optic cable with a diameter of 7.5 mm (0.30 in.) onto the cable trough in the OFD06, as shown in the following figure.

NOTICE Do not bind any trunk fiber optic cables with a diameter of 3.5 mm (0.14 in.) or any pigtails. Otherwise, fiber optic cables may be broken with great force. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


257



Figure 6-242 Binding fiber optic cables

(1) Cable trough

9.

Tighten the PG connectors in the three cable holes on the bottom of the ODF06. NOTE

Do not drag the pigtails when tightening the PG connectors.

10. Close the cover for the OFD06 and use a Torx screwdriver to tighten the six T20 anti-theft screws on the cover to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-243 Closing the cover for an OFD06

Step 6 Install the same type of optical modules on the RRU and BBU sides and insert the end labeled 1A and 1B on the breakout fiber optic cables to the optical module on the RRU side. For details about how to install the optical module and CPRI fiber optic cable on the RRU side, see the related RRU installation guide. Step 7 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 8 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label. ----End Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


258



6.10 Installation Checklist After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation environment, and cable-related items.

Cabinet Installation Checklist The following table lists the items to be checked for the cabinet installation. Table 6-26 Cabinet installation checklist No.

Item

1

The installation position of the cabinet strictly complies with the engineering design.

2

The base is securely installed.

3

All the bolts, including those for electrical connections, are tightened. The spring washers and the flat washers are installed in the correct sequence.

4

The cabinet is neat and clean.

5

The paint on the surface is intact. The damaged paint is repaired. For details, see 6.12.2 Repainting.

6

Labels, tags, and nameplates are correct, legible, and complete.

Installation Environment Checklist The following table lists the items to be checked for the installation environment. Table 6-27 Installation environment checklist No.

Item

1

No excessive straps or adhesive tapes are left on the cables.

2

No tapes, tails of cable ties, paper, or packing bags are left around the cabinet.

3

Antirust powder on the door of the cabinet is cleared.

Electrical Connection Checklist The following table lists the items to be checked for electrical connections.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


259



Table 6-28 Electrical connection checklist No.

Item

1

All self-made PGND cables are copper-based with proper core diameters. There should not be any switch or fuse in the grounding system. No short circuit is allowed.

2

The PGND cable is securely connected and the AC input power cable and cables in the cabinet are correctly connected according to the electrical design of the power system. The screws are tightened. In addition, the inputs or outputs are not shortcircuited.

3

The redundant part of the power cable or PGND cable is cut off rather than coiled.

4

The terminals at both ends of the power cable or PGND cable are securely soldered or crimped.

5

The bare wires and the terminal handles at the wiring terminals are coated with heat shrink tubing.

6

The flat washers and the spring washers are well mounted on all OT terminals.

7

The exterior of the storage battery is intact without any scratch, dent, or crack.

8

The shell of the storage battery is clean without any leakage trace.

9

The wiring terminal on the storage battery stands properly without any damage, and the post is not covered with any acid substances.

10

The pressure relief valve of the battery is not deformed, and no liquid leaks.

11

The power cables for the storage batteries are correctly connected to the positive and negative poles.

12

The voltage of the storage battery is normal. l The voltage of a 2 V storage battery ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V. l The voltage of a 12 V storage battery ranges from 10.8 V to 14.1 V. l The total voltage of the storage batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.

13

The circuit breakers for the storage batteries are set to OFF.

Cable Installation Checklist The following table lists the items to be checked for the cable installation. Table 6-29 Cable installation checklist

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1

All cables, especially the Ethernet cables for communication, are securely connected. All cable connectors at the bottom of the cabinet are securely installed.


260



No.

Item

2

The cables are neatly and tightly bound. The cable ties are evenly spaced and face the same direction.

3

Different types of cables, such as the power cable, PGND cable, feeder, fiber optic cable, E1/T1, and FE/GE signal cable are separately bound.

4

The layout of all cables facilitates the maintenance and capacity expansion. For example, the maintenance transfer cable is bound to the outside of the BBU cable claw, as shown in the following figure.

5

All the labels at both ends of the cables are legible.

6

The extra length of the indoor cable ties is cut off, and the cut surfaces are smooth without sharp edges. The extra length of 3 mm (0.11 in.) to 5 mm (0.19 in.) of the outdoor cable ties is reserved when the cable ties are cut.

7

The port that no cable is connected to is properly protected.

8

The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid false connection that will cause an abnormal voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR).

Figure 6-244 Checking the maintenance transfer cable

6.11 Powering On a Base Station This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply to the components in a cabinet.

Prerequisites l

Input power cables for the DBS3900 are correctly connected.

l

The power supply to the DBS3900 meets the requirements of the power system.

l

External power supply to the DBS3900 has been shut off.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


261



l

All circuit breakers in the APM30H have been set to OFF.

l

All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDU in the TMC11H have been set to OFF.

l

All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, IBBS300T, IBBS700D or IBBS700T (battery cabinet for short) have been set to OFF.

l

Circuit breakers on the boards in the BBU have been set to OFF.

l

Boards, modules, and cables have been installed in the cabinet.

Context

NOTICE l Power on a cabinet, BBU3910, or BBU3900 within 7 days after unpacking it. If you power off a cabinet or BBU for maintenance, restore power to the cabinet or BBU within 48 hours. l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it. If you power off an RRU for maintenance, restore power to the RRU within 24 hours.

Table 6-30 Circuit breakers in a DBS3900 Cabinet

Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker

APM30H (Ver.B) cabinets

EPS 01A or EPS 01C, DCDU-01, DCDU-03B, DCDU-03C, or power distribution box

l Circuit breakers on the EPS 01A or EPS 01C l BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2 circuit breakers for a battery cabinet on the power distribution box l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the DCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control the power input to the RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fan assembly, and customer transmission equipment.) l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the DCDU-03C (The circuit breakers control the power input to the BBU, fan assembly, and customer transmission equipment.)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


262



Cabinet

Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker

APM30H (Ver.C) cabinets

EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04, DCDU-11A, DCDU-11B, DCDU-11C, and power distribution box

l Circuit breakers on the EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 l BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2 circuit breakers for a battery cabinet on the power distribution box l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the DCDU-11B (SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers control the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5, BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA/EMUB, and FAN 02B. The SW9 circuit breaker is reserved.) l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the DCDU-11C (SW0 to SW5 circuit breakers control the power input to the transmission equipment. SW6 to SW9 circuit breakers control the power input to BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA/EMUB, and FAN 02B.)

APM30H (Ver.D) cabinets


l Circuit breakers on the EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 l BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breakers for a battery cabinet on the power distribution box

NOTE

(1) In this section, EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 and EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 are shortened to EPU, EPS 01A or EPS 01C is shortened to EPS, and a DCDU of any model is shortened to DCDU.

Power-on Check Process The following figure shows the power-on check process.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


263



Figure 6-245 Power-on check process

Procedure Step 1 Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit. Step 2 Optional: If the base station is configured with a battery cabinet, set the BAT circuit breaker on the EPU or EPS to ON and set the circuit breaker on the power distribution box in the battery cabinet to ON. Otherwise, skip this step. Step 3 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the APM30H and battery cabinet. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


264



Step 4 Set the circuit breakers on the EPU or EPS for the corresponding components to ON, and check the power supply status of each component.

DANGER Exercise caution when performing a power-on check, which involves some high voltage operations. Direct contact with the input voltage or indirect contact with the input voltage using a damp object may be fatal.

Table 6-31 Normal status of the components powered by the EPU or EPS Cabinet

Component

Normal Power Supply Status

APM30H

PMU

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s). l The ALM indicator is steady off.

PSU

l The power indicator is steady green. l The fault indicator is steady off.

Fan assembly


Battery cabinet

Fan in the front door

The fan is working properly.

Fan or TEC in the front door

The fan or the TEC is working properly, and the RUN indicator on the CMUA, CMUE, CMUEA or CCU01D-03 is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

Step 5 Optional: Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on the DCDU in the TMC11H to ON. Skip this step if there is no circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as the DCDU-12B and DCDU-12C. Step 6 Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON. Step 7 Check the power supply to each component according to the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


265



Table 6-32 Normal status of components in the cabinet Cabinet

Componen t


APM30H or TMC11H

BBU

l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on. l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s). l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s),The indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports are in status other than steady reda.

-

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

RRU

l The ALM indicator is steady off. a: If the indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports are steady red, check whether the optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is broken.

NOTE

The indicators in the preceding table are only examples. For the status of other indicators, see BBU Hardware Description.

Step 8 Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on, handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table. Table 6-33 Troubleshooting Failure Type

Handling Measure

Failure in the power supply to all components in the cabinet

Check whether the power cables are reversely connected. l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables. l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power units.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


266



Failure Type

Handling Measure

Failure in the power supply to a board in the BBU

Check as follows: 1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing. Replace the subrack if necessary. 2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the status of indicators on the board. 3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove the board, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards of the same type, and check the status of the indicators. l If the board works properly, the original slot is faulty. In this case, replace the subrack. l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case, replace the board.

Failure in the power supply to other components in the cabinet

Check as follows: 1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block that connects power supply to the component is on. Skip this step and go to step 2 if this component does not use any fuse terminal block. l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse according to the instructions in Replacing a Fuse. l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, go to step 2. 2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to the component. l If the input power is normal, replace the component. l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the power cable for the component is connected securely. If the power cable is not securely connected, turn off the circuit breaker for the component (if there is no circuit breaker for the component, remove the connector from the power unit) and reconnect the power cable. If the power cable is securely connected, the protector (such as circuit breaker or fuse) on the component may be damaged. In this case, replace the damaged protector. If the protector cannot be replaced, replace the upper-level power distribution component.

----End

6.12 Subsequent Operations This chapter describes the operations that need to be performed after the installation, which include sealing the cable holes on the base of the cabinet and repainting the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


267



6.12.1 Sealing the Cable Holes After all cables are installed, seal all cable holes on the cabinets and bases.

Procedure l

Sealing the Cable Holes in the Cabinet 1.

Route cables through the cable bags and pull the drawstrings to fasten the bags around the cables, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

l All cables must be bound to the cable bridges on one side of the cabinet. l You can put your hands in the cable bag to help routing cables through the bag. l The following figure describes the method of fastening cable bags in an APM30H. The same method is used for fastening the cable bags in other types of cabinets.

Figure 6-246 Fastening the cable bags

l

Sealing Cable Holes on a Base for an APM30H/TMC11H/IBBS200D/IBBS200T/RFC 1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Use a baffle plate to block the redundant space in the cable hole and tighten the two screws and two butterfly nuts on each baffle plate to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.


268



Figure 6-247 Sealing the cable holes on the base

(1) Baffle plate on the right

2.

(2) Baffle plate at the rear

(3) Baffle plate on the left

Use fireproof mud to seal the cable holes on the base, as shown in the following figure.

NOTICE Fireproof mud is used only for sealing cable holes on the base. Do not use fireproof mud to seal any cable hole in the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


269



Figure 6-248 Using fireproof mud to seal the cable holes on the base

(1) Fireproof mud

3. l

Tighten the three screws on the baffle plate in front of the base to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.) and close the baffle plate.

Sealing Cable Holes on the Base for an IBBS300D/IBBS300T 1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) PVC corrugated pipe



270





2.





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


271




(1) Fireproof mud

3. l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)




Use baffle plates to block the redundant space in the cable outlets, as shown in the following figure.

2.

Install the front cover plate for the base. Tighten the three M6 countersunk screws on the front cover plate to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.).


272



Figure 6-251 Sealing the cable holes on the base for an IBBS700D/IBBS700T


(2) Baffle plate

(3) Front cover plate

----End

6.12.2 Repainting The paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept intact. Therefore, any damaged paint must be repaired.

Prerequisites Before repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to the following table. Table 6-34 Color codes Intended Object

Color

Huawei Code

International Code

Cabinet

RAL7035

YB026

RAL7035

Base

3010 light gray

YB030

Pantone 422U

Procedure Step 1 If the area where the paint is damaged is dirty or the material is rusted, slightly rub the area with sandpaper to remove the dirt or rust, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


273



Figure 6-252 Rubbing the damaged area with sandpaper

Step 2 Use anhydrous alcohol to dampen a cloth and use the wet cloth to remove dirt or dust from the rubbed area or the area to be repaired. Then dry the area with another clean cloth, as shown in the following figures. Figure 6-253 Cleaning the damaged area with anhydrous alcohol

Step 3 Paint the surface of the cabinet with paint of the same color. Step 4 Shake the bottle of the paint, open the bottle, and saturate the brush with the paint. Then apply the paint evenly to the damaged area until no scar can be observed, as shown in the following figures.

NOTICE The paint coating should be as thin as possible. No drops are allowed on the paint coating, and the surface should be smooth. Figure 6-254 Repaint the damaged paint coating of the cabinet

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


274



Step 5 Perform the following operations after the repaired paint coating has been exposed in the air for 30 minutes. NOTE

The color of the repaired paint coating area should be consistent with that of the surrounding areas, without obvious edges and bulges, and the original damage should no longer be distinguishable. In addition, there should be no paint peeled off.

----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


275

7 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.D) Supplies Power to RRUs


7

Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is

Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.D) Supplies Power to RRUs About This Chapter This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an indoor DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed indoors and an outdoor APM30H (Ver.D) supplies power to RRUs. 7.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing cabinets. The clearances are retained for cable layout and future maintenance. 7.2 Installation Process The DBS3900 installation process includes installing cabinets, installing components in the cabinets, installing cables, installation check, power-on check, and subsequent operations. 7.3 Installing a Cabinet This section describes the procedures for installing the cabinet on a concrete floor. pole, and wall. This document uses the APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet as an example.The installation procedures are the same for the APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C)/ TMC11H (Ver.C) and the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinet. 7.4 Installing a PGND Cable A PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. 7.5 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit When the RRU monitors the devices in the cabinet as a monitoring unit, you need to install the SLPU as a monitoring signal protection unit. 7.6 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. 7.7 Installation Checklist Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


276



After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation environment, and cable-related items. 7.8 Powering On a Base Station This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply to the components in a cabinet. 7.9 Subsequent Operations This chapter describes the operations that need to be performed after the installation, which include sealing the cable holes on the base of the cabinet and repainting the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


277






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


278






NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


279





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


280





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


281






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


282






Installing the Base This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the base for a cabinet on a concrete floor. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


283



Context For the procedure for installing an IBBS700D/IBBS700T on a base, see Installing the Base in IBBS700D&IBBS700T User Guide.

Procedure Step 1 Position the base for the cabinet. 1.


2.

Mark anchor points on the concrete pad, as shown by the circles in the following figure. Figure 7-9 Anchor points for the base


(1) Wall

3.

After drawing the lines between anchor points, use a long measuring tape to measure the distance between anchor points to ensure that the dimensions are accurate.

Step 2 Drill holes at the anchor points and install expansion bolt assemblies in the holes, as shown in the following figure.

CAUTION Take proper safety measures to protect your eyes and respiratory tract against the dust before drilling holes.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


284



Generally, the concrete floor is solid and smooth. Therefore, you can use the center punch to help locate the drill bit. If the conditions of the floor allow direct drilling, skip this step.


(1) M12x60 bolts

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Turning the M12x60 bolt, spring washer, and flat washer counterclockwise, and remove them in sequence.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


285



CAUTION After dismantling the expansion bolt assembly, ensure that the top of the expansion tube is level with the concrete floor. Otherwise, the cabinet cannot be installed on the concrete floor evenly and securely. Step 3 Place the base on the concrete pad, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.



Step 4 Adjust the base until it is horizontally level, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


286




(1) Level

(2) Spacer

Step 5 Use a torque wrench to tighten the M12x60 bolts to 45 N·m (398.25 lbf·in.) in a diagonal sequence, as shown in the following figure. Figure 7-13 Tightening the bolts

Step 6 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the three M4 countersunk screws on the front cover plate of the base, and remove the front cover plate. NOTE

Keep the removed screws and cover plates for later installation.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


287



Figure 7-14 Remove the front cover plate

Step 7 Remove the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of the base, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two M4 screw assemblies on the left of the rear of the base and slide the left baffle plate to the left. Then remove the baffle plates on the right side one by one.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


288




----End


Context l

The procedures for installing the APM30H, TMC11H, IBBS200D/IBBS200T, and IBBS300D/IBBS300T are the same. The following uses the APM30H as an example.

l



l


Procedure Step 1 Lift the APM30H onto the base and align the bolt holes in the cabinet with those in the base, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


289



Figure 7-16 Lifting the APM30H cabinet onto the base



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



290









Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


291




Context l


l



Procedure Step 1 At an appropriate height on the pole, use four M12x180 bolts to secure a ladder-shaped bracket onto the pole, and tighten the bolts to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as show in the following figure. Figure 7-20 Installing the ladder-shaped bracket



(3) Pole

(4) Bolt

(5) Spring washer

(6) Flat washer


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


292





(1) Bar


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



293




l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


294





Step 6 Put an U-shaped bracket through the holes in the bar at the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following figure. Figure 7-26 Installing the U-shaped bracket

(1) Flat washer

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Spring washer


(3) Nut

295





Context l


l



Procedure Step 1 Place a marking-off template against the wall, use a level to verify that the marking-off template is placed horizontally, and then use a marker to mark six anchor points, as shown in the following figure. Figure 7-27 Marking the anchor points

(1) Anchor points


Step 2 Drill holes at the anchor points and install expansion bolts in the holes, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


296



1.




3.


4.



(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube

Step 3 Align the ladder-shaped bracket with the four lower holes in the wall and use four M12x60 bolts to tighten the ladder-shaped bracket to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


297




(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


298




(1) Bar



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



299






Step 8 Use two bolts to secure the bar on the cabinet onto the wall, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


300



Figure 7-35 Securing the bar


7.4 Installing a PGND Cable A PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet.

Context The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable in the APM30H (Ver.B) series cabinets. Table 7-1 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable Cable


Color

PGND cable


Green and yellow

The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable in the APM30H (Ver.C) series cabinets. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


301



Table 7-2 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable Cable


Color

PGND cable


l 220 V AC or -48 V DC input: green and yellow l 110 V AC input: green

The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable in the APM30H (Ver.D) series cabinets. Table 7-3 Specifications of a PGND cable Cable


Color

PGND cable


l 220 V AC input: green and yellow l 110 V AC input: green

NOTE




2.


Step 2 Install the PGND cable, as shown in Figure 7-37. 1.

Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar inside the APM30H, use a screw to secure the OT terminal of the PGND cable, and then tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


302




Figure 7-37 Installing a PGND cable


7.5 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit When the RRU monitors the devices in the cabinet as a monitoring unit, you need to install the SLPU as a monitoring signal protection unit.

Context The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space below the AC power equipment.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


303





2.


3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


304



----End



Cable Holes in the APM30H The following figure shows a planform for the cable holes at the bottom of the APM30H. Figure 7-40 Planform for the cable holes in the APM30H

(1) Left cable hole


The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in an APM30H. Table 7-4 Cable routing through the cable holes in an APM30H

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Item

Description

Left cable hole



305



Item

Description

Right cable hole


Cable bags are used in the cable holes of the APM30H. This facilitates the routing of all types of cables. The following figure shows the cable bags in an APM30H. Figure 7-41 Cables holes in an APM30H

Cable Holes in a TMC11H The following figure shows a planform for the cable holes at the bottom of the TMC11H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


306



Figure 7-42 Planform for the cable holes in the TMC11H

(1) Left cable hole


The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in a TMC11H. Table 7-5 Cable routing through the cable holes in a TMC11H Item

Description

Left cable hole


Right cable hole




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


307



Figure 7-43 Planform for the cable holes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T

(1) Left cable hole


The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in an IBBS200D/ IBBS200T. Table 7-6 Cable routing through the cable holes in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T Item

Description

Left cable hole


Right cable hole




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


308



Figure 7-44 Planform for the cable holes in the IBBS300D/IBBS300T

(1) Left cable hole



Description

Left cable hole


Right cable hole


Cable bags are used in the cable holes of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. This facilitates the routing of all types of cables. The following figure shows the cable bags in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


309



Figure 7-45 Cable bags in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T

Cable Holes in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T The following figure shows a planform for the cable holes at the bottom of the IBBS700D/ IBBS700T. Figure 7-46 Planform for the cable holes at the bottom of an IBBS700D/IBBS700T

(1) Left cable hole


Cable bags are used in the cable holes of an IBBS700D/IBBS700T. This facilitates the routing of all types of cables. The following figure shows the cable bags in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


310



Figure 7-47 Cable bags in an IBBS700D/IBBS700T


Note

Left cable hole


Right cable hole






l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


311



l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l


Security requirements l


l


l




l


l


l




l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


312



l


l


l




l






The following figure shows the cables secured on a cable tray.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


313



Figure 7-49 Cables secured on a cable tray

(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


314




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


315



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


316



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


317





l


l


l


7.6.3 Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H In an APM30H (Ver.D), the input power cables for the APM30H refer to EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cables. The cables feed power into the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 in the APM30H (Ver.D) from the external power equipment.

Context The APM30H supports 220 V AC three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110 V AC duallive-wire power supplies, which require different types of input power cables for the APM30H, as listed in the following table. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


318



Table 7-9 Specifications of the input power cables for the APM30H Cable

Color

One End

The Other End

L1

Brown

L2

Black



L3

Gray

N

Blue


L

Brown

N

Blue



EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cables in a 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenario

L1

Black

L2

Red



N

White


NOTE

l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l Determine whether to install a polyethylene (PE) wire based on local regulations.

Procedure Step 1 Prepare EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cables. 1.


2.

Add M6 OT terminals to the cables on the EPU side according to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cables, as shown in Figure 7-56, Figure 7-57, or Figure 7-58. 1.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the M3 screw from the protective cover for the AC input terminals, and open the protective cover.

2.

Optional: When 220 V AC three-phase power is supplied, remove the short-circuiting bar from the L1, L2, and L3 AC input terminals. NOTE

When 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied, do not remove the short-circuiting bar. When 110 V AC dual-live-wire power is supplied, the EPU is not configured with any short-circuiting bar.

3.

Route the power cables into the cabinet along the inner left side of the cabinet, connect each wire to the corresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

4.

Install the protective cover for AC input terminals, and tighten the screws to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


319



Figure 7-56 Installing the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cable (220 V AC three-phase)


Figure 7-57 Installing the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cable (220 V AC single-phase)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


320



Figure 7-58 Installing the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 power cable (110 V AC dual-live-wire)

Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 7.6.2 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole on the cabinet. Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. ----End

7.6.4 Installing RRU Power Cables This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing RRU power cables.

Context l

A maximum of 12 RRU power cables (6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2) can be installed in an APM30H.

l

RRU power cables are routed into the APM30H through the right cable bag in preference. If the space in the right cable bag is insufficient, you can route the RRU power cables through the left cable bag.

An RRU power cable feeds DC power into an RRU. The following table lists the specifications of an RRU power cable. Table 7-10 Specifications of an RRU power cable Cable RRU power cable

RTN(+)

Color

One End

The Other End

Black (North American)

EPC5 connector


Brown (European ) NEG(-)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Blue


321




Procedure Step 1 Route the RRU power cables into the APM30H through the right cable bag. Step 2 Install the ground clip, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away from the cable bag in the APM30H to expose the shield layer. NOTE

If the RRU power cable is routed into the APM30H through the left cable bag, strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable immediately after routing it into the cabinet.

2.

Strip the shield layer to expose the two wires at the position 350 mm (13.78 in.) away from the cable bag in the APM30H.

3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


322



Step 3 Add an EPC5 connector to the RRU power cable on the EPU side, as shown in Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable. Step 4 Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the RRU side to the power port on the RRU.

CAUTION Ensure that the RRU power cable for an RRU added to a running base station must be connected to the RRU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury. Step 5 Connect the EPC5 connector at the other end of the RRU power cable to one of the RRU0 to RRU5 ports on the EPU or one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12B, as shown in the following figure. Figure 7-60 Installing an RRU power cable

Step 6 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 7 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole on the cabinet. Step 8 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label. ----End

7.6.5 Installing an RRU Monitoring Signal Cable An RRU monitoring signal cable connects the APM30H and an RRU. This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an RRU monitoring signal cable. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


323



Context The following table lists the mapping between the cord end terminals on the RRU monitoring signal cable and the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2. Table 7-11 Mapping between the cord end terminals on the RRU monitoring signal cable and the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2 USLP2

RRU Monitoring Signal Cable

OUT1

IN0

Label on the Cord End Terminal

OUT1

IN0.1

TX+

IN0.2

TX-

IN0.3

RX+

IN0.4

RX-

NOTE

l The four unused cord end terminals must be cut off and the wires must be wrapped with insulation tape separately so that short-circuits does not occur. l The RRU monitoring signal cable must be a shielded straight-through cable and be equipped with a ground clip before it is routed out of the cabinet.

Procedure Step 1 Route an RRU monitoring signal cable through the cable bag on the right side of the cabinet into the cabinet. Step 2 Install the ground clip, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Strip a length of 50 mm (1.97 in.) jacket off the cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away from the cable bag in the cabinet to expose the shield layer.

2.

Route the RRU monitoring signal cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield layer securely contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


324




Step 3 Install an RRU monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the RRU monitoring signal cable to the IN0 port on the USLP2 in the SLPU of the APM30H.

2.

Connect the other end of the RRU monitoring signal cable to the EXT_LAM port on the RRU. NOTE

This section describes the connections and routing of the RRU monitoring signal cable in an APM30H (Ver.D). The connections and routing of the RRU monitoring signal cable in the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H (Ver.D) are the same.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


325



Figure 7-62 Installing the RRU monitoring signal cable


7.6.6 Installing the CMUEA-SLPU Surge Protection Monitoring Cable The CMUEA-SLPU surge protection transfer cable connects the CMUEA and USLP2, providing the surge protection for the monitoring signals.

Procedure Step 1 Install a CMUEA-SLPU surge protection transfer cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the CMUEA-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA.

2.

Connect the other end of the CMUEA-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable to the OUT1 port on the USLP2 in SLPU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


326



Figure 7-63 Installing the CMUEA-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable


7.6.7 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable A BBU alarm cable transmits the alarm signals from external alarm devices to the BBU.



2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


327






Cabinet Installation Checklist The following table lists the items to be checked for the cabinet installation. Table 7-12 Cabinet installation checklist

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


6

Labels, tags, and nameplates are correct, legible, and complete. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

328




Item

1


2


3


Electrical Connection Checklist The following table lists the items to be checked for electrical connections. Table 7-14 Electrical connection checklist

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8


9


10


11

The power cables for the storage batteries are correctly connected to the positive and negative poles. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

329



No.

Item

12


13



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8



330





Prerequisites l


l


l


l


l


l

All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (battery cabinet for short) have been set to OFF.

l


Context


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


331




Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker










NOTE


Power-on check process The following figure shows the power-on check process. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


332




Procedure Step 1 Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit. Step 2 Optional: If the base station is configured with a battery cabinet, set the BAT circuit breaker on the EPU or EPS to ON and set the circuit breaker on the power distribution box in the battery cabinet to ON. Otherwise, skip this step. Step 3 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the APM30H and battery cabinet. Step 4 Set the circuit breakers on the EPU or EPS for the corresponding components to ON, and check the power supply status of each component.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


333




Component


APM30H

PMU

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s). l The ALM indicator is steady off. l The power indicator is steady green.

PSU

l The fault indicator is steady off. Fan assembly




Battery cabinet


The fan or the TEC is working properly, and the RUN indicator on the CMUA, CMUE, or CMUEA is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

-

RRU

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s). l The ALM indicator is steady off.


Handling Measure



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


334



Failure Type

Handling Measure





----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


335




Procedure l





l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



336





2.





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


337




(1) Fireproof mud

3. l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)




338





2.





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


339




(1) Fireproof mud

3. l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)





2.



340





(2) Baffle plate


----End



Color

Huawei Code

International Code

Cabinet

RAL7035

YB026

RAL7035

Base

3010 light gray

YB030

Pantone 422U



341







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


342





----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


343

8 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D)


8

Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D)

About This Chapter This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H(Ver.D). 8.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing cabinets. The clearances are retained for cable layout and future maintenance. 8.2 Installation Process The DBS3900 installation process includes installing cabinets, installing components in the cabinets, installing cables, installation check, power-on check, and subsequent operations. 8.3 Installing a Cabinet This section describes the procedures for installing the cabinet on a concrete floor. pole, and wall. This document uses the APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet as an example.The installation procedures are the same for the APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C)/ TMC11H (Ver.C) and the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinet. 8.4 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable A PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets. 8.5 Installing Mandatory Components This chapter provides the reference for installing mandatory components in a DBS3900. 8.6 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables This chapter describes procedures for installing the optional modules and their cables onsite. 8.7 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


344



8.8 Installation Checklist After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation environment, and cable-related items. 8.9 Powering On a Base Station This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply to the components in a cabinet. 8.10 Subsequent Operations This chapter describes the operations that need to be performed after the installation, which include sealing the cable holes on the base of the cabinet and repainting the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


345






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


346






NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


347





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


348





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


349






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


350








351






2.



(1) Wall

3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


352





(1) M12x60 bolts

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


353





2.





2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


354




(1) Level

(2) Spacer




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


355






2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


356




----End


Context l


l



l




357






l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



358









Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


359




Context l


l






(3) Pole

(4) Bolt

(5) Spring washer

(6) Flat washer


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


360





(1) Bar


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



361




l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


362






(1) Flat washer

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Spring washer


(3) Nut

363





Context l


l




(1) Anchor points




364



1.




3.


4.



(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


365




(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


366




(1) Bar



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



367







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


368





8.4 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable A PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.

Context The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable in the TMC11H (Ver.B). Table 8-1 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cable


Color

PGND cable


Green and yellow

Equipotential cable



369



The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable in the TMC11H (Ver.C). Table 8-2 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable Cable


Color

PGND cable



Equipotential cable


l 110 V AC input: green


The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable in the TMC11H (Ver.D). Table 8-3 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable Cable


Color

PGND cable


l 220 V AC input: green and yellow

Equipotential cable



NOTE

A PGND cable and an equipotential cable are installed in the same way for the TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D). This section uses the TMC11H (Ver.D) as an example.



2.


Step 2 Install the PGND cable, as shown in Figure 8-37. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


370



1.

Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar inside the TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input) cabinet, use a screw to secure the OT terminal of the PGND cable, and then tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

2.






(2) PGND cable

(3) Ground busbar

Step 3 Install the equipotential cable between two TMC11Hs, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


371



Figure 8-38 Installing an equipotential cable






Context l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


372




l




l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



373





l



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



374




l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



375




2.


3.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



376







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


377




----End





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


378





----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


379




Context l


l

Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks


RJ45 connector

RJ45 connector



Bare wire


-



Then...


Go toStep 2.


Go toStep 3.



2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


380









2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


381







2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


382




NOTE





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


383





8.6.2 Installing the DCDU-12B You need to install the DCDU-12B and its cables when RRUs are added to a base station configured only with RFUs.

Context l

The following figure shows the position for installing the DCDU-12B in a cabinet. Table 8-5 Position for installing the DCDU-12B Base Station



BTS3900A (Ver.D)

-

1 U space at the top of the RFC

DBS3900


Depending on site requirements


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


384



Figure 8-59 Position of a DCDU-12B

l

The following table lists the specifications of the DCDU-12B power cable. Table 8-6 Cable specifications Base Station


Cable

BTS390 0A (Ver.D)

AC

BTS390 0A (Ver.D)

DC

Color Most Region s

UK

RTN(+)

Black

Blue

NEG(-)

Blue

Grey

RTN(+)

Black

Blue


Connector One End

The Other End


OT terminal (M6)

OT terminal (M6)

l 35 mm2 or 0.05 4 in.

OT terminal (M6)


2

(low smo ke zero halo gen), one grou p l 16 mm2 or 0.02 5 in.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


385



Base Station


Cable

NEG(-)

Color Most Region s

UK

Blue

Grey


Connector One End

The Other End


OT terminal (M6)

OT terminal (M6)

l 35 mm2 or 0.05 4 in.

OT terminal (M6)


2,

two grou ps

DBS390 0

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Configu red with a APM30 H (Ver.D), 7 to 12 RRUs are installed in a cabinet

RTN(+)

Black

Blue

NEG(-)

Blue

Grey

Configu red with a TMC11 H (Ver.D), 7 to 12 RRUs are

RTN(+)

Black

Blue


2

(low smo

386



Base Station


Cable

installed in a cabinet

NEG(-)

Color Most Region s

UK

Blue

Grey


Connector One End

The Other End

ke zero halo gen), one grou p l 16 mm2 or 0.02 5 in. 2, two grou ps

Procedure Step 1 Remove the four M6 screws on both sides of the slot for installing the DCDU-12B. Step 2 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12B, as shown in the following figure. Figure 8-60 Installing a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12B


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


387



Step 3 Install the DCDU-12B, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears on both sides of the DCDU-12B contact the columns.

2.

Tighten the four M6 screws on both sides of the DCDU-12B to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).


(1) DCDU-12B

(2) Cable claw

Step 4 Prepare the DCDU-12B power cable. 1.


2.

Add new connectors to both ends of the cable. Table 8-7 Cable Connector Base Station


Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) AC


DBS3900


Add new connectors to both ends of the power cable according to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.


BTS3900A (Ver.D) DC

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



Add new OT terminals to one end of the power cable according to the 388



Base Station


DBS3900

Configured with a TMC11H (Ver.D)

Power Equipment

Method of Adding the Connector instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. The connector at the other end depends on the site requirements.

Step 5 Install the DCDU-12B power cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the protective cover for the terminals of the DC input power cable from the DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12B, and tighten the screws on the DCDU-12B to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

2.

Reinstall the protective cover, and use a screwdriver to tighten the screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the other end of the power cable to the corresponding port on the power equipment, as described in the following table. Table 8-8 Cable Installation Position Base Station


Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) AC



DBS3900




Corresponding port on the external power equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) DC

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


389



Base Station


DBS3900


Power Equipment


Figure 8-62 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable


8.6.3 Installing the AC Heater When the environmental temperature of a cabinet is low, the cabinet can be configured with a heater so that the temperature in the cabinet is kept in a proper range. This section describes the procedure for installing a heater in an APM30H or TMC11H. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


390



Context The procedure for installing an AC heater is the same for the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H (Ver.D). The procedure for installing an AC heater is the same for the TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D). The figures in this section use the APM30H (Ver.D) and TMC11H (Ver.D) as examples. If a service outlet unit (SOU) is not installed in the cabinet, install the AC heater in the 1U space at the bottom of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 8-63. If an SOU is installed in the cabinet, install the AC heater above the SOU, as shown in Figure 8-64. Figure 8-63 Position of the AC heater (1)


(1) AC heater

(2) SOU

Procedure Step 1 Slide the AC heater into the cabinet along the guide rails, and then tighten the four M6x12 screws on the panel to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


391



Figure 8-65 Installing the AC heater

Step 2 Install the AC heater power cable. If...

Then...


Perform Step 2.1


Perform Step 2.2

1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



b.


c.


d.



392




2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



b.


c.


d.

To install the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H, do as follows: Route the cables into the cabinet from the left side of the cabinet, connect the OT terminals at one end of the cables to the L and N terminals in the AC junction box in the TMC11H and the other end of the cables to the external power equipment.

e.



393






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


394



8.6.4 Installing the EMUA/EMUB in the TMC11H When an outdoor base station uses 17 to 32 customerized alarm inputs, you need to install the EMUA/EMUB and its cables.

Context l


l


Color

One End

The Other End

RTN(+) wire

Black

EPC4 connector

Cord end terminal

NEG(-) wire


RJ45 connector


l

Black


Procedure Step 1 Select the step according to the types of the TMC11H. If...

Then...

An TMC11H(Ver.B) or TMC11H(Ver.C) is used

Go toStep 2.

An TMC11H(Ver.D) is used

Go toStep 3.



2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


395








Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


396







2.





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


397





Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) -

DCDU-12C

DBS3900

The EMUA/EMUB is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D).

DCDU-12B


BTS3900A (Ver.C)

-

DCDU-11C

DBS3900

The EMUA/EMUB is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.C).

DCDU-12B

BTS3900A (Ver.B)

-

DCDU-03C

DBS3900

The EMUA/EMUB is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.B).

DCDU-03B

Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(1) Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable

Step 7 Install the EMUA/EMUB power cable. 1.


2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the corresponding power equipment, as listed in the following table. Table 8-11 Method of adding the connectors on the EMUA/EMUB power cable Base Station

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) -

DCDU-12C

DBS3900


DCDU-12B


BTS3900A (Ver.C)

-

DCDU-11C

DBS3900


DCDU-12B

BTS3900A (Ver.B)

-

DCDU-03C

DBS3900


DCDU-03B



398




3.


4.




2.

Connect the RJ-45 connector at the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the fan assembly in the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


399




3.


4.


----End



Procedure Step 1 Optional: Loosen the two M3 screws on the panel of the USCU and pull it out, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


400



Figure 8-75 Removing the USCU



2.


3.


4.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


401




(1) Satellite card



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


402





(2) Support




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


403




(1) BBU

(2) GPS support





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


404





8.6.6 Installing the DDF The digital distribution frame (DDF) distributes alarm cables and E1/T1 cables.

Context l

The DDF is installed in the 1 U space reserved in the cabinet.

l

In the following figure showing the digital distribution module, a, b, and s have different meanings. – a and b indicate signal cables. – s indicates a PGND cable.

l

Alarm cables are routed on the left side of the DDF, and E1/T1 cables are routed on the right side of the DDF. All cables are routed from the top down.

l

The following procedure uses a twisted pair cable as an example. When installing an E1 coaxial cable, install an insulating pad between the wiring terminal and the DDF.

Procedure Step 1 Distribute the twisted pair cable on the DDF on the BBU side. This twisted pair cable is connected to the BBU. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


405



1.


2.


Step 2 Distribute the twisted pair cable on the DDF on the peer equipment side. This twisted pair cable is connected to the peer equipment. 1.


2.


Step 3 Arrange the wires on the DDF, as shown in the following figure. Figure 8-82 Cabling on the DDF

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


406



l After distributing cables on the DDF, ensure that no bare wire is exposed outside the DDF. l When interconnecting cables on both sides of the DDF, interconnect wires according to actual situations. The colors of interconnected wires must be the same, as shown in Figure 8-82.

Step 4 Select the step according to the types of the cabinet. If...

Then...


Go toStep 5.

An APM30H(Ver.D) or BTS3900AL(Ver.A) is used

Go toStep 6.



2.






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


407




Step 7 Check whether floating nuts are installed on both sides of the 19-inch rack. If no, install the floating nuts delivered with the DDF to both sides of the rack. Step 8 Align the DDF with the cabinet, slide it into the cabinet, and use a screwdriver to tighten two M6x12 screws on each side of the DDF to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 8-85 Installing the DDF

----End




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


408





l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l




l


l




l


l


l


Outdoor Cabling Requirements l Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Protect outdoor cables against potential damage. For example, put the cables through tubes. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

409



l


l


l


l


l


l


l




l







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


410




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


411




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


412



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


413



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


414





l


l


l



Cable Holes in the APM30H The following figure shows a planform for the cable holes at the bottom of the APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


415



Figure 8-94 Planform for the cable holes in the APM30H

(1) Left cable hole


The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in an APM30H. Table 8-12 Cable routing through the cable holes in an APM30H Item

Description

Left cable hole


Right cable hole


Cable bags are used in the cable holes of the APM30H. This facilitates the routing of all types of cables. The following figure shows the cable bags in an APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


416



Figure 8-95 Cables holes in an APM30H

Cable Holes in a TMC11H The following figure shows a planform for the cable holes at the bottom of the TMC11H. Figure 8-96 Planform for the cable holes in the TMC11H

(1) Left cable hole


The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in a TMC11H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


417



Table 8-13 Cable routing through the cable holes in a TMC11H Item

Description

Left cable hole


Right cable hole



Cable Holes in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T The following figure shows a planform for the cable holes at the bottom of the IBBS200D/ IBBS200T. Figure 8-97 Planform for the cable holes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T

(1) Left cable hole


The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in an IBBS200D/ IBBS200T.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


418




Description

Left cable hole


Right cable hole



Cable Holes in the IBBS300D/IBBS300T The following figure shows a planform for the cable holes at the bottom of the IBBS300D/ IBBS300T. Figure 8-98 Planform for the cable holes in the IBBS300D/IBBS300T

(1) Left cable hole


The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in an IBBS300D/ IBBS300T. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


419




Description

Left cable hole


Right cable hole


Cable bags are used in the cable holes of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. This facilitates the routing of all types of cables. The following figure shows the cable bags in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Figure 8-99 Cable bags in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


420



Figure 8-100 Planform for the cable holes at the bottom of an IBBS700D/IBBS700T

(1) Left cable hole


Cable bags are used in the cable holes of an IBBS700D/IBBS700T. This facilitates the routing of all types of cables. The following figure shows the cable bags in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T. Figure 8-101 Cable bags in an IBBS700D/IBBS700T

The following table describes the cable routing through the cable holes in an IBBS700D/ IBBS700T. Table 8-16 Cable routing through the cable holes in an IBBS700D/IBBS700T

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Item

Note

Left cable hole



421



Item

Note

Right cable hole



Installing Input Power Cables for the TMC11H Input power cables for the TMC11H are the DCDU power cables. They connect the TMC11H and the external power equipment, feeding external power to the TMC11H.

Context Input power cables for the TMC11H are DCDU power cables, which can be power cables for the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B. The following table lists the specifications of the power cables. Table 8-17 Specifications of DCDU power cables

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cabinet Type

Power Equipme nt

Cable

Color

One End

The Other End

TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03 B

DCDU-03 B power cable

RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue


Dependin g on the external equipment

TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11 B

DCDU-11 B power cables

RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue

TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12 B


RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue


OT terminals [M6, 35 mm2 (0.054 in. 2) for one group of power cables or 16 mm2 (0.025 in. 2) for two groups of power cables]

422



Procedure Step 1 Route the DCDU power cables into the cabinet through the cable bag or cable hole on the bottom left side of the cabinet. Step 2 Add a DCDU power cable 1.


2.

Add a connector of terminals to each end of the power cable according to the instructions in Table 8-17. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 3 Install the DCDU power cables, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

The following figure uses the DCDU-12B power cable as an example. The procedures are the same for installing the DCDU-03B power cable and DCDU-11B power cable.

1.


2.

Connect the M6 OT terminals at one end of the DCDU power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals on the DCDU in the TMC11H, and tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

3.


Figure 8-102 Installing the DCDU-12B power cables for the TMC11H (Ver.D)

Step 4 Connect the other end of the DCDU power cables to the external power equipment. Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


423



Step 6 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole on the cabinet. Step 7 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. ----End


Context The following table lists the specifications of a BBU power cable. Table 8-18 Specifications of a BBU power cable Cabinet Type

Power Equipm ent

Cable

TMC11 H (Ver.B)

DCDU-0 3B

BBU power cable

TMC11 H (Ver.C)

DCDU-1 1B

BBU power cables

TMC11 H (Ver.D)

DCDU-1 2B

BBU power cables

Color

One End The Other End

RTN(+) wire

Black

NEG(-) wire

Blue

Bent by 90 degrees, OT terminals (M4, 6 mm2 or 0.009 in. 2)

RTN(+) wire

Black

NEG(-) wire

Blue

RTN(+) wire

Black

NEG(-) wire

Blue

3V3 connector

Tool-less female connector (pressfit type) EPC4 connector

NOTE

l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l In capacity expansion scenarios, two BBUs are configured. The power cable for the second BBU is installed in the same way as that for the first BBU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


424



Procedure Step 1 Add a connector to the BBU power cable on the power equipment. 1.


2.

Add new connectors to both ends of the cable.

Cabinet Type

Power Equipment

Method of Adding a Connector

TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B

See Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11B

See Assembling the ToolLess Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(1).

TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12B

See Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port on the UPEU in the BBU. Then tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.). Step 3 Connect the connector at the other end of the BBU power cable to the power equipment, as described in the following table.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the LOAD6 terminal on the DCDU-03B, then tighten the screws on the connector to 1.2 N·m (10.61 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 8-103.

TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11B

Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on the DCDU-11B, as shown in Figure 8-104.

TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12B

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 8-105.


425



When the BBU is configured with two UPEUs, each UPEU must be connected to the power equipment by using a BBU power cable. The 3V3 connector at one end of the second BBU power cable is connected to the -48V port on the UPEU, and the EPC4 connector, tool-less female connector (pressfit type), or OT terminal at the other end is connected to the LOAD7 port or LOAD7 terminal on the DCDU.

CAUTION Ensure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station must be connected to the BBU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury. Figure 8-103 Installing a BBU power cable (when the DCDU-03B supplies power)

Figure 8-104 Installing a BBU power cable (when the DCDU-11B supplies power)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


426



Figure 8-105 Installing BBU power cables (when the DCDU-12B supplies power)

Step 4 Optional: When installing power cables for the second BBU in the TMC11H (Ver.D), see Figure 8-105. 1.

Prepare a BBU power cable following the operations in Step 1.

2.


3.



Installing RRU Power Cables This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing RRU power cables.

Context l

A maximum of 12 RRU power cables (6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2) can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D).

l

RRU power cables are routed into the TMC11H (Ver.D) through the right cable bag in preference. If the space in the right cable bag is insufficient, you can route the RRU power cables through the left cable bag.

The following table lists the specifications of an RRU power cable. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


427



Table 8-19 Specifications of an RRU power cable Cabinet Type

Powe r Equi pmen t

Cable

TMC11 H (Ver.B)

DCD U-03B

RRU power cable

TMC11 H (Ver.C)

DCD U-11B

RRU power cable

Color

One End

The Other End

RTN (+)

Black (complyi ng with the North American standard)

Bent by 90 degrees, OT terminals (M4, 3.3 mm2 or 0.005 in.2(12AWG))


NEG (-)

Blue (complyi ng with the North American standard)

RTN (+)

Brown (complyi ng with the European standard)

NEG (-)

Blue (complyi ng with the European standard)

RTN (+)


Bent by 90 degrees, OT terminals (M4, 4 mm2 or 0.006 in.2)

Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)

Brown (complyi ng with the European standard) NEG (-)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Blue


428



Cabinet Type

Powe r Equi pmen t

Cable

TMC11 H (Ver.D)

DCD U-12B

RRU power cable

RTN (+)

Color

One End

The Other End


EPC5 connector


Blue

NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Route the RRU power cables into the TMC11H through the cable bag or the cable outlet module on the bottom right side. Step 2 Strip a 500 mm (19.69 in.) length of jacket and shield layer off the RRU power cable from one end. Step 3 Prepare an RRU power cable. 1.


2.

Install a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side, as described in the following table.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B

See Adding OT Terminals to the DC RRU Power Cable on the DCDU Side.


429



Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11B


TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12B


Step 4 Install the ground clip, as shown in Figure 8-107. 1.

Strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away from the right cable bag for the TMC11H to expose the shield layer. NOTE

If the RRU power cable is routed into the TMC11H (Ver.D) through the left cable bag, strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable near the cable bag to expose the shield layer after the cable is routed into the cabinet.

2.

Strip the shield layer off the RRU power cable to expose the two wires at the position 350 mm (13.78 in.) away from the right cable bag for the TMC11H.

3.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


430





NOTE


Step 5 Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the RRU side to the power port on the RRU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


431



CAUTION Ensure that the RRU power cable for an RRU added to a running base station must be connected to the RRU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury. Step 6 Install a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side, as described in the following table.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the blue and black/ brown wires of the power cable to the NEG(-) and RTN (+) parts in one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 terminals on the DCDU-03B, then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.). as shown in Figure 8-108.

TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11B

Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-11B, as shown in Figure 8-109.

TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12B

Connect the EPC5 connector at one end of the power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 8-110.


432



Figure 8-108 Installing an RRU power cable (when the DCDU-03B supplies power)


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


433



Figure 8-110 Installing RRU power cables (when the DCDU-12B supplies power)

Step 7 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 8 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label. ----End

8.7.4 Installing Transmission Cables This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing transmission cables.


Context l


l

The connection positions and routing of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable are the same in the TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D). This section uses the TMC11H (Ver.D) as an example.

Procedure Step 1 Connect the DB26 connectors at one end of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable to the E1/ T1 ports on the GTMU/UTRP/WMPT/UMPT in the BBU, and then tighten the plastic screws on the connectors to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


434



Figure 8-111 Installing the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable

Step 2 Connect the DB25 connectors at the other end of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable to the INSIDE ports on the UELP in the SLPU, and then tighten the plastic screws on the connectors to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.), as shown in the preceding figure. Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End


Prerequisites


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


435



Context l

The following figure shows a GU base station using separate transmission. For the E1/T1 cable connections in other types of base stations, see section "Transmission Cable Connections' in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

l

The connection positions and routing of the E1/T1 cable are the same in the TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.B). This section uses the TMC11H (Ver.D) as an example.

l


Procedure Step 1 Connect the DB26 male connector on the E1/T1 cable to an OUTSIDE port on the UELP, and tighten the plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 8-112 Installing the E1/T1 cable

Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cabinet through the cable bag on the bottom left of the cabinet, and then connect the cable to the external transmission equipment. Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


436





Context l


l

The connection positions and routing of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable are the same in the TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C) and TMC11H (Ver.D). This section uses the TMC11H (Ver.D) as an example.

Procedure Step 1 Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to an FE electrical port on the GTMU/WMPT/UMPT/LMPT, as shown in the following figure. Figure 8-113 Installing the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable

Step 2 Connect the other end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to the FE0 or FE1 port near the INSIDE on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 8-113. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


437





Context l


l

When the TMC11H is stacked on an IBBS200D/IBBS200T, ensure that the ground clip has been moved from the ATMC11H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T before installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable.

l


l

The connection positions and routing of the FE/GE Ethernet cable are the same in the TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D). This section uses the TMC11H (Ver.D) as an example.

Procedure Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cable through a cable bag or a cable outlet module into the cabinet. Step 2 Install the ground clip, as shown in the following figure. 1.

At a position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away from the cable bag (TMC11H (Ver.D)) or within 1 m (3.28 in.) away from the cable hole on the cabinet (TMC11H (Ver.C) or TMC11H (Ver.B)), strip a length of 50 mm (1.97 in.) jacket off the FE/GE Ethernet cable to expose the shield layer.

2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


438





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


439




Step 4 Connect the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the external transmission equipment. Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End


Context l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


440



l


l

The connections and routing of FE/GE fiber optic cables in TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D) are the same. This section describes the connections and routing of the FE/GE fiber optic cables in the TMC11H (Ver.D).




2.


3.


4.


5.




Step 2 Install the fiber optic cables, as shown in Figure 8-118 and Figure 8-119. 1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors at the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cables, and insert the connectors into the optical module on the BBU. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

441



2.


3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


442




8.7.5 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables This section describes how to install an inter-BBU signal cable for a triple- or single-mode base station.

Prerequisites l


l

Optical modules, fiber optic cables, and electrical cables meeting the following requirements are available: – The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type. – The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s. – The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable. NOTE



(1) Maximum rate

(2) Wavelength


Context The following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


443



Table 8-20 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected Interconnection Mode


BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT

M0 port on the UCIU


M1 port on the UCIU




CI port on the UMPT

CI port on the UMPT

UMPT+UMPT






2.


3.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


444






1.

Connect one end of the cables to the M0 and M1 ports on the UCIU in BBU 0.

2.




2.


l If the two BBUs are installed in the same TMC11H cabinet by referring to Figure 8-123. If BBU0 and BBU1 are installed in two TMC11H cabinets by referring to Figure 8-124. l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type. On BBU 1, install optical modules of the same type as those on BBU 0. l You need to connect the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cable to BBU 0, and the end labeled 1A and 1B on the fiber optical cable to BBU 1. l The TX and RX ports on BBU 0 must be connected to the TX and RX ports on BBU 1, respectively.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


445




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


446





8.7.6 Installing the Monitoring Signal Cables in a DBS3900 Expanded from 1 TMC11H to 2 TMC11Hs This section describes the procedure for installing monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from one TMC11H to two TMC11Hs.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


447



Context NOTE

l When a base station is configured with one TMC11H, one monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite. l If this base station is expanded to two TMC11Hs, as shown in Figure 8-125, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite. l A triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, and the second BBU is installed in the TMC11H.

Figure 8-125 One TMC11H expanded to Two TMC11Hs



2.


Figure 8-126 Installing the monitoring signal cable in one TMC11H

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


448



Step 2 If this base station is expanded to two TMC11Hs, another CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable must be installed, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the added TMC11H.

2.

Connect the other end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the original TMC11H.

Figure 8-127 Installing the monitoring signal cable in a base station configured two TMC11Hs




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the BBU alarm cable to the EXT-ALM0/EXTALM1 port on the UPEU in the BBU. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

449



2.

Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable to the external alarm device. Figure 8-128 Installing the BBU alarm cable


8.7.8 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables CPRI fiber optic cables transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RRUs.

Context NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


450




Remove the dustproof cap from the CPRI port on the GTMU, UBRI, WBBP, UBBP or LBBP in the BBU.

2.


3.


4.


5.




Step 2 Install fiber optic cables on the BBU side, as shown in Figure 8-131 and Figure 8-132. 1.

Remove the dustproof cap from the connectors at the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cables.

2.

Insert the connectors into the optical module in the BBU.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


451




Step 3 Route the CPRI fiber optic cables along the left side of the cabinet through the cable bag on the bottom left side of the cabinet, and to the corresponding RRUs. Step 4 Install the same type of optical modules in both the RRU and BBU sides and insert the end labeled 1A and 1B on the fiber optic cables to the optical module in the RRU side. For details about how to install the optical modules and CPRI fiber optic cables on the RRU side, see the related RRU installation guide.

NOTICE l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type. l When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout cables on the BBU side and on the RRU side are 0.34 m (13.386 in.) and 0.03 m (1.181 in.), respectively. l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX and RX ports on the BBU must be connected to the TX and RX ports on the RF module, respectively. Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label. ----End

8.8 Installation Checklist After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation environment, and cable-related items. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


452




Item

1


2


3


4


5


6



Item

1


2


3



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1



453



No.

Item

2


3


4


5


6


7


8


9


10


11


12


13



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3



454



No.

Item

4


5


6


7


8




Prerequisites l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


455



Context



Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker

TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B or DCDU-03C

l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the DCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control the power input to the RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fan assembly, and customer transmission equipment.) l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the DCDU-03C (The circuit breakers control the power input to the BBU, fan assembly, and customer transmission equipment.)

TMC11H (Ver.C)


l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the DCDU-11B (SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers control the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5, BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA/EMUB, and FAN 02B. The SW9 circuit breaker is reserved.) l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the DCDU-11C (SW0 to SW5 circuit breakers control the power input to the transmission equipment. SW6 to SW9 circuit breakers control the power input to BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA/EMUB, and FAN 02B.)

TMC11H (Ver.D)


-

NOTE

(1) In this section, a DCDU of any model is shortened to DCDU.

Power-on check process The following figure shows the power-on check process.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


456




Procedure Step 1 Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit. Step 2 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the TMC11H. Step 3 Optional: Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on the DCDU in the TMC11H to ON. Skip this step if there is no circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as the DCDU-12B and DCDU-12C. Step 4 Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON. Step 5 Check the power supply to each component according to the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


457




Table 8-26 Normal power supply status of each component Cabinet

Component


TMC11H

Fan assembly


-



RRU



Handling Measure





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


458



Failure Type

Handling Measure



----End



Procedure l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


459




l


Use a baffle plate to block the redundant space in the cable hole and tighten the two screws and two butterfly nuts on each baffle plate to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 8-136 Sealing the cable holes on the base


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)




460



2.




(1) Fireproof mud

3. l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)




461





2.





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


462




(1) Fireproof mud

3. l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)





2.



463





(2) Baffle plate


----End



Color

Huawei Code

International Code

Cabinet

RAL7035

YB026

RAL7035

Base

3010 light gray

YB030

Pantone 422U



464







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


465





----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


466

9 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.C)


9

Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.C)

About This Chapter This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor AC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.C). 9.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing cabinets. The clearances are retained for cable layout and future maintenance. 9.2 Installation Process The DBS3900 installation process includes installing cabinets, installing components in the cabinets, installing cables, installation check, power-on check, and subsequent operations. 9.3 Installing a Cabinet This section describes the procedures for installing the cabinet on a concrete floor. pole, and wall. This document uses the APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet as an example.The installation procedures are the same for the APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C)/ TMC11H (Ver.C) and the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinet. 9.4 Configuring the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable for a Cabinet A PGND cable connects PGND screws on a cabinet and an external ground bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets. 9.5 Installing Mandatory Components This chapter provides the reference for installing mandatory components in a DBS3900. 9.6 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables This chapter describes procedures for installing the optional modules and their cables onsite. 9.7 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


467




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


468






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


469






NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


470





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


471





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


472






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


473








474






2.



(1) Wall

3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


475





(1) M12x60 bolts

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


476





2.





2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


477




(1) Level

(2) Spacer




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


478






2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


479




----End


Context l


l



l




480






l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



481









Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


482





Procedure Step 1 Install the lower cabinet on the base. For detailed operations, see Installing the Cabinet on a Base. Step 2 Remove the cover plates from the cable holes at the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following figure. Figure 9-20 Removing the cover plates from the cable holes


Step 4 Stack the cabinets and ensure that the installation holes on the upper cabinet are aligned with the installation holes on the lower cabinet, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


483






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


484





----End


Context l


l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


485






(3) Pole

(4) Bolt

(5) Spring washer

(6) Flat washer



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


486




(1) Bar



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



487








488




(1) Flat washer

(2) Spring washer

(3) Nut



Context l


l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


489




(1) Anchor points






3.


4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


490




(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube


(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


491





(1) Bar


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



492




l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


493






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


494







l


l


The following table lists the specifications of PGND cables and equipotential cables in the APM30H series cabinets. Table 9-1 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cable



Color

PGND cable



Green and yellow









495



Cable



Color




Green and yellow








NOTE




2.




2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


496





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


497





(2) PGND cable



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


498






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



499








2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


500









Context l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


501




l




l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



502





l



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



503




l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



504




2.


3.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



505







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


506




----End





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


507





----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


508




Context l


l

Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks


RJ45 connector

RJ45 connector



Bare wire


-



Then...


Go toStep 2.


Go toStep 3.



2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


509









2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


510







2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


511




NOTE





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


512








Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Universal




513








2.


3.


4.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


514







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


515





(2) SOU

(1) AC heater




516



If...

Then...


Perform Step 2.1


Perform Step 2.2

1.



b.


c.


d.



2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



b.


c.


d.


517







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


518





Context l


l


Color

One End

The Other End

RTN(+) wire

Black

EPC4 connector

Cord end terminal

NEG(-) wire


RJ45 connector


l

Black



Then...


Go toStep 2.


Go toStep 3.



2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


519









Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


520







2.





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


521





Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) -


DBS3900




BTS3900A (Ver.B)

-

EPS 01A or EPS 01C

BTS3900A (Ver.C)

-


DBS3900


EPS 01B or EPS 01D






2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Base Station


Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.B)

-

EPS 01A or EPS 01C


DBS3900


EPS 01B or EPS 01D

BTS3900A (Ver.C)

-


DBS3900





522



Base Station


Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) -



DBS3900




3.


4.




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


523




3.


4.


----End




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


524






2.


3.


4.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


525




(1) Satellite card



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


526





(2) Support




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


527




(1) BBU

(2) GPS support





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


528





9.6.6 Installing the Storage Batteries When an outdoor base station requires the long-term backup power, you need to install storage batteries and the power cables for the storage batteries in an IBBS200T or IBBS200D.

Prerequisites Before installing the storage battery, please check if the voltage of the storage battery is normal. l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


529



Context

DANGER l During the installation, avoid any contact between the exposed metal conductors in the power cables and the metal housing of the cabinet. l During the installation, avoid short circuits or reverse connections between the positive and negative poles of the storage batteries. l Insulate all tools used for installation to avoid burning of storage batteries and to ensure personal safety.

Procedure Step 1 Check that the input and output circuit breakers for the storage batteries have been turned off. If the circuit breakers are turned on, an excessively large current may occur. 1.

Check that the BAT circuit breaker on the EPU or EPS in the APM30H is set to OFF, as shown in the following figure. Figure 9-89 Input circuit breaker for the storage batteries

2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Check that the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breaker on the power distribution box for the storage batteries is set to OFF, as shown in the following figure.


530



Figure 9-90 Output circuit breakers for the storage batteries

Step 2 Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown in the following figure. NOTE



Step 3 Secure the baffle plate, as shown in the following figure. 1. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Loosen the three M4 screws on the baffle plate. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

531



2.

Move the baffle plate upward until it touches the screws.

3.

Tighten the three screws to secure the baffle plate until the tightening torque reaches 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Figure 9-92 Securing the baffle plate

(1) Baffle plate


Remove the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries.

2.

Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring storage batteries.

3.

Connect negative power cables and then positive power cables for the storage batteries. The black cable is the power cable for the negative pole, and the red cable is the power cable for the positive pole. Tighten the screws on the connectors to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


532



Figure 9-93 Installing the power cables for the storage batteries

The following figure shows the routing of power cables in the battery cabinet. Figure 9-94 Routing of power cables for the storage batteries

----End

9.7 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


533







l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l




l


l




l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


534



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l


l




l






The following figure shows the cables secured on a cable tray. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


535




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


536




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


537



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


538



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


539





l


l


l


9.7.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules During cable installation, you must route the cables through the left and the right cable outlet modules at the bottom of the cabinet for effective sealing.

Context Two cable outlet modules are located on the bottom left and bottom right of the APM30H, TMC11H, and IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


540


9 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.C) NOTE

l This section uses the TMC11H as an example. Cable outlet modules are the same in the APM30H, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T. l When two IBBS200Ds or two IBBS200Ts are stacked, you do not need to install cable outlet modules in the upper IBBS.

Figure 9-103 Cable outlet modules in the TMC11H

The following figure shows the cable outlet modules in the TMC11H. NOTE

l The cable hole through which a cable is routed depends on the onsite requirements. l The following figure shows the recommended routing method. In this figure, cable holes with different colors have different sizes, and cable holes with the same color have the same size. Cables not described in the following table are routed through the vacant cable holes that match the cables.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


541




(1) Cable hole for the 220 V single-phase AC input power (8) Cable hole for the AC output power cable cable, 110 V dual-live-wire AC input power cable, 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) external DC input power cable, or 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) external DC input power cable (2) Cable hole for the GPS jumper

(9) Cable hole for the DC output power cable

(3) Cable hole for the PGND cable

(10) Cable holes for the fiber optic cables

(4) Cable hole for the equipotential cable between cabinets

(11) Cable hole for the Boolean alarm cable, RS485 signal cable, or the E1/T1 cable

(5) Cable hole for the E1/T1 cable


(6) Cable hole for the fiber optic cable

(13) Cable hole for the power cable for storage batteries

(7) Cable hole for the 220 V three-phase AC input power (14) Cable hole for the RRU power cable cable, 220 V single-phase AC input power cable, 110 V dual-live-wire AC input power cable, or 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) external DC input power cable

NOTE

The following figure shows two cable types for No. 7 cable hole: l When the rubber plug (green in the figure) in the hole is removed, the cable size ranges from 15.0 mm (0.59 in.) to 19.0 mm (0.75 in). l When the rubber plug (green in the figure) in the hole is reserved, the cable size ranges from 11.0 mm (0.43 in.) to 15.0 mm (0.59 in.).

Procedure Step 1 Route cables with different cross-sectional areas through the cable outlet modules based on the apertures of the holes in the modules, and then insert the cable outlet modules into the cable holes of the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


542



NOTICE Route each cable through a hole whose aperture matches the cross-sectional area of the cable, as shown in Figure 9-105. Figure 9-105 Routing cables through the cable outlet module

Step 2 Use rubber plugs to seal all vacant cable holes. Step 3 Tighten the bolt in the front of the cable outlet module, secure the cable outlet module, and ensure that all the holes in the cable outlet module are sealed. ----End


Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H In an APM30H (Ver.B), the input power cables for the APM30H refer to EPS 01B or EPS 01D power cables. The cables feed power into the EPS 01B or EPS 01D in the APM30H (Ver.B) from the external power equipment. In an APM30H (Ver.C), the input power cables for the APM30H refer to EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 power cables. The cables feed power into the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 in the APM30H (Ver.C) from the external power equipment.

Prerequisites l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

l

The PGND cable for the cabinet has been installed.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


543



Context The following table lists the specifications of the input power cables for the APM30H. Table 9-6 Specifications of the input power cables for the APM30H Cabinet Type

Cable

Color

One End

The Other End

APM30H (Ver.B)

EPS 01B or EPS 01D power cables in a 220 V AC threephase scenario

L1

Brown

L2

Black

OT terminal (M6, 2.5 mm2 or 0.004 in. 2)

L3

Gray


N

Blue

L

Brown

N

Blue

EPS 01B or EPS 01D power cables in a 110 V AC dual-livewire scenario

L1

Black

L2

Red

N

White


L1

Brown

L2

Black

L3

Gray

N

Blue


L

Brown

N

Blue

EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 power cables in a 110 V dual-live-wire scenario

L1

Black

L2

Red

N

White

EPS 01B or EPS 01D power cables in a 220 V AC singlephase scenario

APM30H (Ver.C)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


OT terminal (M6, 6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2 (6AWG))





544



l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l Determine whether to install a polyethylene (PE) wire based on local regulations. l The following description uses the APM30H (Ver.C) as an example. The procedures are the same for installing input power cables in the APM30H (Ver.B).

Procedure Step 1 Install the power cable, as shown in Figure 9-106, Figure 9-107, and Figure 9-108. 1.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the upper and lower M4 screws from the AC baffle plate, and remove the AC baffle plate.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover for the AC input terminals, and open the protective cover.

3.

Optional: Remove the short-circuiting bar on the L1, L2, and L3 input terminals. If 220 V single-phase or 110 V dual-live wire power is supplied, skip this step.

4.

Route the cable into the cabinet along the inner left side of the cabinet, and connect each wire of the cable to the corresponding terminal, and tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

5.

Reinstall the protective cover for the AC input terminal, and tighten the screws to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

6.

Reinstall the AC baffle plate, and tighten the screws to 0.4 N·m (3.54 lbf·in.).

Figure 9-106 Installing the input power cables for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V AC three-phase)

(1) AC baffle plate

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Terminal box



(4) PE terminal

545



Figure 9-107 Installing the input power cables for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V AC single-phase)

(1) AC baffle plate

(2) Terminal box


(4) PE terminal

Figure 9-108 Installing the input power cables for the APM30H on the EPU side (110 V AC dual-live-wire)

(1) AC baffle plate

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Terminal box


546




Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H Power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H consist of the DCDU power cables and the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H. The power cables feed power from the APM30H into the TMC11H. The power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H are optional. They are delivered with the TMC11H and used when the TMC11H serves as a transmission cabinet.

Prerequisites l


l


Context In a TMC11H (Ver.B) used as a transmission cabinet, a DCDU-03C is configured. In a TMC11H (Ver.C) used as a transmission cabinet, a DCDU-11C is configured. The power cables from the APM30H (Ver.B) to the TMC11H and the power cables from the APM30H (Ver.C) to the TMC11H have the same specifications. The following table lists the specifications of the power cables. Table 9-7 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H Cabinet Type

Cable

APM30H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03C power cables

APM30H (Ver.C)

APM30H (Ver.B)/ APM30H (Ver.C) Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


Power cables for the AC junction box

Color

One End

The Other End

RTN (+)

Black

NEG (-)

Blue


OT terminal (M6, 4 mm2 or 0.006 in. 2)

RTN (+)

Black

NEG (-)

Blue

L

Brown

OT terminal (M4, OT terminal (M4, 1.5 mm2 or 0.002 1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.2) in.2)


547



Cabinet Type

Cable in the TMC11H

Color N

One End

The Other End

Blue

NOTE

l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l The method of installing DCDU-11C power cables is the same as the method of installing DCDU-03C power cables (which are shortened to DCDU power cables). The following figures use an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.

Procedure Step 1 Prepare the DCDU power cables and the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H. 1.


2.

Install connectors to both ends of the cable, as shown in the following table. Cable


DCDU power cable

See Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the ToolLess Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(1).



Step 2 Install the DCDU power cables, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect the end of the power cable with OT terminals to the DC input terminals on the DCDU in the TMC11H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the end of the power cable with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the TMC port on the EPS or EPU in the APM30H.

4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


548



Figure 9-109 Installing the DCDU power cables



2.

Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the L and N terminals in the AC junction box in the TMC11H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals to the L3 and N3 terminals in the AC junction box in the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


549





Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (APM:IBBS = 1:1) Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T are as follows: power cables for the IBBS200D, power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D, power cables for the IBBS200T, and power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T. The power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T are optional. They are delivered with the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. The heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D may need to be installed according to the onsite situation.

Prerequisites l


l


Context The following table lists the specifications of power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


550



Table 9-8 Specifications of power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T Cable

Color

One End

The Other End

Power series 120 connector




Power cables for an IBBS200D/ IBBS200T (Ver.B)

RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black

Power cables for an IBBS200D/ IBBS200T (Ver.C)

RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black

The following table lists the specifications of the power cable for the fan, power cable for the TEC, and heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) and IBBS200D/ IBBS200T (Ver.C). Table 9-9 Specifications of the power cable for the fan, power cable for the TEC, and heatingfilm power cable Cable

Color

One End

The Other End







Power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D

RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue

Power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T

RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue

(Optional) Heating-film power cable in an IBBS200D

L

Brown

N

Blue

NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Prepare the following cables: power cables for an IBBS200D, power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D, heating-film power cable in an IBBS200D, power cables for an IBBS200T, and power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T. 1. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

551



2.

Add new connectors to both ends of the cable. Cable



See Assembling the Power Series 120 Connector and the Power Cable and Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.




See Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable (1).



Step 2 Install the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. 1.

Connect the red and black wires at one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled BAT on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T below the APM30H.

2.

Connect the other end of the power cable to the battery cabinet power terminal on the inner right wall of the APM30H, as shown in the following figure. The other end of the power cable has a 120 series connector in an APM30H (Ver.B) or a 175 series connector in an APM30H (Ver.C). NOTE

The method of installing power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) is the same as the method of installing power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C). The following figure uses an IBBS200D/ IBBS200T (Ver.C) as an example.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


552



Figure 9-111 Installing the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C)

(1) Power terminal for the battery cabinet

(2) Power distribution box (3) Wiring terminals in the (4) Wiring terminals in the in the battery cabinet upper part of the power lower part of the power distribution box distribution box

Step 3 Install the power cable for a fan in the IBBS200D. NOTE

The method of installing the power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T is the same as the method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D. This section describes the method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D as an example.

1.

Connect the black and blue wires at one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled TEC/FAN on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D below the APM30H.

2.

Connect the other end of the power cable with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the LOAD3 port on the EPS or EPU in the APM30H, as shown in Figure 9-112 or Figure 9-113.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


553



Figure 9-112 Installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)

(1) Tool-less female (2) Power distribution box (3) Wiring terminals in the (4) Wiring terminals in the connector (pressfit type) in the battery cabinet upper part of the power lower part of the power distribution box distribution box

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


554



Figure 9-113 Installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)


Step 4 Optional: Install the heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D.

CAUTION When installing the heating-film power cable in the AC junction box of the IBBS200D, do not connect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 9-114. l Do not expose the wires of the heating-film power cable outside the heating-film AC junction box. l The heating-film power cable must be routed into the heating-film AC junction box from the top, not from the bottom.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


555



Figure 9-114 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cable in the heating-film AC junction box in the IBBS200D

1.

Connect the brown and blue wires at one end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L and N wiring terminals in the heating-film AC junction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D below the APM30H.

2.

Connect the brown and blue wires at the other end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L2 and N2 wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H. Figure 9-115 Installing the heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D

(1) AC junction box in the power cabinet


Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


556




Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (APM:IBBS = 1:2) Power cables from an APM30H to an IBBS200D/IBBS200T feed power from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T and provide power to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T and devices in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. The power cables include the power cables for the IBBS200D/ IBBS200T, power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D, power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, and TEC power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ts.

Prerequisites l


l


Context The power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T are optional. They are delivered with the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. The heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D may need to be installed according to the onsite situation. The following table lists the specifications of the power cables an the IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) or IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C) and power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts (Ver.B) or IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.C). Table 9-10 Specifications of the power cables for cabinets and power cables between cascaded cabinets Cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Color

One End

The Other End








RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black


RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black

Power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/

RTN(+)

Red


557



Cable

Color

IBBS200Ts (Ver.B)

NEG(-)

Black

Power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts (Ver.C)

RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black

One End

The Other End



The following table lists the specifications of the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.B) or (Ver.C), fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.B) or (Ver.C), heating-film power cable in an IBBS200D (Ver.B) or (Ver.C), and power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T (Ver.B) or (Ver.C). The power cables in the IBBS200D (Ver.B) have the same specifications as those in IBBS200D (Ver.C). The power cables in the IBBS200T (Ver.B) have the same specifications as those in the IBBS200T (Ver.C). Table 9-11 Specifications of the power cable for the fan, fan power cable between cascaded cabinets, and heating-film power cable Cable

Color

One End

The Other End










RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue


RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue

Fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds

RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue


L

Brown

N

Blue

NOTE


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


558



Procedure Step 1 Prepare the following cables: power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T, power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D, fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds, heating-film power cable in an IBBS200D, and power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T. 1.


2.











Power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.B)/(Ver.C), fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.B)/(Ver.C), and heating-film power cable in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)/(Ver.C)


Step 2 Install the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T and power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts. 1.

Install the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Connect the red and black wires at one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring terminals labeled BAT on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T below the APM30H, and the other end with a 120 or 175 series connector to the battery cabinet power terminals on the inner right wall of the APM30H, as shown in Figure 9-116. The power cable uses a 120 series connector in an APM30H (Ver.B) or a 175 series connector in an APM30H (Ver.C).

2.

Install the power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts. Connect the red and black wires at both ends of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring terminals labeled BAT in the lower part of the power distribution box in the two IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, as shown in Figure 9-116.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


559



The method of installing power cables an the IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) is the same as the method of installing power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C). The method of installing the power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.B) is the same as the method of installing the power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.C). The following figure uses an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C) as an example.

Figure 9-116 Installing the power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C) and power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.C)

(1) Power terminal for (2) Power distribution box (3) Wiring terminals in the (4) Wiring terminals in the the battery cabinet in the battery cabinet upper part of the power lower part of the power distribution box distribution box

Step 3 Install the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D and fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds. 1.

Install the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D. Connect the black and blue wires at one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring terminals labeled TEC/FAN in the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS200D below the APM30H, and the other end with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the LOAD3 port on the EPU or EPS in the APM30H, as shown in Figure 9-117.

2.

Install the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds. Connect the black and blue wires at both ends of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


560



terminals labeled TEC/FAN in the lower part of the power distribution box in the two IBBS200Ds, as shown in Figure 9-117. NOTE

l The method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) is the same as the method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.C). The method of installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.B) is the same as the method of installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.C). The following figure uses an IBBS200D (Ver.C) as an example. l The method of installing the power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T is the same as the method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D. This section describes the method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D as an example. l When the number of IBBS cabinets is twice the number of APM cabinets but a TEC power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ts is unavailable, a power cable needs to be installed for the TEC in the second IBBS200T. The installation method is as follows: Connect the black and blue wires at one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring terminals labeled TEC/FAN in the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS200D below the APM30H, and the other end with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the LOAD2 port on the EPU or EPS in the APM30H.

Figure 9-117 Installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.C) and fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.C)

(1) Tool-less female (2) Power distribution (3) Wiring terminals in connector (pressfit type) box in the battery cabinet the upper part of the power distribution box

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


(4) Wiring terminals in the lower part of the power distribution box

561



Step 4 Optional: Install the heating-film power cables in the IBBS200Ds.

CAUTION When installing the heating-film power cables in the AC junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do not connect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 9-118. l Do not expose the wires of the heating-film power cables outside the heating-film AC junction boxes. l The heating-film power cables must be routed into the heating-film AC junction boxes from the top, not from the bottom.

Figure 9-118 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cables in the heating-film AC junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds

1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Connect the brown and blue wires at one end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L2 and N2 wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H, and the brown and blue wires at the other end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L and N wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D below the APM30H.


562





2.


Install the heating-film power cable in the second IBBS200D. Connect the brown and blue wires at one end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L1 and N1 wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H, and the brown and blue wires at the other end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L and N wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D below the APM30H, as shown in Figure 9-119.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


563



Installing BBU Power Cables The BBU power cable in the APM30H feeds power from the EPU or EPS into the BBU.

Prerequisites l


l



Power Equipme nt

Cable

APM30H (Ver.B)

EPS 01B/ 01D

BBU power cable

APM30H (Ver.C)

EPU03A03/05

Color

One End

The Other End

RT N (+)

Black

3V3 connector


NE G (-)

Blue

NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Add a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the BBU power cable. For details, see Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(1). Step 2 Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port on the UPEU in the BBU. Then tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.). Step 3 Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD1 port on the EPS in the APM30H (Ver.B) or the BBU_0 port on the EPU in the APM30H (Ver.C).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


564



l Connect the blue wire in the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the left part of the port on the EPS or the upper part of the port on the EPU, and the black wire in the connector to the right part of the port on the EPS or the lower part of the port on the EPU. l When the BBU is configured with two UPEUs, each UPEU must be connected to the power equipment by using a BBU power cable. Connect the end of the second BBU power cable with a 3V3 connector to the -48V port on the second UPEU, and the end with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the LOAD2 port on the EPS or the BBU_1 port on the EPU.

Figure 9-120 Installing a BBU power cable in the APM30H (Ver.B)

Figure 9-121 Installing a BBU power cable in the APM30H (Ver.C)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


565




Installing RRU Power Cables This section describes the procedure for installing an RRU power cable that feeds power into an RRU from the power equipment in the APM30H.

Prerequisites l


l


Context The following table lists the specifications of an RRU power cable. Table 9-13 Specifications of an RRU power cable Cabinet Type

Power Equip ment

Cable

APM30H (Ver.B)

EPS

RRU power cable

RT N (+)

Color

One End

The Other End

Black (complying with the North American standard)



Brown (complying with the European standard)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

APM30H (Ver.C)

EPU

APM30H (Ver.B) (+24 V)

DCDU03B

RRU power cable (comply ing with the North Americ an

NE G(-)

Blue

RT N (+)

Black



566



Cabinet Type

Power Equip ment

Cable

Color

standar d)

NE G(-)

Blue

RRU power cable (comply ing with the Europea n standar d)

RT N (+)

Brown

NE G(-)

Blue

One End

The Other End


NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Route an RRU power cable into the cabinet through a cable outlet module. Step 2 Strip 500 mm (19.69 in.) long jacket and shield layer off the RRU power cable from one end. Step 3 In a position 200 mm (7.87 in.) away from the cable outlet module, strip the jacket for about 40 mm (1.57 in.) off the RRU power cable to expose the shield layer. Thread the cable through the ground clip to ensure full contact between the shield layer and the ground clip, and then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 9-123.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


567


9 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.C) NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


568




Step 4 Cut the RRU power cable to a proper length and add a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side, as described in the following table.

NOTICE When preparing a power cable, cut the power cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route. Power Equipment


EPS

See Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(1).

DCDU-03B


EPU


Step 5 Install the RRU power cables. 1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the RRU side to the power port on the RRU. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

569



2.

Install a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side, as described in the following table. Power Equipment


EPS

Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the power cable to one of the RRU0 to RRU5 ports on the EPS, as shown in Figure 9-124.

DCDU-03B

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the blue and black/brown wires of the power cable to the NEG(-) and RTN(+) parts in one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 terminals on the DCDU-03B, then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 9-125.

EPU

Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the power cable to one of the RRU0 to RRU5 ports on the EPU, as shown in Figure 9-126.

Figure 9-124 Installing an RRU power cable (when the EPS supplies power)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


570




Figure 9-126 Installing an RRU power cable (when the EPU supplies power)



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


571




Context l


l



Step 2 Connect the DB25 connectors at the other end of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable to the INSIDE ports on the UELP in the SLPU, and then tighten the plastic screws on the connectors to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.), as shown in the preceding figure. Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 9.7.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


572




Prerequisites


Context l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


573



Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cabinet through the cable bag on the bottom left of the cabinet, and then connect the cable to the external transmission equipment. Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 9.7.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End


Context l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


574



Step 2 Connect the other end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to the FE0 or FE1 port near the INSIDE on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 9-129. Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 9.7.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End


Context l


l


l


l




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


575





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


576




Step 4 Connect the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the external transmission equipment. Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 9.7.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End


Context l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


577



l


l


l





2.


3.


4.


5.






578



1.


2.


3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


579





Scenario: 1 APM30H Expanded to 2 APM30Hs This section describes the procedure for installing monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from one APM30H to two APM30Hs.

Context l


l

If this base station is expanded to two APM30Hs, as shown in the following figure, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.

l

A triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, and the second BBU is installed in the APM30H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function. For the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).

Figure 9-136 One APM30H expanded to two APM30Hs

Procedure Step 1 Install a CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable in an APM30H, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


580



Figure 9-137 Installing the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable in the APM30H

Step 2 Optional: If this base station is expanded to two APM30Hs, another CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable must be installed between the two APM30Hs, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the original APM30H.

2.

Connect the other end of the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE in the added APM30H. Figure 9-138 Installing the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable between two APM30Hs

Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind them.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


581



Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole on the cabinet. Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End

Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T Expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts This section describes the procedures for installing the monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.

Context l

When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T, two monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l

If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, as shown in the following figure, two additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l


Figure 9-139 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


582





2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU. Figure 9-140 Installing the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable in the APM30H

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE on the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


583




Step 3 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, two additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite. 1.

Install a CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable between the original APM30H and the added APM30H. Connect one end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the original APM30H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the fan assembly in the added APM30H.

2.

Install a monitoring signal cable between the added APM30H and the IBBS200D or IBBS200T below the added APM30H. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE on the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the added APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


584



Figure 9-142 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


585



Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts Expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts This section describes the procedures for installing the monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.

Context l

When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, three monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l

If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, as shown in the following figure, three additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l


Figure 9-143 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts



2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


586



Figure 9-144 Installing the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable in the APM30H

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEs in the two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


587



Figure 9-145 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEs



2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


588




Step 4 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, three additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEs in the two added IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUE on the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T below the added APM30H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE on the door of the other added IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

3.

Install a CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable between the original APM30H and the added APM30H. Connect one end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the original APM30H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE in the added APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


589



Figure 9-147 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts


Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H This section describes the procedures for installing the monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


590



Context l

When a base station is configured with one APM30H and one TMC11H, two monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l

If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H, as shown in the following figure, an additional monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.

l


Figure 9-148 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H



2.


Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and TMC11H, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE in the fan assembly of the TMC11H. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

591



2.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU. Figure 9-150 Installing a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and TMC11H

Step 3 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H, another monitoring signal cable connecting the TMC11H and the added APM30H must be installed. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUE in the fan assembly of the TMC11H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE in the fan assembly of the added APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


592



Figure 9-151 Installing a monitoring signal cable between the TMC11H and the added APM30H


Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 APM30Hs +2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H This section describes the procedures for installing the monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.

Context l

When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H, three monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l

If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, as shown in the following figure, two additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l

A triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, and the second BBU is installed in the APM30H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function. For the

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


593



monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). Figure 9-152 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H



2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE on the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

594



2.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H. Figure 9-154 Installing a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and the IBBS200D or IBBS200T


Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE in the fan assembly of the TMC11H.

2.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


595



Figure 9-155 Installing a monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and TMC11H

Step 4 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, two additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Install a monitoring signal cable between the TMC11H and the added APM30H. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUE in the fan assembly of the TMC11H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE in the fan assembly of the added APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


596



Figure 9-156 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H


Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H This section describes the procedures for installing the monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


597



Context l

When a site is configured with 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, four monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l

If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, as shown in the following figure, three additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l


Figure 9-157 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H

Procedure Step 1 Install a CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable in an APM30H, as shown in the following figure. 1. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

598



2.




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


599



Figure 9-159 Installing the monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and the IBBS200D or IBBS200T

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEs in the two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


600



Figure 9-160 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEs


Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE in the fan assembly of the TMC11H.

2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


601



Figure 9-161 Installing the monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and TMC11H

Step 5 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, three additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Install a monitoring signal cable between the cascaded CMUEs in the two added IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUE on the door of one added IBBS200D or IBBS200T below the added APM30H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE on the door of the other added IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

3.

Install a monitoring signal cable between the TMC11H and the added APM30H. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUE in the fan assembly of the TMC11H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE in the fan assembly of the added APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


602






Prerequisites l


l

Optical modules, fiber optic cables, and electrical cables meeting the following requirements are available:

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


603



– The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type. – The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s. – The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable. NOTE



(2) Wavelength

(1) Maximum rate




BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT

M0 port on the UCIU


M1 port on the UCIU




CI port on the UMPT

CI port on the UMPT

UMPT+UMPT



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


604






2.


3.






1. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


605



2.




2.


l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type. On BBU 1, install optical modules of the same type as those on BBU 0. l You need to connect the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cable to BBU 0, and the end labeled 1A and 1B on the fiber optical cable to BBU 1. l The TX and RX ports on BBU 0 must be connected to the TX and RX ports on BBU 1, respectively.

Figure 9-166 Installing the inter-BBU signal cables




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


606



2.




Context NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


607



Procedure Step 1 Install optical modules in the BBU side, as shown in Figure 9-168 and Figure 9-169. 1.

Remove the dustproof caps from the CPRI ports on the GTMU, UBRI, WBBP, UBBP or LBBP in the BBU.

2.


3.


4.

Insert the optical module into a CPRI port on the GTMU, UBRI, WBBP, UBBP or LBBP.

5.




Step 2 Install CPRI fiber optic cables, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the dustproof cap from the connectors on the fiber optic cables.

2.

Insert the DLC connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the CPRI fiber optic cables into the optical module in the GTMU, WBBP, or LBBP, and then insert the DLC connectors labeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical module in the RF module.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


608



NOTICE l When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout cables on the BBU side and on the RRU side are 0.34 m (13.386 in.) and 0.03 m (1.181 in.), respectively. l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX and RX ports on the BBU must be connected to the TX and RX ports on the RF module, respectively. l The fiber optical cables in an IMB03 need be routed and bound along the right side of the IMB for easy maintenance of the fan in the future. l When an IMB03 is installed on a wall, the fiber optical cables out of the IMB03 should be routed with the bending radius of equal to or greater than 140 mm (5.512 in.).





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1

The installation position of the cabinet strictly complies with the engineering design. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

609



No.

Item

2


3


4


5


6



Item

1


2


3



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5

The bare wires and the terminal handles at the wiring terminals are coated with heat shrink tubing. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

610



No.

Item

6


7


8


9


10


11


12


13



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7



611



No.

Item

8




Prerequisites l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


612



Context



Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


613



Cabinet

Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker




NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


614






615






Component


APM30H

PMU


PSU


Fan assembly


Battery cabinet






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


616




Componen t


APM30H or TMC11H

BBU


-


RRU


NOTE



Handling Measure



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


617



Failure Type

Handling Measure





----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


618



9.10.1 Seal the Cable Holes on the Base. After all cables are installed, seal all cable holes on the base.

Procedure Step 1 Use cover plates to block the cable holes and tighten the two screws on each cover plate, as shown in the following figure. Figure 9-173 Sealing the cable holes on the base




Step 2 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable holes on the base, as shown in the following figure. Figure 9-174 Using fireproof mud to seal the cable holes on the base

(1) Fireproof mud

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



619



Fireproof mud is used only for sealing cable holes on the base. Do not use fireproof mud to seal any cable hole in the cabinet.

Step 3 Tighten the three screws on the baffle plate in front of the base and close the baffle plate. ----End



Color

Huawei Code

International Code

Cabinet

RAL7035

YB026

RAL7035

Base

3010 light gray

YB030

Pantone 422U

Procedure Step 1 If the area where the paint is damaged is dirty or the material is rusted, slightly rub the area with sandpaper to remove the dirt or rust, as shown in the following figure. Figure 9-175 Rubbing the damaged area with sandpaper

Step 2 Use anhydrous alcohol to dampen a cloth and use the wet cloth to remove dirt or dust from the rubbed area or the area to be repaired. Then dry the area with another clean cloth, as shown in the following figures.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


620



Figure 9-176 Cleaning the damaged area with anhydrous alcohol


NOTICE The paint coating should be as thin as possible. No drops are allowed on the paint coating, and the surface should be smooth.

Figure 9-177 Repaint the damaged paint coating of the cabinet



----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


621

10 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.C) Supplies Power to RRUs


10


Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.C) Supplies Power to RRUs

About This Chapter This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an indoor DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed indoors and an APM30H (Ver.C) supplies power to RRUs. 10.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing cabinets. The clearances are retained for cable layout and future maintenance. 10.2 Installation Process The DBS3900 installation process includes installing cabinets, installing components in the cabinets, installing cables, installation check, power-on check, and subsequent operations. 10.3 Installing a Cabinet This section describes the procedures for installing the cabinet on a concrete floor. pole, and wall. This document uses the APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet as an example.The installation procedures are the same for the APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C)/ TMC11H (Ver.C) and the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinet. 10.4 Installing a PGND Cable A PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. 10.5 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit When the RRU monitors the devices in the cabinet as a monitoring unit, you need to install the SLPU as a monitoring signal protection unit. 10.6 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. 10.7 Installation Checklist Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


622




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


623






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


624






NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


625





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


626





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


627






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


628








629






2.



(1) Wall

3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


630





(1) M12x60 bolts

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


631





2.





2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


632




(1) Level

(2) Spacer




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


633






2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


634




----End


Context l


l



l




635






l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



636









Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


637




Context l


l






(3) Pole

(4) Bolt

(5) Spring washer

(6) Flat washer


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


638





(1) Bar


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



639




l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


640






(1) Flat washer

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Spring washer


(3) Nut

641





Context l


l




(1) Anchor points




642



1.




3.


4.



(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


643




(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


644




(1) Bar



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



645







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


646








Color

PGND cable


Green and yellow



647





Color

PGND cable





Color

PGND cable



NOTE




2.




2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


648








Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


649





2.


3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


650



----End






l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

When routing cables, avoid sharp objects, for example sharp edges on the wall. If necessary, use tubes to protect the cables. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

651



l


l




l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l


l




l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


652








(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


653




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


654



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


655



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


656





l


l


l


10.6.2 Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H In an APM30H (Ver.B), the input power cables for the APM30H refer to EPS 01B or EPS 01D power cables. The cables feed power into the EPS 01B or EPS 01D in the APM30H (Ver.B) from the external power equipment. In an APM30H (Ver.C), the input power cables for the APM30H refer to EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 power cables. The cables feed power into the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 in the APM30H (Ver.C) from the external power equipment.

Prerequisites l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

657



l



Cable

Color

One End

The Other End

APM30H (Ver.B)


L1

Brown

L2

Black


L3

Gray


N

Blue

L

Brown

N

Blue


L1

Black

L2

Red

N

White


L1

Brown

L2

Black

L3

Gray

N

Blue


L

Brown

N

Blue


L1

Black

L2

Red

N

White


APM30H (Ver.C)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)







658






2.


3.


4.


5.


6.



(1) AC baffle plate

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Terminal box



(4) PE terminal

659




(1) AC baffle plate

(2) Terminal box


(4) PE terminal


(1) AC baffle plate

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Terminal box


660




10.6.3 Installing RRU Power Cables This section describes the procedure for installing an RRU power cable that feeds power into an RRU from the power equipment in the APM30H.

Prerequisites l


l



Power Equip ment

Cable

APM30H (Ver.B)

EPS

RRU power cable

RT N (+)

Color

One End

The Other End





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

APM30H (Ver.C)

EPU


DCDU03B

RRU power cable (comply ing with the North

NE G(-)

Blue

RT N (+)

Black



661



Cabinet Type

Power Equip ment

Cable

Color

Americ an standar d)

NE G(-)

Blue


RT N (+)

Brown

NE G(-)

Blue

One End

The Other End


NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


662


10 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.C) Supplies Power to RRUs NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


663







EPS


DCDU-03B


EPU



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


664



2.



EPS


DCDU-03B


EPU



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


665





Step 6 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 10.6.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 7 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole on the cabinet. Step 8 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label. ----End



666





OUT1

IN0


OUT1

IN0.1

TX+

IN0.2

TX-

IN0.3

RX+

IN0.4

RX-

NOTE




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


667






2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


668




Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 10.6.1 Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind them. Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole on the cabinet. Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


669





10.6.6 Installing a CMUE-SLPU Surge Protection Transfer Cable The CMUE-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable connects the CMUE and USLP2, enabling surge protection for monitoring signals.

Procedure Step 1 Install the CMUE-SLPU surge protection transfer cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the CMUE-SLPU surge protection transfer cable to the COM IN port on the CMUE.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the OUT1 port on the USLP2 in the SLPU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


670



Figure 10-59 Installing the CMUE-SLPU surge protection transfer cable

Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind it. Step 3 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole in the cabinet. Step 4 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4

The cabinet is neat and clean. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

671



No.

Item

5


6



Item

1


2


3



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8



672



No.

Item

9


10


11


12


13



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8



673





Prerequisites l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Context


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


674




Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker










NOTE




675






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


676




Component


APM30H

PMU


PSU





Battery cabinet



-

RRU



Handling Measure



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


677



Failure Type

Handling Measure





----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


678









(1) Fireproof mud

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



679







Color

Huawei Code

International Code

Cabinet

RAL7035

YB026

RAL7035

Base

3010 light gray

YB030

Pantone 422U



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


680









----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


681

11 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C)


11

Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C)

About This Chapter This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C). 11.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing cabinets. The clearances are retained for cable layout and future maintenance. 11.2 Installation Process The DBS3900 installation process includes installing cabinets, installing components in the cabinets, installing cables, installation check, power-on check, and subsequent operations. 11.3 Installing a Cabinet This section describes the procedures for installing the cabinet on a concrete floor. pole, and wall. This document uses the APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet as an example.The installation procedures are the same for the APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C)/ TMC11H (Ver.C) and the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinet. 11.4 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable A PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets. 11.5 Installing Mandatory Components This chapter provides the reference for installing mandatory components in a DBS3900. 11.6 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables This chapter describes procedures for installing the optional modules and their cables onsite. 11.7 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


682




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


683






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


684






NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


685





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


686





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


687






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


688








689






2.



(1) Wall

3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


690





(1) M12x60 bolts

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


691





2.





2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


692




(1) Level

(2) Spacer




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


693






2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


694




----End


Context l


l



l




695






l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



696









Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


697




Context l


l






(3) Pole

(4) Bolt

(5) Spring washer

(6) Flat washer


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


698





(1) Bar


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



699




l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


700






(1) Flat washer

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Spring washer


(3) Nut

701





Context l


l




(1) Anchor points




702



1.




3.


4.



(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


703




(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


704




(1) Bar



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



705







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


706







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cable


Color

PGND cable


Green and yellow

Equipotential cable



707





Color

PGND cable



Equipotential cable






Color

PGND cable



Equipotential cable



NOTE




2.




708



1.


2.






(2) PGND cable

(3) Ground busbar


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


709









Context l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


710




l




l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



711





l



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



712




l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



713




2.


3.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



714







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


715




----End





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


716





----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


717




Context l


l

Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks


RJ45 connector

RJ45 connector



Bare wire


-



Then...


Go toStep 2.


Go toStep 3.



2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


718









2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


719







2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


720




NOTE





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


721







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


722




(1) AC heater

(2) SOU



Then...


Perform Step 2.1


Perform Step 2.2

1. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Install the AC heater power cable in the APM30H. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

723



a.


b.


c.


d.



2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



b.


c.


d.


e.



724






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


725




Context l


l


Color

One End

The Other End

RTN(+) wire

Black

EPC4 connector

Cord end terminal

NEG(-) wire


RJ45 connector


l

Black



Then...


Go toStep 2.


Go toStep 3.



2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


726








Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


727







2.





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


728





Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) -

DCDU-12C

DBS3900


DCDU-12B


BTS3900A (Ver.C)

-

DCDU-11C

DBS3900


DCDU-12B

BTS3900A (Ver.B)

-

DCDU-03C

DBS3900


DCDU-03B




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) -

DCDU-12C

DBS3900


DCDU-12B


BTS3900A (Ver.C)

-

DCDU-11C

DBS3900


DCDU-12B

BTS3900A (Ver.B)

-

DCDU-03C

DBS3900


DCDU-03B



729




3.


4.




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


730




3.


4.


----End




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


731






2.


3.


4.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


732




(1) Satellite card



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


733





(2) Support




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


734




(1) BBU

(2) GPS support





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


735









Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



736



l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l




l


l




l


l


l




l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


737



l


l


l


l


l




l







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


738




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


739




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


740



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


741



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


742





l


l


l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


743


11 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C) NOTE





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


744















NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


745







Context Input power cables for the TMC11H are DCDU power cables, which can be power cables for the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B. The following table lists the specifications of the power cables.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


746



Table 11-8 Specifications of DCDU power cables Cabinet Type

Power Equipme nt

Cable

Color

One End

The Other End

TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03 B


RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue



TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11 B


RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue

TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12 B


RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue




2.




1.


2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


747




Step 4 Connect the other end of the DCDU power cables to the external power equipment. Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 11.7.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 6 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole on the cabinet. Step 7 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. ----End


Context The following table lists the specifications of a BBU power cable. Table 11-9 Specifications of a BBU power cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cabinet Type

Power Equipm ent

Cable

TMC11 H (Ver.B)

DCDU-0 3B

BBU power cable

RTN(+) wire

Color


Black

Bent by 90


3V3 connector

748



Cabinet Type

Power Equipm ent

TMC11 H (Ver.C)

DCDU-1 1B

TMC11 H (Ver.D)

DCDU-1 2B

Cable

BBU power cables

BBU power cables

Color


NEG(-) wire

Blue

degrees, OT terminals (M4, 6 mm2 or 0.009 in. 2)

RTN(+) wire

Black

NEG(-) wire

Blue


RTN(+) wire

Black

NEG(-) wire

Blue

EPC4 connector

NOTE




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B


TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11B



749



Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12B


Step 2 Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port on the UPEU in the BBU. Then tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.). Step 3 Connect the connector at the other end of the BBU power cable to the power equipment, as described in the following table. Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B


TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11B


TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12B


NOTE


CAUTION Ensure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station must be connected to the BBU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


750






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


751





2.


3.




Context l


l


The following table lists the specifications of an RRU power cable. Table 11-10 Specifications of an RRU power cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cabinet Type

Powe r Equi pmen t

Cable

TMC11 H (Ver.B)

DCD U-03B

RRU power cable

Color

One End

The Other End

RTN (+)




NEG (-)



752



Cabinet Type

TMC11 H (Ver.C)

Powe r Equi pmen t

DCD U-11B

Cable

RRU power cable

Color

One End

RTN (+)



NEG (-)


RTN (+)


The Other End



TMC11 H (Ver.D)

DCD U-12B

RRU power cable

NEG (-)

Blue

RTN (+)


EPC5 connector


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Blue


753



NOTE




2.


Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B


TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11B


TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12B





2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



754



3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


755




NOTE




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B



756



Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11B


TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12B



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


757





Step 7 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 11.7.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 8 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label. ----End


Installing the E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


758



Context l


l





759




Prerequisites


Context l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


760






Context l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


761






Context l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


762



l


l




2.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


763






Context l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


764



l


l





2.


3.


4.


5.





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


765



2.


3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


766







2.



11.7.6 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables This section describes how to install an inter-BBU signal cable for a triple- or single-mode base station. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


767



Prerequisites l


l




(2) Wavelength

(1) Maximum rate




BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT

M0 port on the UCIU


M1 port on the UCIU




CI port on the UMPT

CI port on the UMPT

UMPT+UMPT

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


768








2.


3.



Step 2 Remove dustproof caps from both ends of the fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 11-110.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


769






1.


2.




2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


770




Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 11.7.1 Cabling Requirements. If a fiber optic patch cord is used as a BBU interconnection signal cable, use binding straps to bind the BBU interconnection signal cable before using cable ties to secure it. If another type of cable is used as a BBU interconnection signal cable, directly use cable ties to secure it. Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End


Context l

When a base station is configured with one TMC11H, one monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.

l

If this base station is expanded to two TMC11Hs, as shown in the following figure, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.

l

If a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added into the added TMC11H, and the added BBU does not perform the monitoring function. For the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


771



Figure 11-112 One TMC11H expanded to two TMC11Hs

Procedure Step 1 Install a CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable in a TMC11H, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE in the TMC11H.

2.

Connect the other end of the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the TMC11H.

Figure 11-113 Installing the CMUE-BBU monitoring signal cable in the TMC11H

Step 2 Optional: If this base station is expanded from one TMC11H to two TMC11Hs, another monitoring signal cable must be installed between the two TMC11Hs, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the original TMC11H.

2.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE in the added TMC11H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


772



Figure 11-114 Installing the monitoring signal cable between two TMC11Hs



Context NOTE


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


773






2.


3.


4.


5.






2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


774








Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


775



No.

Item

2


3


4


5


6



Item

1


2


3



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


776



No.

Item

6


7


8


9


10


11


12


13



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7



777



No.

Item

8




Prerequisites l


l


l


l


l


l


Context


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


778




Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker

TMC11H (Ver.B)



TMC11H (Ver.C)



TMC11H (Ver.D)


-

NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


779





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


780





Component


TMC11H

Fan assembly


-



RRU



Handling Measure





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


781



Failure Type

Handling Measure



----End



Procedure Step 1 Use cover plates to block the cable holes and tighten the two screws on each cover plate, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


782








(1) Fireproof mud


NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


783





Color

Huawei Code

International Code

Cabinet

RAL7035

YB026

RAL7035

Base

3010 light gray

YB030

Pantone 422U



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


784








----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


785

12 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B)


12

Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B)

About This Chapter This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor AC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B). 12.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing cabinets. The clearances are retained for cable layout and future maintenance. 12.2 Installation Process The DBS3900 installation process includes installing cabinets, installing components in the cabinets, installing cables, installation check, power-on check, and subsequent operations. 12.3 Installing a Cabinet This section describes the procedures for installing the cabinet on a concrete floor. pole, and wall. This document uses the APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet as an example.The installation procedures are the same for the APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C)/ TMC11H (Ver.C) and the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinet. 12.4 Configuring the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable for a Cabinet A PGND cable connects PGND screws on a cabinet and an external ground bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets. 12.5 Installing Mandatory Components This chapter provides the reference for installing mandatory components in a DBS3900. 12.6 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables This chapter describes procedures for installing the optional modules and their cables onsite. 12.7 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. 12.8 Installation Checklist Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


786




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


787






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


788






NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


789





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


790





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


791






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


792








793






2.



(1) Wall

3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


794





(1) M12x60 bolts

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


795





2.





2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


796




(1) Level

(2) Spacer




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


797






2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


798




----End


Context l


l



l




799






l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



800









Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


801









802






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


803





----End


Context l


l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


804






(3) Pole

(4) Bolt

(5) Spring washer

(6) Flat washer



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


805




(1) Bar



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



806








807




(1) Flat washer

(2) Spring washer

(3) Nut



Context l


l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


808




(1) Anchor points






3.


4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


809




(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube


(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


810





(1) Bar


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



811




l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


812






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


813







l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cable



Color

PGND cable



Green and yellow









814



Cable



Color




Green and yellow








NOTE




2.




2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


815





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


816





(2) PGND cable



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


817






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



818








2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


819









Context l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


820




l




l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



821





l



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



822




l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



823




2.


3.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



824







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


825




----End





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


826





----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


827




Context l


l

Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks


RJ45 connector

RJ45 connector



Bare wire


-



Then...


Go toStep 2.


Go toStep 3.



2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


828









2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


829







2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


830




NOTE





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


831








Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Universal




832








2.


3.


4.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


833







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


834





(2) SOU

(1) AC heater




835



If...

Then...


Perform Step 2.1


Perform Step 2.2

1.



b.


c.


d.



2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



b.


c.


d.


836







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


837





Context l


l


Color

One End

The Other End

RTN(+) wire

Black

EPC4 connector

Cord end terminal

NEG(-) wire


RJ45 connector


l

Black



Then...


Go toStep 2.


Go toStep 3.



2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


838









Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


839







2.





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


840





Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) -


DBS3900




BTS3900A (Ver.B)

-

EPS 01A or EPS 01C

BTS3900A (Ver.C)

-


DBS3900


EPS 01B or EPS 01D






2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Base Station


Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.B)

-

EPS 01A or EPS 01C


DBS3900


EPS 01B or EPS 01D

BTS3900A (Ver.C)

-


DBS3900





841



Base Station


Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) -



DBS3900




3.


4.




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


842




3.


4.


----End




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


843






2.


3.


4.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


844




(1) Satellite card



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


845





(2) Support




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


846




(1) BBU

(2) GPS support





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


847





12.6.6 Installing the Storage Batteries When an outdoor base station requires the long-term backup power, you need to install storage batteries and the power cables for the storage batteries in an IBBS200T or IBBS200D.

Prerequisites Before installing the storage battery, please check if the voltage of the storage battery is normal. l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


848



Context

DANGER l During the installation, avoid any contact between the exposed metal conductors in the power cables and the metal housing of the cabinet. l During the installation, avoid short circuits or reverse connections between the positive and negative poles of the storage batteries. l Insulate all tools used for installation to avoid burning of storage batteries and to ensure personal safety.

Procedure Step 1 Check that the input and output circuit breakers for the storage batteries have been turned off. If the circuit breakers are turned on, an excessively large current may occur. 1.

Check that the BAT circuit breaker on the EPU or EPS in the APM30H is set to OFF, as shown in the following figure. Figure 12-89 Input circuit breaker for the storage batteries

2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Check that the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breaker on the power distribution box for the storage batteries is set to OFF, as shown in the following figure.


849



Figure 12-90 Output circuit breakers for the storage batteries

Step 2 Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown in the following figure. NOTE



Step 3 Secure the baffle plate, as shown in the following figure. 1. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Loosen the three M4 screws on the baffle plate. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

850



2.

Move the baffle plate upward until it touches the screws.

3.

Tighten the three screws to secure the baffle plate until the tightening torque reaches 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Figure 12-92 Securing the baffle plate

(1) Baffle plate


Remove the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries.

2.


3.

Connect negative power cables and then positive power cables for the storage batteries. The black cable is the power cable for the negative pole, and the red cable is the power cable for the positive pole. Tighten the screws on the connectors to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


851




The following figure shows the routing of power cables in the battery cabinet. Figure 12-94 Routing of power cables for the storage batteries

----End

12.7 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


852







l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l




l


l




l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


853



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l


l




l






The following figure shows the cables secured on a cable tray. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


854




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


855




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


856



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


857



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


858





l


l


l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


859


12 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) NOTE





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


860















NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


861






Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H In an APM30H (Ver.B), the input power cables for the APM30H refer to EPS 01B or EPS 01D power cables. The cables feed power into the EPS 01B or EPS 01D in the APM30H (Ver.B) from the external power equipment. In an APM30H (Ver.C), the input power cables for the APM30H refer to EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 power cables. The cables feed power into the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 in the APM30H (Ver.C) from the external power equipment.

Prerequisites l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


862




Cable

Color

One End

The Other End

APM30H (Ver.B)


L1

Brown

L2

Black


L3

Gray


N

Blue

L

Brown

N

Blue


L1

Black

L2

Red

N

White


L1

Brown

L2

Black

L3

Gray

N

Blue


L

Brown

N

Blue


L1

Black

L2

Red

N

White


APM30H (Ver.C)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)







863






2.


3.


4.


5.


6.



(1) AC baffle plate

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Terminal box



(4) PE terminal

864




(1) AC baffle plate

(2) Terminal box


(4) PE terminal


(1) AC baffle plate

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Terminal box


865




Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H Power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H consist of the DCDU power cables and the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H. The power cables feed power from the APM30H into the TMC11H. The power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H are optional. They are delivered with the TMC11H and used when the TMC11H serves as a transmission cabinet.

Prerequisites l


l


Context In a TMC11H (Ver.B) used as a transmission cabinet, a DCDU-03C is configured. In a TMC11H (Ver.C) used as a transmission cabinet, a DCDU-11C is configured. The power cables from the APM30H (Ver.B) to the TMC11H and the power cables from the APM30H (Ver.C) to the TMC11H have the same specifications. The following table lists the specifications of the power cables. Table 12-7 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H Cabinet Type

Cable

APM30H (Ver.B)


APM30H (Ver.C)

APM30H (Ver.B)/ APM30H (Ver.C) Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


Power cables for the AC junction box

Color

One End

The Other End

RTN (+)

Black

NEG (-)

Blue


OT terminal (M6, 4 mm2 or 0.006 in. 2)

RTN (+)

Black

NEG (-)

Blue

L

Brown

OT terminal (M4, OT terminal (M4, 1.5 mm2 or 0.002 1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.2) in.2)


866



Cabinet Type

Cable in the TMC11H

Color N

One End

The Other End

Blue

NOTE

l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l The method of installing DCDU-11C power cables is the same as the method of installing DCDU-03C power cables (which are shortened to DCDU power cables). The following figures use an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.

Procedure Step 1 Prepare the DCDU power cables and the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H. 1.


2.

Install connectors to both ends of the cable, as shown in the following table. Cable


DCDU power cable

See Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the ToolLess Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(1).





2.

Connect the end of the power cable with OT terminals to the DC input terminals on the DCDU in the TMC11H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the end of the power cable with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the TMC port on the EPS or EPU in the APM30H.

4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


867



Figure 12-109 Installing the DCDU power cables



2.

Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the L and N terminals in the AC junction box in the TMC11H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals to the L3 and N3 terminals in the AC junction box in the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


868





Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (APM:IBBS = 1:1) Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T are as follows: power cables for the IBBS200D, power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D, power cables for the IBBS200T, and power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T. The power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T are optional. They are delivered with the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. The heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D may need to be installed according to the onsite situation.

Prerequisites l


l


Context The following table lists the specifications of power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


869



Table 12-8 Specifications of power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T Cable

Color

One End

The Other End






RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black


RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black

The following table lists the specifications of the power cable for the fan, power cable for the TEC, and heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) and IBBS200D/ IBBS200T (Ver.C). Table 12-9 Specifications of the power cable for the fan, power cable for the TEC, and heatingfilm power cable Cable

Color

One End

The Other End








RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue


RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue


L

Brown

N

Blue

NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Prepare the following cables: power cables for an IBBS200D, power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D, heating-film power cable in an IBBS200D, power cables for an IBBS200T, and power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T. 1. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

870



2.











Step 2 Install the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. 1.

Connect the red and black wires at one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled BAT on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T below the APM30H.

2.

Connect the other end of the power cable to the battery cabinet power terminal on the inner right wall of the APM30H, as shown in the following figure. The other end of the power cable has a 120 series connector in an APM30H (Ver.B) or a 175 series connector in an APM30H (Ver.C). NOTE

The method of installing power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) is the same as the method of installing power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C). The following figure uses an IBBS200D/ IBBS200T (Ver.C) as an example.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


871



Figure 12-111 Installing the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C)

(1) Power terminal for the battery cabinet

(2) Power distribution box (3) Wiring terminals in the (4) Wiring terminals in the in the battery cabinet upper part of the power lower part of the power distribution box distribution box

Step 3 Install the power cable for a fan in the IBBS200D. NOTE

The method of installing the power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T is the same as the method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D. This section describes the method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D as an example.

1.

Connect the black and blue wires at one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals labeled TEC/FAN on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D below the APM30H.

2.

Connect the other end of the power cable with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the LOAD3 port on the EPS or EPU in the APM30H, as shown in Figure 12-112 or Figure 12-113.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


872



Figure 12-112 Installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


873



Figure 12-113 Installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)


Step 4 Optional: Install the heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D.

CAUTION When installing the heating-film power cable in the AC junction box of the IBBS200D, do not connect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 12-114. l Do not expose the wires of the heating-film power cable outside the heating-film AC junction box. l The heating-film power cable must be routed into the heating-film AC junction box from the top, not from the bottom.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


874



Figure 12-114 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cable in the heating-film AC junction box in the IBBS200D

1.

Connect the brown and blue wires at one end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L and N wiring terminals in the heating-film AC junction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D below the APM30H.

2.

Connect the brown and blue wires at the other end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L2 and N2 wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H. Figure 12-115 Installing the heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D



Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 12.7.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


875




Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (APM:IBBS = 1:2) Power cables from an APM30H to an IBBS200D/IBBS200T feed power from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T and provide power to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T and devices in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. The power cables include the power cables for the IBBS200D/ IBBS200T, power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D, power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, and TEC power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ts.

Prerequisites l


l


Context The power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T are optional. They are delivered with the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. The heating-film power cable in the IBBS200D may need to be installed according to the onsite situation. The following table lists the specifications of the power cables an the IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) or IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C) and power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts (Ver.B) or IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.C). Table 12-10 Specifications of the power cables for cabinets and power cables between cascaded cabinets Cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Color

One End

The Other End








RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black


RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black

Power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/

RTN(+)

Red


876



Cable

Color

IBBS200Ts (Ver.B)

NEG(-)

Black

Power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts (Ver.C)

RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black

One End

The Other End



The following table lists the specifications of the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.B) or (Ver.C), fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.B) or (Ver.C), heating-film power cable in an IBBS200D (Ver.B) or (Ver.C), and power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T (Ver.B) or (Ver.C). The power cables in the IBBS200D (Ver.B) have the same specifications as those in IBBS200D (Ver.C). The power cables in the IBBS200T (Ver.B) have the same specifications as those in the IBBS200T (Ver.C). Table 12-11 Specifications of the power cable for the fan, fan power cable between cascaded cabinets, and heating-film power cable Cable

Color

One End

The Other End










RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue


RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue

Fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds

RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue


L

Brown

N

Blue

NOTE


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


877



Procedure Step 1 Prepare the following cables: power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T, power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D, fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds, heating-film power cable in an IBBS200D, and power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T. 1.


2.











Power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.B)/(Ver.C), fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.B)/(Ver.C), and heating-film power cable in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)/(Ver.C)


Step 2 Install the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T and power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts. 1.

Install the power cables for the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Connect the red and black wires at one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring terminals labeled BAT on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T below the APM30H, and the other end with a 120 or 175 series connector to the battery cabinet power terminals on the inner right wall of the APM30H, as shown in Figure 12-116. The power cable uses a 120 series connector in an APM30H (Ver.B) or a 175 series connector in an APM30H (Ver.C).

2.

Install the power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts. Connect the red and black wires at both ends of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring terminals labeled BAT in the lower part of the power distribution box in the two IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, as shown in Figure 12-116.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


878



The method of installing power cables an the IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) is the same as the method of installing power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C). The method of installing the power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.B) is the same as the method of installing the power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.C). The following figure uses an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C) as an example.

Figure 12-116 Installing the power cables for an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.C) and power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (Ver.C)

(1) Power terminal for (2) Power distribution box (3) Wiring terminals in the (4) Wiring terminals in the the battery cabinet in the battery cabinet upper part of the power lower part of the power distribution box distribution box

Step 3 Install the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D and fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds. 1.

Install the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D. Connect the black and blue wires at one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring terminals labeled TEC/FAN in the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS200D below the APM30H, and the other end with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the LOAD3 port on the EPU or EPS in the APM30H, as shown in Figure 12-117.

2.

Install the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds. Connect the black and blue wires at both ends of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


879



terminals labeled TEC/FAN in the lower part of the power distribution box in the two IBBS200Ds, as shown in Figure 12-117. NOTE

l The method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (Ver.B) is the same as the method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.C). The method of installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.B) is the same as the method of installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.C). The following figure uses an IBBS200D (Ver.C) as an example. l The method of installing the power cable for the TEC in an IBBS200T is the same as the method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D. This section describes the method of installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D as an example. l When the number of IBBS cabinets is twice the number of APM cabinets but a TEC power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ts is unavailable, a power cable needs to be installed for the TEC in the second IBBS200T. The installation method is as follows: Connect the black and blue wires at one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring terminals labeled TEC/FAN in the upper part of the power distribution box in the IBBS200D below the APM30H, and the other end with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the LOAD2 port on the EPU or EPS in the APM30H.

Figure 12-117 Installing the power cable for the fan in an IBBS200D (Ver.C) and fan power cable between cascaded IBBS200Ds (Ver.C)

(1) Tool-less female (2) Power distribution (3) Wiring terminals in connector (pressfit type) box in the battery cabinet the upper part of the power distribution box

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


(4) Wiring terminals in the lower part of the power distribution box

880



Step 4 Optional: Install the heating-film power cables in the IBBS200Ds.

CAUTION When installing the heating-film power cables in the AC junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do not connect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 12-118. l Do not expose the wires of the heating-film power cables outside the heating-film AC junction boxes. l The heating-film power cables must be routed into the heating-film AC junction boxes from the top, not from the bottom.

Figure 12-118 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cables in the heating-film AC junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds

1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Connect the brown and blue wires at one end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L2 and N2 wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H, and the brown and blue wires at the other end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L and N wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D below the APM30H.


881





2.


Install the heating-film power cable in the second IBBS200D. Connect the brown and blue wires at one end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L1 and N1 wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H, and the brown and blue wires at the other end of the heating-film power cable with OT terminals to the L and N wiring terminals in the AC junction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D below the APM30H, as shown in Figure 12-119.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


882



Installing BBU Power Cables The BBU power cable in the APM30H feeds power from the EPU or EPS into the BBU.

Prerequisites l


l



Power Equipme nt

Cable

APM30H (Ver.B)

EPS 01B/ 01D

BBU power cable

APM30H (Ver.C)

EPU03A03/05

Color

One End

The Other End

RT N (+)

Black

3V3 connector


NE G (-)

Blue

NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Add a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the BBU power cable. For details, see Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(1). Step 2 Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port on the UPEU in the BBU. Then tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.). Step 3 Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD1 port on the EPS in the APM30H (Ver.B) or the BBU_0 port on the EPU in the APM30H (Ver.C).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


883



l Connect the blue wire in the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the left part of the port on the EPS or the upper part of the port on the EPU, and the black wire in the connector to the right part of the port on the EPS or the lower part of the port on the EPU. l When the BBU is configured with two UPEUs, each UPEU must be connected to the power equipment by using a BBU power cable. Connect the end of the second BBU power cable with a 3V3 connector to the -48V port on the second UPEU, and the end with a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the LOAD2 port on the EPS or the BBU_1 port on the EPU.

Figure 12-120 Installing a BBU power cable in the APM30H (Ver.B)

Figure 12-121 Installing a BBU power cable in the APM30H (Ver.C)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


884





Prerequisites l


l



Power Equip ment

Cable

APM30H (Ver.B)

EPS

RRU power cable

RT N (+)

Color

One End

The Other End





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

APM30H (Ver.C)

EPU


DCDU03B

RRU power cable (comply ing with the North Americ an

NE G(-)

Blue

RT N (+)

Black



885



Cabinet Type

Power Equip ment

Cable

Color

standar d)

NE G(-)

Blue


RT N (+)

Brown

NE G(-)

Blue

One End

The Other End


NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


886


12 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


887







EPS


DCDU-03B


EPU



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


888



2.



EPS


DCDU-03B


EPU



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


889







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


890




Context l


l





891




Prerequisites


Context l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


892





Context l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


893





Context l


l


l


l




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


894





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


895






Context l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


896



l


l


l





2.


3.


4.


5.






897



1.


2.


3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


898





Scenario: 1 APM30H Expanded to 2 APM30Hs This section describes the procedures for installing the monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from one APM30H to two APM30Hs.

Context l


l

If this base station is expanded to two APM30Hs, as shown in the following figure, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.

l


Figure 12-136 One APM30H expanded to two APM30Hs

Procedure Step 1 Install a CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable in an APM30H, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Connect one end of the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA in the APM30H. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

899



2.

Connect the other end of the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU. Figure 12-137 Installing the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable in the APM30H

Step 2 Optional: If this base station is expanded to two APM30Hs, another CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable must be installed between the two APM30Hs, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the original APM30H.

2.

Connect the other end of the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA in the added APM30H. Figure 12-138 Installing the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable between two APM30Hs

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


900




Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T Expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts This section describes the procedures for installing the monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.

Context l

When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T, two monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l

If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, as shown in the following figure, two additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l

In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured. The second BBU is installed in the added APM30H and does not perform the monitoring function. For the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


901



Figure 12-139 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts


Connect one end of the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the other end of the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


902



Figure 12-140 Installing the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable in the APM30H


Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA on the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


903




Step 3 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, two additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Install a CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable between the original APM30H and the added APM30H. Connect one end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the original APM30H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the fan assembly in the added APM30H.

2.

Install a monitoring signal cable between the added APM30H and the IBBS200D or IBBS200T below the added APM30H. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA on the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the added APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


904



Figure 12-142 Installing monitoring signal cables in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs +2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


905



Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts Expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts This section describes the procedures for installing the monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.

Context l

When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, three monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l

If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, as shown in the following figure, three additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l


Figure 12-143 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts



2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


906




Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUAs in the two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUA on the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T below the APM30H.

2.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA on the door of the second IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


907



Figure 12-145 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUAs



2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


908




Step 4 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, three additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Install a monitoring signal cable between the cascaded CMUAs in the two added IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUA on the door of one added IBBS200D or IBBS200T below the added APM30H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA on the door of the other added IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

3.

Install a CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable between the original APM30H and the added APM30H. Connect one end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the original APM30H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA in the added APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


909



Figure 12-147 Installing monitoring signal cables in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs +4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind them. Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. Step 7 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole on the cabinet. ----End

Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H This section describes the procedures for installing the monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


910



Context l

When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H, two monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l

If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H, as shown in the following figure, an additional monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.

l


Figure 12-148 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H



2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


911




Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA in the TMC11H.

2.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU. Figure 12-150 Installing the monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and TMC11H

Step 3 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H, another monitoring signal cable connecting the TMC11H and the added APM30H must be installed. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUA in the TMC11H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA in the added APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


912



Figure 12-151 Installing the monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H


Scenario: 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 APM30Hs +2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H This section describes the procedures for installing the monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.

Context l

When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H, three monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l

If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, as shown in the following figure, two additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l

In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured. The second BBU is installed in the added APM30H and does not perform the monitoring function. For the monitoring

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


913



scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). Figure 12-152 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H



2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


914





2.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H. Figure 12-154 Installing the monitoring signal cable between the APM30H and the IBBS200D or IBBS200T



2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


915




Step 4 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, two additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Install another monitoring signal cable between the TMC11H and the added APM30H. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUA in the TMC11H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA in the added APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


916





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


917



Scenario: 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H This section describes the procedures for installing the monitoring signal cables during the expansion of a DBS3900 from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.

Context l

When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, four monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l

If this base station is expanded to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, as shown in the following figure, three additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite.

l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


918



Figure 12-157 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 APM30Hs +4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H



2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


919






2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


920




Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUAs in the two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUA on the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T below the APM30H.

2.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA on the door of the second IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


921



Figure 12-160 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUAs



2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


922




Step 5 Optional: If this base station is expanded from 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H to 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, three additional monitoring signal cables must be installed onsite, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Install a monitoring signal cable between the cascaded CMUAs in the two added IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUA on the door of one added IBBS200D or IBBS200T below the added APM30H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA on the door of the other added IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

3.

Install a monitoring signal cable between the TMC11H and the added APM30H. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUA in the fan assembly of the TMC11H. Then, connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA in the fan assembly of the added APM30H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


923






Prerequisites l


l

Optical modules, fiber optic cables, and electrical cables meeting the following requirements are available:

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


924



– The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type. – The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s. – The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable. NOTE



(2) Wavelength

(1) Maximum rate




BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT

M0 port on the UCIU


M1 port on the UCIU




CI port on the UMPT

CI port on the UMPT

UMPT+UMPT



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


925






2.


3.






1. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


926



2.




2.







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


927



2.




Context NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


928





2.


3.


4.


5.






2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


929








Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


930



No.

Item

2


3


4


5


6



Item

1


2


3



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


931



No.

Item

6


7


8


9


10


11


12


13



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7



932



No.

Item

8




Prerequisites l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


933



Context



Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


934



Cabinet

Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker




NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


935






936






Component


APM30H

PMU


PSU


Fan assembly


Battery cabinet






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


937




Componen t


APM30H or TMC11H

BBU


-


RRU


NOTE



Handling Measure



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


938



Failure Type

Handling Measure





----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


939









(1) Fireproof mud

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



940







Color

Huawei Code

International Code

Cabinet

RAL7035

YB026

RAL7035

Base

3010 light gray

YB030

Pantone 422U



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


941









----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


942

13 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B)


13

Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is

Installed in a +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B)

About This Chapter This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor +24 V DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B). 13.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing cabinets. The clearances are retained for cable layout and future maintenance. 13.2 Installation Process The DBS3900 installation process includes installing cabinets, installing components in the cabinets, installing cables, installation check, power-on check, and subsequent operations. 13.3 Installing a Cabinet This section describes the procedures for installing the cabinet on a concrete floor. pole, and wall. This document uses the APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet as an example.The installation procedures are the same for the APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C)/ TMC11H (Ver.C) and the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinet. 13.4 Configuring the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable for a Cabinet A PGND cable connects PGND screws on a cabinet and an external ground bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets. 13.5 Installing Mandatory Components This chapter provides the reference for installing mandatory components in a DBS3900. 13.6 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables This chapter describes procedures for installing the optional modules and their cables onsite. 13.7 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. 13.8 Installation Checklist Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


943




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


944






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


945






NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


946





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


947





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


948






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


949








950






2.



(1) Wall

3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


951





(1) M12x60 bolts

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


952





2.





2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


953




(1) Level

(2) Spacer




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


954






2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


955




----End


Context l


l



l




956






l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



957









Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


958









959






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


960





----End


Context l


l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


961






(3) Pole

(4) Bolt

(5) Spring washer

(6) Flat washer



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


962




(1) Bar



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



963








964




(1) Flat washer

(2) Spring washer

(3) Nut



Context l


l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


965




(1) Anchor points






3.


4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


966




(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube


(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


967





(1) Bar


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



968




l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


969






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


970







l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cable



Color

PGND cable



Green and yellow









971



Cable



Color




Green and yellow








NOTE




2.




2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


972





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


973





(2) PGND cable



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


974






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



975








2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


976









Context l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


977




l




l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



978





l



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



979




l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



980




2.


3.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



981







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


982




----End





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


983





----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


984




Context l


l

Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks


RJ45 connector

RJ45 connector



Bare wire


-



Then...


Go toStep 2.


Go toStep 3.



2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


985









2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


986







2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


987




NOTE





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


988






Context l


l


Color

One End

The Other End

RTN(+) wire

Black

EPC4 connector

Cord end terminal

NEG(-) wire


RJ45 connector


l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Black

The figures showing how to install an EMUA are the same as those showing how to install an EMUB. The following figures show how to install an EMUB. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

989




Then...


Go toStep 2.


Go toStep 3.



2.






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


990




Step 4 Optional: Align the cable claws with the holes of the mounting ears on the EMUB, and stick the cable claws onto both sides of the EMUB, as shown in the following figure. If you want to install an EMUA, skip this step. Figure 13-69 Sticking cable claws onto both sides of an EMUB




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


991






2.


3.

Add the corresponding connector to the other end of the EMUA/EMUB power cable according to the type of the power equipment, as listed in the following table. Table 13-4 Method of adding the connectors on the EMUA/EMUB power cable Base Station

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) -


DBS3900




BTS3900A (Ver.B)

-

EPS 01A or EPS 01C

BTS3900A (Ver.C)

-


DBS3900


EPS 01B or EPS 01D





992





2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Base Station


Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.B)

-

EPS 01A or EPS 01C


DBS3900


EPS 01B or EPS 01D

BTS3900A (Ver.C)

-


DBS3900



BTS3900A (Ver.D) -


DBS3900






993




3.


4.




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


994




3.


4.


----End




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


995






2.


3.


4.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


996




(1) Satellite card



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


997





(2) Support




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


998




(1) BBU

(2) GPS support





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


999









Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1000



l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l




l


l




l


l


l




l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1001



l


l


l


l


l




l







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1002




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1003




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1004



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1005



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1006





l


l


l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1007


13 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B) NOTE





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1008















NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1009






Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H (+24 V) Input power cables for the APM30H (+24 V) feed power into the EPS24S48100DC from the external power equipment.

Context The following table lists the specifications of the input power cables for the APM30H (+24 V).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1010



Table 13-6 Specifications of the input power cables for the APM30H (+24 V) Cable

Colour

One End

The Other End

EPS24S48100DC power cables

Red wire



Black wire



Procedure Step 1 Prepare EPS24S48100DC power cables. 1.


2.

Add correct connectors to each end of the EPS24S48100DC power cables according to the instructions in Table 13-6. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws outside the wiring unit of the EPS24S48100DC power subrack, and remove the protective cover for the wiring unit. Step 3 Install the EPS24S48100DC power cables, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect two red cables to the + terminals on the EPS24S48100DC power subrack, and connect two black cables to the - terminals on the EPS24S48100DC power subrack, and use the screwdriver to tighten the terminals.

2.

Reinstall the protective cover, and use the screwdriver to tighten the screws.

3.

Connect the other end of the EPS24S48100DC power cables to the external power equipment.

Figure 13-91 Installing the EPS24S48100DC power cables

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1011






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cabinet Type

Power Equipm ent

Cable

TMC11 H (Ver.B)

DCDU-0 3B

BBU power cable

TMC11 H (Ver.C)

DCDU-1 1B

BBU power cables

TMC11 H (Ver.D)

DCDU-1 2B

BBU power cables

Color


RTN(+) wire

Black

NEG(-) wire

Blue


RTN(+) wire

Black

NEG(-) wire

Blue

RTN(+) wire

Black

NEG(-) wire

Blue


3V3 connector

Tool-less female connector (pressfit type) EPC4 connector

1012


13 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B) NOTE




2.


Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B


TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11B


TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12B


Step 2 Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port on the UPEU in the BBU. Then tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.). Step 3 Connect the connector at the other end of the BBU power cable to the power equipment, as described in the following table.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B


TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11B



1013



Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12B


NOTE


CAUTION Ensure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station must be connected to the BBU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury. Figure 13-92 Installing a BBU power cable (when the DCDU-03B supplies power)


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1014






2.


3.




Prerequisites l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1015




Power Equip ment

Cable

APM30H (Ver.B)

EPS

RRU power cable

RT N (+)

Color

One End

The Other End





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

APM30H (Ver.C)

EPU


DCDU03B

NE G(-)

Blue

RRU power cable (comply ing with the North Americ an standar d)

RT N (+)

Black

NE G(-)

Blue


RT N (+)

Brown

NE G(-)

Blue




1016




Procedure Step 1 Route an RRU power cable into the cabinet through a cable outlet module. Step 2 Strip 500 mm (19.69 in.) long jacket and shield layer off the RRU power cable from one end. Step 3 In a position 200 mm (7.87 in.) away from the cable outlet module, strip the jacket for about 40 mm (1.57 in.) off the RRU power cable to expose the shield layer. Thread the cable through the ground clip to ensure full contact between the shield layer and the ground clip, and then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 13-96. NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1017







EPS


DCDU-03B


EPU



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1018



2.



EPS


DCDU-03B


EPU



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1019







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1020




Context l


l





1021




Prerequisites


Context l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1022





Context l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1023





Context l


l


l


l




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1024





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1025






Context l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1026



l


l


l





2.


3.


4.


5.






1027



1.


2.


3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1028





Prerequisites l


l




(1) Maximum rate

(2) Wavelength


Context The following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections. Table 13-9 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Interconnection Mode


BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT

M0 port on the UCIU



1029



Interconnection Mode

UMPT+UMPT


BBU 1

M1 port on the UCIU




CI port on the UMPT

CI port on the UMPT






2.


3.



Step 2 Remove dustproof caps from both ends of the fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 13-111. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1030






1.


2.




2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1031





13.7.6 Installing a PSU Monitoring Signal Cable and a PSU InPosition Signal Cable When a DBS3900 is configured with one APM30H (+24 V), you need to install a PSU (DC/ DC) monitoring signal cable and a PSU (DC/DC) in-position signal cable.

Procedure Step 1 Install a PSU (DC/DC) monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the PSU (DC/DC) monitoring signal cable to the EXT_ALM0 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the ALM port on the power subrack (DC/DC).

Step 2 Install a PSU (DC/DC) in-position signal cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the PSU (DC/DC) in-position signal cable to the EXT_ALM1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the PRESENT port on the power subrack (DC/DC).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1032



Figure 13-113 Installing the PSU (DC/DC) monitoring signal cable and the PSU (DC/DC) inposition signal cable





2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1033






Context NOTE



Procedure Step 1 Install optical modules in the BBU side, as shown in Figure 13-115 and Figure 13-116. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1034



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.






2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1035







Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


Installation Environment Checklist The following table lists the items to be checked for the installation environment. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1036



Table 13-11 Installation environment checklist No.

Item

1


2


3


Electrical Connection Checklist The following table lists the items to be checked for electrical connections. Table 13-12 Electrical connection checklist No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8


9


10


11


12


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1037



No.

Item

13


Cable Installation Checklist The following table lists the items to be checked for the cable installation. Table 13-13 Cable installation checklist No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1038




Prerequisites l


l


l


l


l


l


Context



Power Device

Circuit Breaker

APM30H (Ver.B)

EPS24S48100DC or DCDU-03B

SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the DCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control the power input to the RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fan assembly, and customer transmission equipment.)


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1039




Procedure Step 1 Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit. Step 2 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the APM30H. Step 3 Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on the DCDU-03B to ON. Step 4 Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON, and check the power supply status of each component.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1040




Component


APM30H

PSU


Fan assembly


-



RRU



Handling Measure





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1041



Failure Type

Handling Measure



----End




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1042








(1) Fireproof mud


NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1043





Color

Huawei Code

International Code

Cabinet

RAL7035

YB026

RAL7035

Base

3010 light gray

YB030

Pantone 422U



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1044








----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1045

14 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.B) Supplies Power to RRUs


14


Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.B) Supplies Power to RRUs

About This Chapter This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an indoor DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed indoors and an APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to RRUs. 14.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing cabinets. The clearances are retained for cable layout and future maintenance. 14.2 Installation Process The DBS3900 installation process includes installing cabinets, installing components in the cabinets, installing cables, installation check, power-on check, and subsequent operations. 14.3 Installing a Cabinet This section describes the procedures for installing the cabinet on a concrete floor. pole, and wall. This document uses the APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet as an example.The installation procedures are the same for the APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C)/ TMC11H (Ver.C) and the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinet. 14.4 Installing a PGND Cable A PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. 14.5 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit When the RRU monitors the devices in the cabinet as a monitoring unit, you need to install the SLPU as a monitoring signal protection unit. 14.6 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. 14.7 Installation Checklist Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1046




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1047






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1048






NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1049





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1050





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1051






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1052








1053






2.



(1) Wall

3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1054





(1) M12x60 bolts

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1055





2.





2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1056




(1) Level

(2) Spacer




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1057






2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1058




----End


Context l


l



l




1059






l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1060









Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1061




Context l


l






(3) Pole

(4) Bolt

(5) Spring washer

(6) Flat washer


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1062





(1) Bar


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1063




l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1064






(1) Flat washer

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Spring washer


(3) Nut

1065





Context l


l




(1) Anchor points




1066



1.




3.


4.



(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1067




(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1068




(1) Bar



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1069







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1070








Color

PGND cable


Green and yellow



1071





Color

PGND cable





Color

PGND cable



NOTE




2.




2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1072








Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1073





2.


3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1074



----End






l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1075



l


l




l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l


l




l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1076








(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1077




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1078



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1079



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1080





l


l


l


14.6.2 Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H In an APM30H (Ver.B), the input power cables for the APM30H refer to EPS 01B or EPS 01D power cables. The cables feed power into the EPS 01B or EPS 01D in the APM30H (Ver.B) from the external power equipment. In an APM30H (Ver.C), the input power cables for the APM30H refer to EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 power cables. The cables feed power into the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 in the APM30H (Ver.C) from the external power equipment.

Prerequisites l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1081



l



Cable

Color

One End

The Other End

APM30H (Ver.B)


L1

Brown

L2

Black


L3

Gray


N

Blue

L

Brown

N

Blue


L1

Black

L2

Red

N

White


L1

Brown

L2

Black

L3

Gray

N

Blue


L

Brown

N

Blue


L1

Black

L2

Red

N

White


APM30H (Ver.C)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)







1082






2.


3.


4.


5.


6.



(1) AC baffle plate

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Terminal box



(4) PE terminal

1083




(1) AC baffle plate

(2) Terminal box


(4) PE terminal


(1) AC baffle plate

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Terminal box


1084




14.6.3 Installing RRU Power Cables This section describes the procedure for installing an RRU power cable that feeds power into an RRU from the power equipment in the APM30H.

Prerequisites l


l



Power Equip ment

Cable

APM30H (Ver.B)

EPS

RRU power cable

RT N (+)

Color

One End

The Other End





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

APM30H (Ver.C)

EPU


DCDU03B

RRU power cable (comply ing with the North

NE G(-)

Blue

RT N (+)

Black



1085



Cabinet Type

Power Equip ment

Cable

Color

Americ an standar d)

NE G(-)

Blue


RT N (+)

Brown

NE G(-)

Blue

One End

The Other End


NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1086


14 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed Indoors and an Outdoor APM30H (Ver.B) Supplies Power to RRUs NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1087







EPS


DCDU-03B


EPU



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1088



2.



EPS


DCDU-03B


EPU



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1089








1090





OUT1

IN0


OUT1

IN0.1

TX+

IN0.2

TX-

IN0.3

RX+

IN0.4

RX-

NOTE




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1091






2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1092




Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 14.6.1 Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind them. Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole on the cabinet. Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End

14.6.5 Installing a CMUA-SLPU Surge Protection Monitoring Cable The CMUA-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable connects the CMUA and USLP2, enabling surge protection for monitoring signals.

Procedure Step 1 Install the CMUA-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the CMUA-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable to the COM IN port on the CMUA.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the OUT1 port on the USLP2 in the SLPU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1093



Figure 14-58 Installing the CMUA-SLPU surge protection monitoring cable





2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1094







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


6

Labels, tags, and nameplates are correct, legible, and complete. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1095




Item

1


2


3



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8


9


10


11

The power cables for the storage batteries are correctly connected to the positive and negative poles. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1096



No.

Item

12


13



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8



1097





Prerequisites l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Context


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1098




Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker










NOTE




1099






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1100




Component


APM30H

PMU


PSU





Battery cabinet



-

RRU



Handling Measure



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1101



Failure Type

Handling Measure





----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1102









(1) Fireproof mud

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1103







Color

Huawei Code

International Code

Cabinet

RAL7035

YB026

RAL7035

Base

3010 light gray

YB030

Pantone 422U



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1104









----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1105

15 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B)


15

Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B)

About This Chapter This chapter describes the process for installing cabinets, optional and mandatory components in the cabinets, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor DC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B). 15.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing cabinets. The clearances are retained for cable layout and future maintenance. 15.2 Installation Process The DBS3900 installation process includes installing cabinets, installing components in the cabinets, installing cables, installation check, power-on check, and subsequent operations. 15.3 Installing a Cabinet This section describes the procedures for installing the cabinet on a concrete floor. pole, and wall. This document uses the APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet as an example.The installation procedures are the same for the APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C)/ TMC11H (Ver.C) and the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinet. 15.4 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable A PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets. 15.5 Installing Mandatory Components This chapter provides the reference for installing mandatory components in a DBS3900. 15.6 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables This chapter describes procedures for installing the optional modules and their cables onsite. 15.7 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1106




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1107






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1108






NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1109





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1110





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1111






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1112








1113






2.



(1) Wall

3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1114





(1) M12x60 bolts

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1115





2.





2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1116




(1) Level

(2) Spacer




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1117






2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1118




----End


Context l


l



l




1119






l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1120









Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1121




Context l


l






(3) Pole

(4) Bolt

(5) Spring washer

(6) Flat washer


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1122





(1) Bar


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1123




l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1124






(1) Flat washer

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Spring washer


(3) Nut

1125





Context l


l




(1) Anchor points




1126



1.




3.


4.



(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1127




(1) Bolt

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1128




(1) Bar



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1129







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1130







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cable


Color

PGND cable


Green and yellow

Equipotential cable



1131





Color

PGND cable



Equipotential cable






Color

PGND cable



Equipotential cable



NOTE




2.




1132



1.


2.






(2) PGND cable

(3) Ground busbar


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1133









Context l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1134




l




l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1135





l



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1136




l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1137




2.


3.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1138







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1139




----End





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1140





----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1141




Context l


l

Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks


RJ45 connector

RJ45 connector



Bare wire


-



Then...


Go toStep 2.


Go toStep 3.



2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1142









2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1143







2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1144




NOTE





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1145







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1146




(1) AC heater

(2) SOU



Then...


Perform Step 2.1


Perform Step 2.2

1. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Install the AC heater power cable in the APM30H. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1147



a.


b.


c.


d.



2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



b.


c.


d.


e.



1148






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1149




Context l


l


Color

One End

The Other End

RTN(+) wire

Black

EPC4 connector

Cord end terminal

NEG(-) wire


RJ45 connector


l

Black



Then...


Go toStep 2.


Go toStep 3.



2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1150








Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1151







2.





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1152





Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) -

DCDU-12C

DBS3900


DCDU-12B


BTS3900A (Ver.C)

-

DCDU-11C

DBS3900


DCDU-12B

BTS3900A (Ver.B)

-

DCDU-03C

DBS3900


DCDU-03B




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


Power Equipment


BTS3900A (Ver.D) -

DCDU-12C

DBS3900


DCDU-12B


BTS3900A (Ver.C)

-

DCDU-11C

DBS3900


DCDU-12B

BTS3900A (Ver.B)

-

DCDU-03C

DBS3900


DCDU-03B



1153




3.


4.




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1154




3.


4.


----End




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1155






2.


3.


4.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1156




(1) Satellite card



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1157





(2) Support




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1158




(1) BBU

(2) GPS support





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1159









Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1160



l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l




l


l




l


l


l




l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1161



l


l


l


l


l




l







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1162




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1163




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1164



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1165



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1166





l


l


l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1167


15 Outdoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) NOTE





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1168















NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1169







Context Input power cables for the TMC11H are DCDU power cables, which can be power cables for the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B. The following table lists the specifications of the power cables.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1170



Table 15-8 Specifications of DCDU power cables Cabinet Type

Power Equipme nt

Cable

Color

One End

The Other End

TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03 B


RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue



TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11 B


RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue

TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12 B


RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue




2.




1.


2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1171




Step 4 Connect the other end of the DCDU power cables to the external power equipment. Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 15.7.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 6 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole on the cabinet. Step 7 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. ----End



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cabinet Type

Power Equipm ent

Cable

TMC11 H (Ver.B)

DCDU-0 3B

BBU power cable

RTN(+) wire

Color


Black

Bent by 90


3V3 connector

1172



Cabinet Type

Power Equipm ent

TMC11 H (Ver.C)

DCDU-1 1B

TMC11 H (Ver.D)

DCDU-1 2B

Cable

BBU power cables

BBU power cables

Color


NEG(-) wire

Blue

degrees, OT terminals (M4, 6 mm2 or 0.009 in. 2)

RTN(+) wire

Black

NEG(-) wire

Blue


RTN(+) wire

Black

NEG(-) wire

Blue

EPC4 connector

NOTE




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B


TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11B



1173



Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12B


Step 2 Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port on the UPEU in the BBU. Then tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.). Step 3 Connect the connector at the other end of the BBU power cable to the power equipment, as described in the following table. Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B


TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11B


TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12B


NOTE


CAUTION Ensure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station must be connected to the BBU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1174






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1175





2.


3.




Context l


l


The following table lists the specifications of an RRU power cable. Table 15-10 Specifications of an RRU power cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cabinet Type

Powe r Equi pmen t

Cable

TMC11 H (Ver.B)

DCD U-03B

RRU power cable

Color

One End

The Other End

RTN (+)




NEG (-)



1176



Cabinet Type

TMC11 H (Ver.C)

Powe r Equi pmen t

DCD U-11B

Cable

RRU power cable

Color

One End

RTN (+)



NEG (-)


RTN (+)


The Other End



TMC11 H (Ver.D)

DCD U-12B

RRU power cable

NEG (-)

Blue

RTN (+)


EPC5 connector


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Blue


1177



NOTE




2.


Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B


TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11B


TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12B





2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1178



3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1179




NOTE




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B



1180



Cabinet Type

Power Equipment


TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11B


TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12B



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1181







Installing the E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1182



Context l


l





1183




Prerequisites


Context l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1184






Context l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1185






Context l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1186



l


l




2.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1187






Context l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1188



l


l





2.


3.


4.


5.





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1189



2.


3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1190





Prerequisites l


l




(1) Maximum rate

(2) Wavelength


Context The following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1191



Table 15-11 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected Interconnection Mode


BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT

M0 port on the UCIU


M1 port on the UCIU




CI port on the UMPT

CI port on the UMPT

UMPT+UMPT






2.


3.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1192






1.


2.




2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1193






Context l

When a base station is configured with one TMC11H, one monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.

l

If this base station is expanded to two TMC11Hs, as shown in the following figure, another monitoring signal cable must be installed onsite.

l

If a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added into the added TMC11H, and the added BBU does not perform the monitoring function. For the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1194



Figure 15-111 One TMC11H expanded to two TMC11Hs

Procedure Step 1 Install the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable in a TMC11H, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA in the TMC11H.

2.

Connect the other end of the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the TMC11H.

Figure 15-112 Installing the CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable in the TMC11H

Step 2 Optional: If this base station is expanded from one TMC11H to two TMC11Hs, another monitoring signal cable must be installed between the two TMC11Hs, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the original TMC11H.

2.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUA in the added TMC11H.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1195



Figure 15-113 Installing the monitoring signal cable between two TMC11Hs





2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1196






Context NOTE





1197



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.






2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1198







Item

1


2


3


4


5


6




1199




Item

1


2


3



Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8


9


10


11


12


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1200



No.

Item

13



Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1201




Prerequisites l


l


l


l


l


l


Context



Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker

TMC11H (Ver.B)



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1202



Cabinet

Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker

TMC11H (Ver.C)



TMC11H (Ver.D)


-

NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1203





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1204





Component


TMC11H

Fan assembly


-



RRU



Handling Measure





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1205



Failure Type

Handling Measure



----End




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1206








(1) Fireproof mud


NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1207





Color

Huawei Code

International Code

Cabinet

RAL7035

YB026

RAL7035

Base

3010 light gray

YB030

Pantone 422U



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1208








----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1209

16 Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)


16

Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

About This Chapter This section describes the process for installing an OMB (Ver.C), components in the OMB (Ver.C), and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C). 16.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing the OMB and IBBS20D on a pole or a wall. 16.2 Installation Process This section describes the process for installing the BBU in an OMB. 16.3 Installing an OMB This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an OMB on a pole and on a wall. 16.4 Installing the BBU This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the BBU. 16.5 Installing the GPS Surge Protector The GPS surge protector can be installed at a site to provide surge protection for GPS signals. 16.6 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. 16.7 Installation Checklist After the cabinets and devices are all installed, you need to check the installation items, installation environment, and cable-related items. 16.8 Powering On a Base Station This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply to the components in a cabinet. 16.9 Repainting Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1210



The paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept intact. Therefore, any damaged paint must be repaired.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1211



16.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing the OMB and IBBS20D on a pole or a wall.

Clearance Requirements for Installation on a Pole An OMB can be installed on a pole at a height less than or equal to 10 m (32.81 ft). The diameter of the pole ranges from 60 mm (2.36 in.) to 114 mm (4.49 in.). The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing an OMB on a pole. Figure 16-1 Clearance requirements for installing an OMB on a pole

Clearance Requirements for Installation on a Wall The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing an OMB on a wall.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1212



Figure 16-2 Clearance requirements for installing an OMB on a wall

16.2 Installation Process This section describes the process for installing the BBU in an OMB. The following figure shows the installation process.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1213




NOTE

l For details about how to install an RRU, see the related RRU installation guides. l The outdoor cable conversion box (OCB) is used to connect cables with different cross-sectional areas, and it is optional. For details about an OCB, see the OCB User Guide.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1214



16.3 Installing an OMB This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an OMB on a pole and on a wall.

16.3.1 Installing an OMB on a Pole This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an OMB on a pole.

Context l


l

The diameter of a pole is 60 mm to 114 mm (2.36 in. to 4.49 in.).

Procedure Step 1 Install the upper bracket assembly on a pole, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Put M10x110 bolts through spring washers, flat washers, and bracket assemblies in sequence, and then use a torque wrench to secure them until the tightening torque reaches 28 N·m (247.81 lbf·in.).

2.

Use a level to check whether the bracket assemblies are on a horizontal plane. NOTE

When securing the upper or lower bracket assemblies, you need to secure two bolts alternatively. After the main and auxiliary brackets are secured properly, measure the space between the brackets on both sides and ensure that the space is the same on the two sides.

Figure 16-4 Installing the upper bracket assembly

(1) Auxiliary bracket

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Main bracket

(3) Flat washers

(4) Spring washers


(5) M10x110 bolts

1215



Step 2 Put M10x40 bolts through spring washers and flat washers in sequence, and then secure the back mounting plate onto the main bracket of the lower bracket assembly until the tightening torque reaches 28 N·m (247.81 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-5 Installing a back mounting plate on the lower bracket assembly

Step 3 Put M10x40 bolts through spring washers and flat washers in sequence, and then secure the back mounting plate onto the main bracket of the upper bracket assembly until the tightening torque reaches 28 N·m (247.81 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-6 Installing the back mounting plate onto the main bracket of the upper bracket assembly

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1216



Step 4 Put M10x110 bolts through spring washers and flat washers in sequence, and then secure the auxiliary bracket of the lower bracket assembly onto the main bracket until the tightening torque reaches 28 N·m (247.81 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-7 Installing the auxiliary bracket of the lower bracket assembly

Step 5 Align the hooks on the OMB cabinet with the slots in the back mounting plate, hook the cabinet onto the brackets, use M6x16 screws to secure the back mounting plate to the attachment plate at the bottom of the OMB, and tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-8 Installing an OMB

----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1217



16.3.2 Installing an OMB on a Wall This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an OMB on a wall.

Context NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Mark four anchor points according to the installation holes in the back mounting plate, and use a level to check whether the line between upper anchor points and the line between lower anchor points are horizontal, as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-9 Marking the anchor points

Step 2 Drill holes at the anchor points and install expansion bolts in the holes, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1218



Figure 16-10 Installing the expansion bolts

(1) M10x60 bolt

1.

(2) Spring washer

(3) Plastic tube

(4) Flat washer

(5) Expansion tube


NOTICE Wear a mask or take other measures to protect your eyes against the dust. NOTE

The depth of holes should be within the range of 52 mm (2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.). Otherwise, expansion bolts cannot be installed or secured properly.

2.


3.

Partially tighten each expansion bolts, place it vertically into the hole, and use a rubber mallet to pound it until the expansion tube completely enters the hole.

4.

Securely tighten the expansion bolt.

5.

Loosen the expansion bolt, and remove the M10x60 bolt, spring washer, plastic tube, and flat washer in sequence. NOTE

After removing the expansion bolt from the wall, dispose of the plastic tube.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1219



Step 3 Align the installation holes in the back mounting plate with the holes in the wall, secure the back mounting plate onto the wall until the tightening torque reaches 28 N·m (247.82 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-11 Installing the back mounting plate

Step 4 Align the hooks on the OMB cabinet with the slots in the back mounting plate, hook the cabinet onto the brackets, use M6x16 screws to secure the back mounting plate to the attachment plate at the bottom of the OMB, and tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-12 Installing an OMB on a wall

----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1220



16.4 Installing the BBU This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the BBU.

Context l


l




l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1221




l

The installation position of the BBU in the APM30H (Ver.B) is the same as that in the APM30H (Ver.C), and the installation position of the BBU in the TMC11H (Ver.B) is the same as that in the TMC11H (Ver.C), as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-15 Positions for installing the BBUs


l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


The following figure shows the installation position of the BBU in the OMB, OMB (Ver.C), or IMB03.


1222



Figure 16-16 Installation position of the BBU in the OMB, OMB (Ver.C), or IMB03

l

The following figure shows the installation position of the BBU in the INS12. Figure 16-17 Installation position of the BBU in the INS12

l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

The following figure shows the installation position of the BBU in the TP48600A.


1223



Figure 16-18 Installation position of the BBU in the TP48600A


Remove the mounting ears on the BBU, as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-19 Removing the mounting ears on the BBU

2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Remove the two ground screws, as shown in the following figure.


1224



Figure 16-20 Removing the ground screws

3.

Reinstall the mounting ears in standard mode, as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-21 Reinstalling the mounting ears in standard mode

Step 2 Optional: Install cable claws for the BBU in the APM30H or TMC11H. Align a cable claw with the holes on one side of the BBU. Then use two M4 screws to secure the cable claw to the BBU and tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1225



Figure 16-22 Installing a cable claw on the BBU




----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1226



16.5 Installing the GPS Surge Protector The GPS surge protector can be installed at a site to provide surge protection for GPS signals.





2.


3.


4.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1227




(1) Satellite card


Step 3 Optional: Install the USCU in the BBU, and tighten the captive screws on the USCU to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.). Step 4 Use two M4 screws to install a surge protection support onto the bottom of the OMB, and tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1228



Figure 16-26 Installing the support

Step 5 Install the GPS clock signal cable on the support, partially tighten the connector at one end of the clock signal cable by hands, and then use a torque wrench to tighten the connector to 1 N·m (8.85 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-27 Partially tightening the GPS clock signal cable

Step 6 Install the GPS surge protector, connect the GPS clock signal cable and GPS jumper to the Protect and Surge ports on the GPS surge protector, respectively, and waterproof the connectors, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1229



Figure 16-28 Installing the GPS clock signal cable and GPS jumper

Step 7 Prepare a PGND cable for the GPS surge protector. 1.


2.

Add an M6 OT terminal to one end of the cable and an M8 OT terminal to the other end of the cable, as shown in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 8 Connect M8 OT end of the PGND cable to the ground terminal on the surge protector and M6 OT end to the ground terminal on the OMB, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

It is recommended that the PGND cable for the GPS surge protector is routed and bound in the way shown in the following figure.

Figure 16-29 Installing the PGND cable for the GPS surge protector

Step 9 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 10 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label. ----End Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1230








l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l




l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1231





l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l


l




l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)




1232




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1233




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1234



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1235



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1236





l


l


l


16.6.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules This section describes the procedures for removing and installing cable outlet modules at the bottom of an OMB.

Context During cable layout, you need to remove the cable outlet module at the bottom of the OMB, route the cable through a cable hole in the cable outlet module, and then reinstall the cable outlet module at the bottom of the OMB for effective sealing. NOTE

The procedure for installing the cable outlet module on the bottom left side is the same as that on the bottom right side. The following description is based on the cable outlet module on the bottom right side.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1237



l

Cable outlet modules are installed on the bottom left and right sides of the OMB, as shown in Figure 16-38. Figure 16-38 Position of cable outlet modules

l

There are multiple cable holes in each cable outlet module at the bottom of the OMB. Figure 16-39 shows the cable holes in the left cable outlet module, and Figure 16-40 shows the cable holes in the right cable outlet module. Figure 16-39 Cable holes in the left cable outlet module

(1) Cable holes for CPRI fiber optic cables


(2) Cable holes for RF jumpers

(7) Cable hole for the alarm cable

(3) Cable hole for the GPS clock signal cable (8) Cable hole for the monitoring signal cable for an outer air circulation fan

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(4) Cable hole for the alarm cable

(9) Reserved

(5) Cable holes for the transmission cables

-


1238



Figure 16-40 Cable holes in the right cable outlet module

(1) Cable holes for DC input power cables

(2) Cable holes for DC input power cables

(3) Reserved

(4) RRU power cables

(5) Cable hole for an AC input power cable

-

NOTE

In the DC scenario, a group of power cables are used when three RRUs are installed and two groups of power cables are used when six RRUs are installed.

Procedure Step 1 Remove the bolts and baffle plate from the cable outlet module, and then remove the cable outlet module from the cable trough at the bottom of the OMB, as shown in Figure 16-41.

NOTICE The bolt must be stored properly after it is removed and be reinstalled after the cables are routed.

Figure 16-41 Removing the cable outlet module

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1239



Step 2 Remove the rubber plugs from the corresponding cable holes according to the labels near the cable holes, and lead the cables through the cable holes. Step 3 Place the cable outlet module in the cable trough at the bottom of the OMB, and reinstall the baffle plate and bolts, as shown in Figure 16-42. Figure 16-42 Installing the cable outlet module

----End

16.6.3 Installing a PGND Cable This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a PGND cable.

Context The following table lists the specifications of the PGND cable between an OMB and an OMB (Ver.C). Table 16-1 Specifications of a PGND cable Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

PGND cable



Green and yellow



2.


Step 2 Install the PGND cables for an OMB, and an OMB (Ver.C), as shown in Figure 16-43, and Figure 16-44, respectively. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1240



1.

Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar at the bottom of the OMB/OMB (Ver.C), and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the M6 screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

2.

Route the other end of the PGND cable out of the cabinet from the cable outlet module at the bottom to the external ground bar. NOTE

For how to install a cable outlet module for an OMB, see 17.5.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules. For how to install a cable outlet module for an OMB (Ver.C), see 16.6.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules.

Figure 16-43 Installing a PGND cable for the OMB

Figure 16-44 Installing a PGND cable for the OMB (Ver.C)



1241



Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label. ----End


Installing Input Power Cable for the OMB The input power cable for the OMB feeds power into the components in the OMB from the external power equipment.

Context The input power cable is classified into the DC input power cable and the AC input power cable, as listed in the following table. Table 16-2 Specifications of the input power cable Cable

Color

One End

The Other End


Depending on the external power equipment

DC input power cable

RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue

AC input power cable

L

Brown

N

Blue

PE

Green and yellow


NOTE


Procedure l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Install the DC input power cable. 1.


2.

Route the cable into the cabinet through the cable outlet module.

3.

Add OT terminals at one end of the cable according to the instructions in Table 16-2. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable

4.

Connect one end of the DC input power cable to the external input terminals NEG(-) and RTN(+) on the PDU10D-01, and connect the other end of the cable to the external power equipment, as shown in the following figure.


1242



Figure 16-45 Installing the DC input power cable

l

5.

Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind it.

6.

Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label.

Install the AC input power cable. 1.


2.

Add OT terminals at one end of the cable according to the instructions in Table 16-2. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable

3.

Route the cable into the cabinet through the cable outlet module.

4.

Connect one end of the cable to the external AC input terminals L, N, and PE on the PDU10D-01, and connect the other end of the cable to the external power equipment, as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-46 Installing the AC input power cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1243



5.

Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind it.

6.


----End

Installing BBU Power Cables This section describes how to install a BBU power cable which feeds -48 V DC power into a BBU.

Context The following table lists the specifications of a BBU power cable. Table 16-3 Specifications of a BBU power cable Cable

One End

The Other End

BBU power cable

3V3 connector

EPC4 connector

Procedure Step 1 Remove the EPC4 connector on the BBU power cable from the PDU10D-01.

CAUTION The EPC4 connector at the other end of the BBU power cable has been connected to the power equipment before delivery. You need to remove the connector from the power equipment before connecting the connector to the BBU. Operations in the reverse sequence may cause personal injury. Step 2 Connect the 3V3 connector on the BBU power cable to the -48V port on the UPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1244




Step 3 Reconnect the EPC4 connector on the BBU power cable to the original position on the PDU10D-01. Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. ----End

Installing RRU Power Cables This section describes how to install an RRU power cable which feeds power into an RRU from the power equipment.

Prerequisites The following tools are available: a torque screwdriver, a utility knife, a cable cutter, and a multipurpose crimping tool.

Context The following table lists the specifications of an RRU power cable.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1245



Table 16-4 Specifications of an RRU power cable Cable RRU power cable

RTN (+)

Color

One End

The Other End

Black(North American)

EPC5 connector


Brown(European) NEG (-)

Blue

NOTE

l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l The type of connector at the other end of an RRU power cable depends on the model of the RRU to which the power cable is connected. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installation guide.

Procedure Step 1 Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route. Step 2 Route the RRU power cable into the OMB through a cable outlet module. Step 3 At the position 50 mm (1.97 in.) away from the cable outlet module, strip 40 mm (1.57 in.) long jacket off the cables at the end to be connected to the PDU10D-01 to expose the shield layers. Step 4 Add EPC5 connector to the end of the RRU power cables to be connected to the PDU10D-01 following the instructions in Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable. Step 5 Twist the shield layers of the RRU power cable into one strand, thread the strand of shield layers through the ground clip, and tighten the M4 screws on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1246




(1) Shield layer

Step 6 Add correct connectors to the RRU power cables and connect the connectors to the RRU. Step 7 Connect the EPC5 connector at the other end of the RRU power cables to LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the PDU10D-01, as shown in Figure 16-49. NOTE

A PDU10D-01 can supply power to a maximum of six RRUs. An RRU power cable can be connected to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the PDU10D-01.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1247



Figure 16-49 Installing RRU power cables




Prerequisites l

The procedure for installing E1/T1 cables in an AC OMB is the same as that in a DC OMB, and for detailed procedures, see the following steps.

l

This section describes procedure for installing the E1/T1 cables in a GU base station using separate transmission. For cable connections for the E1/T1 Ethernet in other types of base stations, see section "Transmission Cable Connections' in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1248



Procedure Step 1 Connect the DB26 male connector on the E1/T1 cable to an OUTSIDE port on the UELP in the BBU, and tighten the plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-50 Installing the E1/T1 cable

Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cable outlet module on the bottom left of the OMB cabinet, and connect the cable to the external transmission equipment. For details about installing the cable outlet module. Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. ----End


Context l


l

This section uses the scenario where the UFLP is configured as an example. For details about cable connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

l

The procedure for installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable in an AC OMB is the same as that in a DC OMB.

Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE/GE0 or FE/GE1 port near the OUTSIDE silkscreen on the UFLP in the BBU, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1249




Step 2 At a position 50 mm (1.79 in.) away from the cable outlet module, strip a length of 40 mm (1.57 in.) jacket off the FE/GE Ethernet cable to expose the shield layer. Route the cable through the ground clip to ensure full contact between the shield layer and the ground clip, and then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-52 Installing the ground clip

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1250



Step 3 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable out of the cable outlet module on the bottom left of the cabinet, and connect the cable to the external transmission equipment. Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. ----End


Context l


l

The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode optical module is black or gray.

l


l

This section describes the procedure for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in a GU base station using separate transmission mode. For FE/GE fiber optic cable connections in base stations of other modes, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

l

The procedures for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an AC OMB and a DC OMB are the same.




2.


3.


4.


5.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1251





Step 2 Insert the FE/GE fiber optic cable into the optical module, as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-55 Installing FE/GE fiber optic cables

Step 3 Route the FE/GE fiber optic cables along the left side of the OMB, out of the OMB through the cable outlet module, and to the external transmission equipment. Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. ----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1252



16.6.6 Installing an HEUB-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable This section describes the procedure for installing a monitoring signal cable between the HEUB and BBU.

Context The following description uses the DC OMB as an example. The procedure is the same for installing an HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable in an AC OMB.

Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU, as shown in the following figure. Figure 16-56 Installing the HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable

NOTE

The RJ45 connector at the HEUB end of the HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable has been installed before delivery.

Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind it. Step 3 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1253





2.



16.6.8 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables This section describes the procedure for installing CPRI fiber optic cables which transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RRUs.

Context l


l


l


NOTICE The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20 minutes. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1254





2.


3.


4.


5.






2.

Lay out the CPRI fiber optic cables along the inner left side of the cabinet, route them out of the cabinet from the cable module on the bottom of the cabinet, and to corresponding RRUs.

3.

Install the same type of optical modules on the CPRI ports of the RRU and BBU side. NOTE

Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type.

4.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors at the end labeled 1A and 1B on the fiber optic cables, and insert the connectors into the optical module in the RRU.


1255



NOTICE If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX and RX ports on the BBU must be connected to the TX and RX ports on the RRU, respectively. Figure 16-60 Removing the dustproof caps from the fiber optic cable

Figure 16-61 Installing CPRI fiber optic cables


16.7 Installation Checklist After the cabinets and devices are all installed, you need to check the installation items, installation environment, and cable-related items. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1256



Cabinet Installation Checklist The following table lists the standards for checking the installed cabinets. Table 16-5 Cabinet installation checklist No.

Check Item

1


2

If the cabinet is installed on a wall, the holes in mounting ears fit the holes for expansion bolts, and the mounting ears are secured on the wall evenly and steadily.

3

If the cabinet is installed on a pole, the mounting bracket is securely installed.

4

The horizontal deviation of the cabinet is smaller than 3 mm (0.12 in.), and the vertical deviation is smaller than or equal to 3 mm (0.12 in.).

5

All the bolts, especially those for electrical connections, are tightened. Both the spring washers and the flat washers are installed in a correct sequence.

6


7

The paint on the surface is intact. The damaged paint is repaired.

8

Filler panels are installed in the space reserved for customer equipment.

9

The locks of the doors on the cabinet work properly, and the stop bolt is secured.

10


Installation Environment Checklist The following table lists the standards for checking the environment of installed cabinets. Table 16-6 Installation environment checklist No.

Check Item

1

The cabinet surface is clean.

2


3


4

All devices around the cabinet are neat and clean.

Electrical Connection Checklist The following table lists the standards for checking the electrical connections of installed cabinets. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1257




Item

1


2

The PGND cable is securely connected, the AC input power cables and cables in the cabinet are correctly connected, and the screws are tightened according to the electrical design of the power system. In addition, the inputs or outputs are not shortcircuited.

3

The redundant part of the power cable or the PGND cable is cut off rather than coiled.

4

The terminals at both ends of the power cable or the PGND cable are securely soldered or crimped.

5

The bare wires and the terminal handles connected to the wiring terminals are coated with heat shrink tubing.

6

The flat washers and the spring washers are well mounted on all OT terminals. The contact surfaces of the OT terminals are not distorted.

Cable Installation Checklist The following table lists the standards for checking the installed cables. Table 16-8 Cable installation checklist

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3

Different types of cables, such as the power cables, PGND cables, feeders, fiber optic cables, transmission cables, and signal cables are separately bound. The distance between each two types of cables is more than 30 mm (1.18 in.).

4

The cable layout facilitates the maintenance and capacity expansion, and the maintenance transfer cable is bound to a cable holder near the BBU.

5


6


7

All vacant ports are properly protected.


1258



No.

Item

8

The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid the abnormal voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) caused by false connection.

BBU Hardware Installation Checklist The following table lists the standards for checking the installed BBU hardware. Table 16-9 BBU hardware installation checklist

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Check Item

1

All self-made PGND cables are copper-based with proper core diameters and no cables are connected in series or in parallel. There should not be any switch or fuse in the grounding system. No short circuit is allowed. One terminal on the ground bar is connected to only one PGND cable.

2


3


4


5


6

All the cable connectors, including those at the bottom of the cabinet interior, are securely connected.

7


8


9

The cable layout facilitates maintenance and capacity expansion, and the bending radius of the cable meets the requirements.

10


11


12



1259




Prerequisites l

External input power cables for the OMB (Ver.C) are correctly connected.

l

The power supply to the OMB (Ver.C) meets the power system requirements.

l

The external power supply to the OMB (Ver.C) are shut off.

l

All circuit breakers in the OMB (Ver.C) are set to OFF.

l

Circuit breakers on the BBU are set to OFF.

l

Boards, modules, and cables are installed in the cabinet.

Context



Table 16-10 Circuit breakers in an OMB (Ver.C) Cabinet

Power Device

Circuit Breaker

OMB (Ver.C)

ETP48100-A1 or PDU10D-01

l LOAD0/LOAD1 on the ETP48100-A1 controls power outputs.

Operation Procedure The following figure shows the power-on check process for a base station using the DC OMB (Ver.C). Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1260



Figure 16-62 Power-on check process for the DC-powered OMB (Ver.C)

The following figure shows the power-on check process for a base station using the AC OMB (Ver.C).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1261



Figure 16-63 Power-on check process for the AC-powered OMB (Ver.C)

Procedure Step 1 Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit. Step 2 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the OMB (Ver.C). Step 3 Set the circuit breaker on the ETP48100-A1 to ON. Step 4 Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON, and check the power supply to components in the cabinet according to the following table.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1262




Component


OMB (Ver.C)

PMU


PSU



BBU

l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on. l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s). l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s). The CPRI indicator is not steady red.a

RRU subrack

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s).

RRU

l The ALM indicator is steady off. a: If the CPRI indicator is steady red, the optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is broken. In this case, check the optical module or fiber optic cable.

NOTE



Handling Measure



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1263



Failure Type

Handling Measure





----End

16.9 Repainting The paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept intact. Therefore, any damaged paint must be repaired.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1264




Color

Huawei Code

International Code

Cabinet

RAL7035

YB026

RAL7035

Base

3010 light gray

YB030

Pantone 422U



Step 3 Paint the surface of the cabinet with paint of the same color. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1265



Step 4 Shake the bottle of the paint, open the bottle, and saturate the brush with the paint. Then apply the paint evenly to the damaged area until no scar can be observed, as shown in the following figures.





----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1266


17 Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB

17

Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB

About This Chapter A BBU can be installed in an OMB in outdoor AC and DC scenarios. This section describes the process for installing an OMB, components in the OMB, and related cables. 17.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the recommended installation clearance and minimum clearance requirements for in stalling an OMB. 17.2 Installation Process When the DBS3900 is deployed outdoors and the BBU is installed in an OMB, you need to install the OMB, components in the OMB, and related cables onsite. Some optional components may also need to be installed based on site requirements. 17.3 Installing an OMB This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an OMB on a pole and on a wall. 17.4 Installing the BBU This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the BBU. 17.5 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. 17.6 Installation Checklist After the cabinets and devices are all installed, you need to check the installation items, installation environment, and cable-related items. 17.7 Powering On a Base Station This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply to the components in a cabinet. 17.8 Repainting

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1267



The paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept intact. Therefore, any damaged paint must be repaired.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1268



17.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the recommended installation clearance and minimum clearance requirements for in stalling an OMB.

Recommended Installation Clearances The following figure shows the recommended clearance requirements for installing an OMB. Figure 17-1 Recommended installation clearances

Minimum Installation Clearances Figure 17-2 shows the minimum clearances for installing an OMB.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1269



Figure 17-2 Minimum installation clearances

17.2 Installation Process When the DBS3900 is deployed outdoors and the BBU is installed in an OMB, you need to install the OMB, components in the OMB, and related cables onsite. Some optional components may also need to be installed based on site requirements. The following figure shows the installation process.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1270




NOTE

l For details about how to install an AAU, see the related AAU installation guides. l For details about how to install an RRU, see the related RRU installation guides. l The outdoor cable conversion box (OCB) is used to connect cables with different cross-sectional areas, and it is optional. For details about an OCB, see the OCB User Guide.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1271



17.3 Installing an OMB This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an OMB on a pole and on a wall.

17.3.1 Installing an OMB on a Pole This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an OMB on a pole.

Context l


l

The diameter of a pole is 60 mm to 114 mm (2.36 in. to 4.49 in.).

Procedure Step 1 Install the upper bracket assembly on a pole, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Put M10x110 bolts through spring washers, flat washers, and bracket assemblies in sequence, and then use a torque wrench to secure them until the tightening torque reaches 28 N·m (247.81 lbf·in.).

2.

Use a level to check whether the bracket assemblies are on a horizontal plane. NOTE

When securing the upper or lower bracket assemblies, you need to secure two bolts alternatively. After the main and auxiliary brackets are secured properly, measure the space between the brackets on both sides and ensure that the space is the same on the two sides.

Figure 17-4 Installing the upper bracket assembly

(1) Auxiliary bracket

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Main bracket

(3) Flat washers

(4) Spring washers


(5) M10x110 bolts

1272



Step 2 Put M10x40 bolts through spring washers and flat washers in sequence, and then secure the back mounting plate onto the main bracket of the lower bracket assembly until the tightening torque reaches 28 N·m (247.81 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 17-5 Installing a back mounting plate on the lower bracket assembly

Step 3 Put M10x40 bolts through spring washers and flat washers in sequence, and then secure the back mounting plate onto the main bracket of the upper bracket assembly until the tightening torque reaches 28 N·m (247.81 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 17-6 Installing the back mounting plate onto the main bracket of the upper bracket assembly

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1273



Step 4 Put M10x110 bolts through spring washers and flat washers in sequence, and then secure the auxiliary bracket of the lower bracket assembly onto the main bracket until the tightening torque reaches 28 N·m (247.81 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 17-7 Installing the auxiliary bracket of the lower bracket assembly

Step 5 Align the hooks on the OMB cabinet with the slots in the back mounting plate, hook the cabinet onto the brackets, use M6x16 screws to secure the back mounting plate to the attachment plate at the bottom of the OMB, and tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 17-8 Installing an OMB

----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1274



17.3.2 Installing an OMB on a Wall This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an OMB on a wall.

Context NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Mark four anchor points according to the installation holes in the back mounting plate, and use a level to check whether the line between upper anchor points and the line between lower anchor points are horizontal, as shown in the following figure. Figure 17-9 Marking the anchor points

Step 2 Drill holes at the anchor points and install expansion bolts in the holes, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1275



Figure 17-10 Installing the expansion bolts

(1) M10x60 bolt

1.

(2) Spring washer

(3) Plastic tube

(4) Flat washer

(5) Expansion tube


NOTICE Wear a mask or take other measures to protect your eyes against the dust. NOTE

The depth of holes should be within the range of 52 mm (2.05 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.). Otherwise, expansion bolts cannot be installed or secured properly.

2.


3.

Partially tighten each expansion bolts, place it vertically into the hole, and use a rubber mallet to pound it until the expansion tube completely enters the hole.

4.

Securely tighten the expansion bolt.

5.

Loosen the expansion bolt, and remove the M10x60 bolt, spring washer, plastic tube, and flat washer in sequence. NOTE

After removing the expansion bolt from the wall, dispose of the plastic tube.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1276



Step 3 Align the installation holes in the back mounting plate with the holes in the wall, secure the back mounting plate onto the wall until the tightening torque reaches 28 N·m (247.82 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 17-11 Installing the back mounting plate

Step 4 Align the hooks on the OMB cabinet with the slots in the back mounting plate, hook the cabinet onto the brackets, use M6x16 screws to secure the back mounting plate to the attachment plate at the bottom of the OMB, and tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 17-12 Installing an OMB on a wall

----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1277



17.4 Installing the BBU This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the BBU.

Context l


l




l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1278




l



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)




1279




l


l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1280






2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1281




3.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1282







----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1283








l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l




l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1284





l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l


l




l




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)




1285




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1286




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1287



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1288



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1289





l


l


l


17.5.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules During cable layout, you need to remove the cable outlet modules at the bottom of the OMB, route the cables through the cable holes in the cable outlet module, and then reinstall the cable outlet modules at the bottom of the OMB for effective sealing.

Context l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cable outlet modules are installed on the bottom left and the bottom right of the OMB, as shown in the following figure.


1290



Figure 17-32 Position of cable outlet modules

l

There are multiple cable holes in each cable outlet module at the bottom of the OMB. Figure 17-33 shows the cable holes in the left cable outlet module, and Figure 17-34 shows the cable holes in the right cable outlet module. Figure 17-33 Cable holes in the left cable outlet module

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1291



Figure 17-34 Cable holes in the right cable outlet module

Procedure Step 1 Remove the bolt and baffle plate from the cable outlet module, and then remove the cable outlet module from the cable trough at the bottom of the OMB, as shown in the following figure. Figure 17-35 Removing the cable outlet module

Step 2 Remove the rubber plugs from the corresponding cable holes according to the labels near the cable holes, and route the cables through the cable holes. Step 3 Place the cable outlet module in the cable trough at the bottom of the OMB, and reinstall the baffle plate and the bolt, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1292



Figure 17-36 Installing the cable outlet module

----End

17.5.3 Installing a PGND Cable This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a PGND cable.

Context The following table lists the specifications of the PGND cable between an OMB and an OMB (Ver.C). Table 17-2 Specifications of a PGND cable Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

PGND cable



Green and yellow



2.


Step 2 Install the PGND cables for an OMB, and an OMB (Ver.C), as shown in Figure 17-37, and Figure 17-38, respectively. 1.

Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar at the bottom of the OMB/OMB (Ver.C), and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the M6 screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

2.

Route the other end of the PGND cable out of the cabinet from the cable outlet module at the bottom to the external ground bar. NOTE

For how to install a cable outlet module for an OMB, see 17.5.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules. For how to install a cable outlet module for an OMB (Ver.C), see 16.6.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1293



Figure 17-37 Installing a PGND cable for the OMB

Figure 17-38 Installing a PGND cable for the OMB (Ver.C)



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1294



Installing Input Power Cables for the OMB Input power cables for the OMB feed the external power into the components in the OMB. The cables consist of the EPS30-4815AF power cable and DCDU-03B power cables according to different power equipment.

Context When an OMB uses 220 V AC single-phase and 110 V AC dual-live-wire, the EPS30-4815AF supplies power to the components in the OMB. In this case, the AC input power cable is listed in the following table. Table 17-3 Specifications of the input power cable for the OMB Cable

One End

The Other End

Color

EPS30-4815AF power cable in a 220 V AC single-phase scenario



Black cable with three wires (blue, brown, and green and yellow)

EPS30-4815AF power cable in a 110 V AC duallive-wire scenario

Black cable with four wires (black, red, white, and green)

When an OMB uses -48 V DC power, the DCDU-03B supplies power to the components in the OMB. In this case, the DC input power cables are listed in the following table. Table 17-4 Specifications of DCDU-03B power cables Cable DCDU-03B power cables (-48 V)

RTN (+) NEG (-)

One End

The Other End

Color



Black Blue

NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Prepare DCDU-03B power cables. 1.


2.

Add OT terminals at each end of the cables according to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1295



Step 2 Install the EPS30-4815AF power cable or DCDU-03B power cables. l In AC scenarios, when the 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied to the OMB, the OT terminals at the blue, brown, and green and yellow wires of the EPS30-4815AF power cable are connected to the external input terminals N, L, and PE, as shown in Figure 17-41. l When the DC power is supplied to the OMB, the OT terminals at one end of the DCDU-03B power cables are connected to the NEG(-) and RTN(+) terminals on the DCDU-03B, as shown in the following figure. Figure 17-41 Installing the EPS30-4815AF power cable

Figure 17-42 Installing the DCDU-03B power cables

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1296



Step 3 Route the other end of the power cable through the cable outlet module on the bottom right side of the cabinet, and then connect the cable to the external power equipment. For details about how to install a cable outlet module, see 17.5.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules. Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole on the cabinet. Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. ----End

Installing BBU Power Cables This section describes how to install BBU power cables in an OMB in AC and DC scenarios.


Power Equipmen t

One End

The Other End

Color

BBU power cable (in an AC-powered OMB)

EPS30-481 5AF

H4 connector

3V3 connector

-

BBU power cable (in a DC-powered OMB)

DCDU-03B

3V3 connector


Black

RTN(+) NEG(-)

Blue

NOTE


Procedure l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Install the BBU power cable in an AC-powered OMB, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port on the UPEU in the BBU. Then tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).

2.

Connect the other 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the DC INPUT port on the HEUA.

3.

Connect the H4 connector at the other end of the BBU power cable to the LOAD1 port on the EPS30-4815AF. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1297



Figure 17-43 Installing a BBU power cable (in an AC-powered OMB)

l

4.

Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them.

5.


Install the BBU power cable in a DC-powered OMB, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Add OT terminals to the BBU power cable. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. NOTE

A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. OT terminals must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.

2.


3.

Connect the OT terminals on the blue wire and black wire at the other end of the BBU power cable to the NEG(-) and RTN(+) terminals, respectively, near the LOAD6 silkscreen on the DCDU-03B. NOTE

When the BBU is configured with two UPEUs, each UPEU must be connected to the power equipment by using a BBU power cable. The 3V3 connectors at one end of the BBU power cables are connected to the -48V ports on the UPEUs, and the tool-less female connectors (pressfit type) at the other end are connected to the LOAD6 and LOAD7 ports on the DCDU-03B.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1298



Figure 17-44 Installing BBU power cables (in a DC-powered OMB)

4.


5.


----End

Installing RRU Power Cables This section describes the procedure for installing the RRU power cables in the OMB in AC and DC scenarios.

Context The specifications of an RRU power cable are the same when the EPS30-4815AF or the DCDU-03B supplies power to the RRUs, as shown in the following table. Table 17-6 Specifications of an RRU power cable Cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Color

One End

The Other End



RRU power cable (North America n standard)

RTN (+)

Black

NEG (-)

Blue

RRU power cable (Europea n standard)

RTN (+)

Brown

NEG (-)

Blue



1299


17 Outdoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an OMB NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Prepare an RRU power cable. 1.


2.

Add OT terminals to the blue and black (or brown) wires of the RRU power cable on the power equipment side, as shown in Adding OT Terminals to the DC RRU Power Cable on the DCDU Side.

3.

Prepare the OT terminal or tool-less female connector (pressfit type) on the power cable on the RRU side based on the type of power port on the RRU. For details, see the related RRU installation guide.

Step 2 Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the RRU side to the power port on the RRU. Step 3 In the position 20 cm (7.87 in.) away from the cable outlet module, strip the jacket for about 40 mm (1.57 in.) off the RRU power cable to expose the shield layer. Thread the cable through the ground clip to ensure full contact between the shield layer and the ground clip, and then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1300




Step 4 Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the power equipment side to the power equipment. l In an AC-powered OMB, connect the OT terminals on the blue and black (or brown) wires of the power cable to the NEG(-) and RTN(+) terminals on the PDU of the EPS30-4815AF, respectively, then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 17-47. l In a DC-powered OMB, connect the OT terminals on the blue and black (or brown) wires to the NEG(-) and RTN(+) terminals near the LOAD0 silkscreen on the DCDU-03B respectively, then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 17-47. NOTE

l When 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power is supplied and an EPS30-4815AF is used, only one multimode RRU is supported. l No surge protection is required for DC power supply. In this case, the maximum length of an RRU power cable is 5 m (16.4 ft.). l When -48 V DC power is supplied, three DC multimode RRUs are supported, and the RRU power cables can be connected to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 terminals on the DCDU-03B.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1301



Figure 17-47 Installing an RRU power cable in an AC-powered OMB

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1302



Figure 17-48 Installing an RRU power cable in a DC-powered OMB



Installing the E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable The E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connects the transmission board and surge protection unit for transferring surge protection signals.

Context This section uses the scenario where the UMPT is configured in an LO only base station as an example. For details about cable connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1303



Procedure Step 1 Install the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the DB26 connector at one end of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable to the E1/T1 port on the UMPT, GTMU, UTRP, or WMPT in the BBU, and then tighten the plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).

2.

Connect the DB25 connector at the other end of the E1/T1 cable to the INSIDE port on the UELP in the BBU, and tighten the plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).



Installing the E1/T1 Cables When the DBS3900 is applied to the outdoor scenario and the BBU is installed in the OMB, the E1/T1 cables connect the surge protection unit and the external transmission equipment to transmit the E1/T1 signals.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1304



Prerequisites

CAUTION Ensure that both ends of the E1 cable are disconnected from any equipment. Then solder a connector to each E1/T1 cable during the same session. This section uses the scenario where the UMPT is configured in an LO only base station as an example. For details about cable connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

Procedure Step 1 Install the E1/T1 cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the DB26 male connector at one end of the E1/T1 cable to the OUTSIDE port on the UELP in the BBU, and tighten the plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).

2.

Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet module on the bottom right of the cabinet, and then connect the cable to the external transmission equipment. For details about installing the cable outlet module, see 17.5.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules. Figure 17-50 Installing the E1/T1 cable



1305




Installing the FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable The FE/GE surge protection transfer cable connects the transmission board and UFLP for transferring surge protection signals.

Context l

This section uses the scenario where the UMPT is configured in an LO only base station as an example. For details about cable connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

l

An UFLPb applies only to the LTE mode.

Procedure Step 1 Install the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to the FE/GE0 port on the UMPT/LMPT or to the FE/GE port on the UTRP.

2.

Connect the other end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to the FE/GE0 or FE/ GE1 port near the INSIDE silkscreen on the UFLPB.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1306




Installing the FE/GE Ethernet Cables When the DBS3900 is applied to the outdoor scenario, the FE/GE Ethernet cables connect the surge protection unit and the external transmission equipment to transmit the FE/GE signals.

Context l


l

This section uses the scenario where the UFLPb is configured as an example. For cable connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

l


Procedure Step 1 Install the FE/GE Ethernet cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE/GE0 or FE/GE1 port near the OUTSIDE silkscreen on the UFLPb in the BBU.

2.

Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet module on the bottom right of the cabinet, and then connect the cable to the external transmission equipment. For details about installing the cable outlet module, see 17.5.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1307




Step 2 Install a ground clip onto the FE/GE Ethernet cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Strip a length of 40 mm (1.57 in.) jacket off the FE/GE Ethernet cable at the position 200 mm (7.81 in.) away from the cable outlet module to expose the shield layer.

2.

Loosen the screw on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE cable through the clip.

3.

Attach the ground clip to the shield layer of the FE/GE Ethernet cable and tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1308






Context l


l


l


l

For details about the connections of CPRI fiber optic cables, see "CPRI Cable Connections" in BTS900A Hardware Description.

l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1309



l

The cable described in this section is used for the LMPT in an LO base station. For the cable connections in base stations of other modes, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.




2.


3.


4.


5.




Step 2 Insert the FE/GE fiber optic cable into the optical module, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1310




Step 3 Route the FE/GE fiber optic cables along the cable outlet module on the bottom right side of the cabinet, out of the cabinet, and to the external transmission equipment. For details about how to install a cable outlet module, see 17.5.2 Installing Cable Outlet Modules. Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label. ----End

17.5.6 Installing an HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable When the BBU is installed in the OMB, you need to install only one HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable onsite.

Procedure Step 1 Install an HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM IN port on the HEUA on the OMB door.

2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1311



Figure 17-57 Installing the HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable





2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1312






Context NOTE





1313



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.






2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1314





17.5.9 (Optional) Installing the GPS Clock Signal Cable A GPS clock signal cable transmits GPS clock signals received from the GPS antenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1315





2.


3.


4.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1316




(1) Satellite card


Step 3 Optional: Install the USCU in the BBU, and tighten the captive screws on the USCU to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.). Step 4 Connect the GPS clock signal cable to the GPS port on the USCU, LMPT, or UMPTa6, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

If the LMPT or UMPTa6 is configured in the BBU, the GPS clock signal cable is preferentially connected to the GPS port on the LMPT or UMPTa6.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1317



Figure 17-64 Installing the GPS clock signal cable


17.6 Installation Checklist After the cabinets and devices are all installed, you need to check the installation items, installation environment, and cable-related items.

Cabinet Installation Checklist The following table lists the standards for checking the installed cabinets. Table 17-7 Cabinet installation checklist

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Check Item

1


2

If the cabinet is installed on a wall, the holes in mounting ears fit the holes for expansion bolts, and the mounting ears are secured on the wall evenly and steadily.

3

If the cabinet is installed on a pole, the mounting bracket is securely installed.

4

The horizontal deviation of the cabinet is smaller than 3 mm (0.12 in.), and the vertical deviation is smaller than or equal to 3 mm (0.12 in.).

5

All the bolts, especially those for electrical connections, are tightened. Both the spring washers and the flat washers are installed in a correct sequence.

6


7

The paint on the surface is intact. The damaged paint is repaired.

8

Filler panels are installed in the space reserved for customer equipment.

9

The locks of the doors on the cabinet work properly, and the stop bolt is secured. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1318



No.

Check Item

10


Installation Environment Checklist The following table lists the standards for checking the environment of installed cabinets. Table 17-8 Installation environment checklist No.

Check Item

1

The cabinet surface is clean.

2


3


4

All devices around the cabinet are neat and clean.

Electrical Connection Checklist The following table lists the standards for checking the electrical connections of installed cabinets. Table 17-9 Electrical connection checklist

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2

The PGND cable is securely connected, the AC input power cables and cables in the cabinet are correctly connected, and the screws are tightened according to the electrical design of the power system. In addition, the inputs or outputs are not shortcircuited.

3


4


5


6



1319



Cable Installation Checklist The following table lists the standards for checking the installed cables. Table 17-10 Cable installation checklist No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8

The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid the abnormal voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) caused by false connection.

BBU Hardware Installation Checklist The following table lists the standards for checking the installed BBU hardware. Table 17-11 BBU hardware installation checklist

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Check Item

1

All self-made PGND cables are copper-based with proper core diameters and no cables are connected in series or in parallel. There should not be any switch or fuse in the grounding system. No short circuit is allowed. One terminal on the ground bar is connected to only one PGND cable.

2


3


4

The bare wires and the terminal handles connected to the wiring terminals are coated with heat shrink tubing. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1320



No.

Check Item

5


6

All the cable connectors, including those at the bottom of the cabinet interior, are securely connected.

7


8


9

The cable layout facilitates maintenance and capacity expansion, and the bending radius of the cable meets the requirements.

10


11


12



Prerequisites l

Input power cables for the OMB are correctly connected.

l

The power supply to the OMB meets the requirements of the power system.

l

The external power supply to the OMB has been shut off.

l

All circuit breakers in the OMB have been set to OFF.

l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1321



Context


Table 17-12 Circuit breakers in an OMB Cabinet

Power Device

Circuit Breaker

OMB

EPS30-4815AF, DCDU-05, or DCDU-03B

l RRU and TM circuit breakers on the DCDU-05 (The circuit breakers control the power input to the RRU and customer transmission equipment.) l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the DCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control the power input to the RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fan assembly, and customer transmission equipment.)

Procedure Step 1 Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit. Step 2 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the OMB. Step 3 Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON. Step 4 Set the circuit breaker on the DCDU-05 to ON, and check the power supply status of each component.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1322




Component


OMB

PMU


PSU



BBU

l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on. l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s). l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s). The indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports are in status other than steady reda.

RRU subrack


RRU


NOTE



Handling Measure



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1323



Failure Type

Handling Measure





----End

Example The following figure shows the power-on check process for a base station using the DC-powered OMB.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1324



Figure 17-65 Power-on process for the DC-powered OMB

The following figure shows the power-on check process for a base station using the AC-powered OMB.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1325



Figure 17-66 Power-on process for the AC-powered OMB

17.8 Repainting The paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept intact. Therefore, any damaged paint must be repaired.

Prerequisites Before repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to the following table. Table 17-15 Color codes

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Intended Object

Color

Huawei Code

International Code

Cabinet

RAL7035

YB026

RAL7035

Base

3010 light gray

YB030

Pantone 422U


1326







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1327






----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1328


18 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed on a Wall

18

Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed on a Wall

About This Chapter This chapter describes the process for installing a BBU, DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B, and related cables in an indoor wall-mounted scenario. 18.1 Installation Clearance Requirements In an indoor scenario with DC power supply, a BBU and a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B can be installed on a wall. In this case, the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU. 18.2 Installation Process In an indoor wall-mounted scenario, the installation process includes installing components on the wall and installing cables. 18.3 Installing Components on a Wall This section describes the procedures for installing the BBU, DCDU, and WGRU on a wall. 18.4 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. 18.5 Installation Checklist After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation environment, and cable-related items. 18.6 Powering On a Base Station This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply to the components in a cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1329



18.1 Installation Clearance Requirements In an indoor scenario with DC power supply, a BBU and a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B can be installed on a wall. In this case, the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU.

Installation Clearance Requirements for a Single Wall-Mounted BBU The following figure shows the installation clearance requirements for a wall-mounted BBU. Figure 18-1 Installation clearance requirements for a single wall-mounted BBU

NOTE

l Retain a minimum of 600 mm (23.62 in.) in front of the BBU for maintenance. l Retain a minimum of 20 mm (0.79 in.) above the BBU for maintenance. l Retain a minimum of 800 mm (31.50 in.) below the BBU for maintenance. l Retain a minimum of 50 mm (1.97 in.) on the left and right of the BBU respectively for maintenance.

Installation Clearance Requirements for a Wall-Mounted BBU and a DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B If a BBU and a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B are installed on a wall, a minimum of 100 mm (3.93 in.) must be reserved between them for maintenance, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B must be installed close to the BBU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1330



Figure 18-2 Installation clearance requirements for a wall-mounted BBU and a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B

18.2 Installation Process In an indoor wall-mounted scenario, the installation process includes installing components on the wall and installing cables. The following figure shows the installation process.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1331




NOTE

l For details about how to install an AAU, see the related AAU installation guides. l For details about how to install an RRU, see the related RRU installation guides. l The outdoor cable conversion box (OCB) is used to connect cables with different cross-sectional areas, and it is optional. For details about an OCB, see the OCB User Guide.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1332



18.3 Installing Components on a Wall This section describes the procedures for installing the BBU, DCDU, and WGRU on a wall.

18.3.1 Installing the BBU This section describes the procedure for installing the BBU on a wall when a DBS3900 is installed indoors.

Procedure Step 1 Optional: If the BBU mounting ears are installed reversely, skip this step. If the BBU mounting ears are installed in standard mode, perform the following operations: 1.

Remove the four M4 screws from the mounting ear on each side of the BBU.

2.

Install the mounting ears reversely and tighten the four M4 screws on each of the mounting ears, with a torque of 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.). Figure 18-4 Installing mounting ears reversely

Step 2 Tighten the four M6×12 screws to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), and secure the mounting ears on the wall to the mounting ears on the BBU, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1333



Figure 18-5 Securing the mounting ears on the wall to the mounting ears on the BBU

Step 3 Place the BBU against the wall, and mark the positions of bolt holes in the mounting ears on the wall, as shown in the following figure. Figure 18-6 Marking the positions of bolt holes in the mounting ears on the wall

(1) Level

(2) BBU

(3) Wall

Step 4 Drill holes at the anchor points and install expansion bolt assemblies in the holes, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1334




(1) M6x60 bolt

1.

(2) Nut

(3) Spring washer

(4) Flat washer

(5) Expansion tube

Use a hammer drill with a Ф8 drill bit to drill holes vertically at the marked anchor points. Ensure that the depth of each hole ranges from 50 mm (2.17 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).

CAUTION Take proper safety measures to protect your eyes and respiratory tract against the dust before drilling holes. 2.


3.


4.


5.

Remove the M6x60 bolt, nut, spring washer, and flat washer from each expansion bolt assembly in sequence.

NOTICE After dismantling an expansion bolt assembly, ensure that the top of the expansion tube is on the same level as the wall. Otherwise, the BBU cannot be installed on the wall evenly and securely. Step 5 Place the BBU with its rear panel upward and front panel downward. Use a torque wrench to tighten the four M6×60 bolts of the mounting ears on the wall to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.) and secure the BBU onto the wall, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1335




----End

18.3.2 Installing the DCDU The DCDU can be installed on the wall in an indoor DBS3900.

Context The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B can supply power to a BBU installed on an indoor wall. NOTE

The following describes the procedure for installing a DCDU-03B. The procedures for installing a DCDU-03B, a DCDU-11B, and a DCDU-12B are the same.

Procedure Step 1 Use four M6x12 screws to secure the mounting ears on the wall and those on the DCDU, and tighten the screws to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1336



Figure 18-9 Securing the mounting ears on the wall and those on the DCDU

Step 2 Place the DCDU against the wall, and use a marker to mark the holes for installing screws securing mounting ears, as shown in the following figure. Figure 18-10 Marking the positions for installing screws securing mounting ears of the DCDU


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1337




(1) M6x60 bolts

1.

(2) Nut

(3) Spring washer

(4) Flat washer

(5) Expansion tube

Use a hammer drill with a Φ8 bit to drill holes vertically at the marked anchor points. Ensure that the depth of each hole ranges from 50 mm (1.97 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).



3.


4.

Use a rubber mallet to pound the expansion bolt assembly until it goes into the hole completely. The expansion bolt must protrude 20 mm (0.79 in.) from the wall.

5.

Remove the M6x60 bolt, nut, spring washer, and flat washer in sequence.

NOTICE After dismantling an expansion bolt assembly, ensure that the top of the expansion tube is level with the wall. Otherwise, the DCDU cannot be installed on the wall evenly and securely. Step 4 Tightly press the DCDU against the wall with the front panel facing the right and the power port facing downwards. Then use a torque wrench to tighten the four M6x60 screws on the wallmounting ears for the DCDU to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1338



Figure 18-12 Installing the DCDU

----End






l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1339



l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l




l


l




l


l


l




l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1340



l


l


l




l







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1341




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1342




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1343



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1344



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1345





l


l


l


18.4.2 Installing a PGND Cable When a distributed base station is deployed in an indoor wall-mounted scenario, a PGND cable for the BBU and a PGND cable for the DCDU must be installed onsite.

Installing a PGND Cable for the BBU A PGND cable for the BBU ensures proper grounding of the BBU.

Context The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable for the BBU. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1346



Table 18-1 Specifications of a PGND cable for the BBU Cable

CrossSectional Area

One End

The Other End

Color

PGND cable for the BBU

6 mm2 (0.009 in. 2)

OT terminal (M4)

OT terminal (M8)

Green and yellow

Procedure Step 1 Prepare a PGND cable for the BBU. 1.

Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install a PGND cable for the BBU. Connect the M4 OT terminal at one end of the PGND cable for the BBU to the ground terminal on the BBU and the M8 OT terminal at the other end to the external ground bar, as shown in the following figure. Figure 18-21 Installing a PGND cable for the BBU

NOTE

When installing a PGND cable, tightly press the OT terminal in the correct direction, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1347




Step 3 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Labeling Power Cables. ----End

Installing a PGND Cable for the DCDU A PGND cable for the DCDU ensures proper grounding of the DCDU. The DCDU are classified into DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B.

Context l

The specifications of PGND cables for the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B are the same, as shown in the following table. Table 18-2 Specifications of a PGND cable for the DCDU

l

Cable

CrossSectional Area

One End

The Other End

Remarks

PGND cable for the DCDU

16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)

OT terminal (M6)

OT terminal (M6)

Green and yellow

The procedures for installing a PGND cable for DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B are the same.

Procedure Step 1 Prepare a PGND cable for the DCDU. 1.


2.


Step 2 Connect one end of the PGND cable for the DCDU to the ground terminal on the DCDU and the other end to the external ground bar, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1348



Figure 18-23 Installing a PGND cable for the DCDU

Step 3 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Labeling Power Cables. ----End


Installing DCDU Power Cables DCDUs supported by a wall-mounted and a 19-inch rack DBS3900 include the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B. The DCDU power cables feed -48 V power input into the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B.

Context Specifications of the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B and DCDU-12B power cables are shown in the following table. Table 18-3 Specifications of the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B and DCDU-12B power cables Cable DCDU-03B power cable DCDU-11B power cable DCDU-12B power cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Color

One End

The Other End

RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue



RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue

OT terminal (M6, 35 mm2 [0.054 in.2], one group; or 16 mm2 [0.025 in.2]), two groups


1349


18 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed on a Wall NOTE

l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If the cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l The following description shows an example of installing the DCDU-11B power cables. The procedure for installing the DCDU-03B power cables and DCDU-12B power cables are the same.

Procedure Step 1 Prepare DCDU power cables 1.

Cut the power cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Add OT terminals to the end of the cables connected to the power equipment according to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.


Connect the OT terminals to one end of the power cables to the wiring terminals marked NEG(-) and RTN(+) on the DCDU.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment. Figure 18-24 Installing the DCDU power cables (when the DCDU-11B is installed on a wall)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1350



Figure 18-25 Installing the DCDU power cables (when the DCDU-11B is installed in a 19-inch rack)



Context The following table lists the specifications of a BBU power cable. Table 18-4 Specifications of a BBU power cable (1)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Power Equip ment

Cable

DCDU -03B

BBU power cable

RTN (+)

Color

One End

The Other End

Black


3V3 connectors


1351



Power Equip ment

Cable

DCDU -11B

DCDU -12B

Color

NEG (-)

Blue

RTN (+)

Black

NEG (-)

Blue

RTN (+)

Black

NEG (-)

Blue

One End

The Other End


EPC4 connector

NOTE




2.


Power Equipment


DCDU-03B


DCDU-11B


DCDU-12B


Step 2 Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port on the UPEU in the BBU. Then tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.). Step 3 Connect the connector at the other end of the BBU power cable to the DCDU. The following table lists the BBU power cable connections to different DCDUs. Figure 18-26 uses the DCDU-03B as an example. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1352



Power Equipment


DCDU-03B

Connect the OT terminals to the LOAD6 terminal on the DCDU-03B, then tighten the screws on the connector to 1.2 N·m (10.61 lbf·in.).

DCDU-11B

Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on the DCDU-11B.

DCDU-12B

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on the DCDU-12B.





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1353




Context The following table lists the specifications of an RRU power cable. Table 18-5 Specifications of an RRU power cable Power Equip ment

Cable

DCDU03B

RRU power cable

DCDU11B

RRU power cable

Color

One End

The Other End

RTN (+)




NEG (-)

Blue (complying with the North American standard)

RTN (+)


NEG (-)

Blue (complying with the European standard)

RTN (+)





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1354



Power Equip ment

DCDU12B

Cable

RRU power cable

Color

NEG (-)

Blue

RTN (+)


One End

The Other End

EPC5 connector

Brown (complying with the European standard) NEG (-)

Blue

NOTE




2.


Power Equipment


DCDU-03B


DCDU-11B


DCDU-12B


Step 2 Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the RRU side to the power port on the RRU. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1355



CAUTION Ensure that the RRU power cable for an RRU added to a running base station must be connected to the RRU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury. Step 3 Route the RRU power cable from the RRU side to the DCDU side through the feeder window. Install a ground clip near the feeder window outside the equipment room, and connect the PGND cable on the ground clip to the external ground bar. The installation procedure of ground clip is as follows: 1.


2.

Wrap the copper sheet of the ground clip around the shield layer of the power cable, and use cable ties to bind them tightly. Then trim off surplus part from the heads of the cable ties without leaving any sharp edge. Figure 18-28 Wrapping and tying the copper sheet of the ground clip

(1) Hole for a cable tie (12AWG/4 mm2 or 0.006 in.2) (2) Hole for a cable tie (≥ 6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1356



3.


(1) Waterproof tape

(2) Insulation tape

(3) Cable tie

(4) Power cable

(5) PGND cable

-

NOTICE Trim off surplus part of the cable ties at the position 3 mm (0.12 in.) to 5 mm (0.20 in.) away from the head of the cable tie. Step 4 Add a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side, as shown in Figure 18-30 and Figure 18-31. The following table lists the installation positions of the RRU power cable on the power equipment.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Power Equipment


DCDU-03B

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the blue and black/brown wires of the power cable to the NEG(-) and RTN(+) parts in one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-03B. Then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

DCDU-11B

Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-11B.

DCDU-12B

Connect the EPC5 connector at one end of the power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12B.


1357


18 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed on a Wall NOTE

The following figures show how to install RRU power cables when the RRU is powered by a DCDU-11B and is installed on a wall or in a 19-inch rack. The RRU power cable is installed in the same way when the RRU is powered by a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B.

Figure 18-30 Installing an RRU power cable (when the DCDU-11B supplies power to RRUs and is installed on a wall)

(1) Group Clip

(2) Feeder Window

(3) Ground Bar

Figure 18-31 Installing an RRU power cable (when the DCDU-11B supplies power to RRUs and is installed in a Indoor Centralized Support)

(1) Group Clip

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Feeder Window


(3) Ground Bar

1358






Prerequisites


Procedure Step 1 Connect the DB26 male connector of the E1/T1 cable to the E1/T1 port on the GTMU/WMPT/ UTRP/UMPT, as shown in the following figure. Figure 18-32 Installing the E1/T1 cable


Installing the FE/GE Ethernet Cables This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE Ethernet cables. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1359



Context l


l

This section uses the scenario where the UMPT is configured as an example. For cable connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE/GE0 port on the WMPT/GTMU/UMPT/ UTRP in the BBU, as shown in the following figure. Figure 18-33 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable



Context l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1360



NOTICE l The performance of an optical module that is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes may become abnormal. Therefore, you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20 minutes. l The fiber optical cables in an IMB03 need be routed and bound along the right side of the IMB for easy maintenance of the fan in the future. l When an IMB03 is installed on a wall, the fiber optical cable out of the IMB03 should be routed with the bending radius of equal to or greater than 140 mm (5.51 in.). NOTE

l The cable described in this section is used for the LMPT in an LO base station. For the cable connections in base stations of other modes, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. l SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not used simultaneously. l SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not used simultaneously.



2.


3.


4.


5.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1361





Step 3 Lay out the cables along the cable trough on the right side of the cabinet, and then use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. ----End


Prerequisites l


l

Optical modules, fiber optic cables, and electrical cables meeting the following requirements are available: – The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1362



– The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s. – The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable. NOTE



(2) Wavelength

(1) Maximum rate




BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT

M0 port on the UCIU


M1 port on the UCIU




CI port on the UMPT

CI port on the UMPT

UMPT+UMPT



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1363






2.


3.






1. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1364



2.




2.





18.4.6 (Optional) Installing an EMUA/EMUB Monitoring Signal Cable An EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable transmits monitoring signals from an EMUA to a BBU.

Context A BBU provides a maximum of four ports for Boolean signal inputs and a maximum of four ports for RS485 signal inputs. When these eight ports are insufficient, a EMUA/EMUB is required. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1365



The figures in this section use the EMUA as examples.

Procedure Step 1 Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown in Figure 18-41. 1.

Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the EMUA monitoring signal cable to the MON0/ MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

2.

Connect the DB9 male connector at the other end of the cable to the EMUA. Figure 18-41 Installing the EMUA monitoring signal cable




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1366



2.




Context NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1367





2.


3.


4.


5.






2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1368






18.4.9 (Optional) Installing the GPS Clock Signal Cable A GPS clock signal cable transmits GPS clock signals received from the GPS antenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.


Procedure Step 1 Optional: Loosen the two M3 screws on the panel of the USCU and pull it out, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1369






2.


3.


4.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1370




(1) Satellite card


Step 3 Optional: Install the USCU in the BBU, and tighten the captive screws on the USCU to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.). Step 4 Connect the GPS clock signal cable to the GPS port on the USCU, LMPT, or UMPTa6, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

If the LMPT or UMPTa6 is configured in the BBU, the GPS clock signal cable is preferentially connected to the GPS port on the LMPT or UMPTa6.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1371







Item

1


2


3


4


5

The paint on the surface is intact. The damaged paint is repaired. For details, see 17.8 Repainting.

6




1372




Item

1


2


3



Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8


9


10


11


12


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1373



No.

Item

13



Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1374




Prerequisites l

Input power cables for the DCDU are correctly connected.

l

The power supply to the DCDU meets the requirements of the power system.

l

External power supply to the DCDU has been shut off.

l

All circuit breakers on the DCDU have been set to OFF.

l


l


Context


Table 18-11 Circuit breakers on DCDUs Cabinet

Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker

-

DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B

l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the DCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control the power input to the RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fan assembly, and customer transmission equipment.) l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the DCDU-11B (SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers control the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5, BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA/EMUB, and FAN 02B. The SW9 circuit breaker is reserved.)

NOTE


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1375



Procedure Step 1 Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit. Step 2 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the DCDU. Step 3 Optional: Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on the DCDU to ON. Skip this step if there is no circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as the DCDU-12B. Step 4 Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON, and check the power supply status of each component.


Table 18-12 Normal power supply status of each component Component


BBU


RRU


a: If the indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports are steady red, check whether the optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is broken.

NOTE


Step 5 Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on, handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1376



Table 18-13 Troubleshooting Failure Type

Handling Measure







----End Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1377



Example The following figure shows the power-on check process. Figure 18-50 Power-on check process

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1378

19 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a 19Inch Rack


19

Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a 19-Inch Rack

About This Chapter This chapter describes the process for installing components and related cables when the BBU is installed in an indoor 19-inch rack. 19.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing a BBU in an indoor 19-inch cabinet with DC power supply. 19.2 Installation Process In a 19-inch rack scenario, the installation process includes installing components and installing cables. 19.3 Installing Components This section describes the procedures for installing the BBU, DCDU, and WGRU in the 19-inch rack when the DBS3900 is installed indoors. 19.4 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. 19.5 Installation Checklist After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation environment, and cable-related items. 19.6 Powering On a Base Station This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply to the components in a cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1379



19.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing a BBU in an indoor 19-inch cabinet with DC power supply. The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing a BBU in a 19-inch cabinet. Figure 19-1 Clearance requirements for installing a BBU in a 19-inch cabinet

NOTE

l Retain 25 mm (0.98 in.) on the left of the BBU for ventilation. l Retain 25 mm (0.98 in.) on the right of the BBU for ventilation. l Retain 70 mm (2.76 in.) in front of the BBU panel for cable layout and 800 mm (31.50 in.) for maintenance.

19.2 Installation Process In a 19-inch rack scenario, the installation process includes installing components and installing cables. The following figure shows the installation process.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1380




19.3 Installing Components This section describes the procedures for installing the BBU, DCDU, and WGRU in the 19-inch rack when the DBS3900 is installed indoors.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1381




Context l


l




l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1382




l



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)




1383




l


l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1384






2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1385




3.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1386







----End

19.3.2 Installing a DCDU A DCDU can be installed in the 19-inch rack in an indoor DBS3900. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1387



Context l

When a DCDU supplies power to the BBU and a WGRU is optionally configured, the DCDU is installed in the 1 U space above the WGRU, and the WGRU is installed in the 1 U space above the BBU.

l

The section describes the procedure for installing a DCDU-03B (shortened to DCDU). The procedures for installing a DCDU-11B and a DCDU-12B are the same. NOTE

l When a DCDU is installed in an indoor centralized rack, the mounting ears on the DCDU must be installed on the edges of the DCDU. l When a DCDU is installed in an INS12, move each mounting ear on the DCDU backwards by one hole. l The following figures use a DCDU installed in an indoor centralized rack to show how to install the DCDU.

Procedure Step 1 Optional: Move the mounting ears on the DCDU. Only when a DCDU is installed on an INS12, move each mounting ear on the DCDU backwards by one hole, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the four M4 screws from the mounting ear on each side of the DCDU.

2.

Move each mounting ear backwards by one hole and tighten the four removed M4 screws on the mounting ear to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Figure 19-14 Moving the mounting ears on the DCDU

Step 2 Slide the DCDU-03B into the cabinet along the guide rails, and then tighten four M6x16 panel screws to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1388




----End

19.3.3 (Optional) Installing a WGRU A WCDMA GPS receiving unit (WGRU) is optionally installed in the UMTS base stations only. It provides the positioning function for the base station.

Context l

When a WGRU is installed in an indoor centralized rack, the mounting ears on the WGRU must be installed on the edges of the DCDU.

l

When a WGRU is installed in an INS12, move each mounting ear on the WGRU backwards by one hole.

l

The following figures use a WGRU installed in an indoor centralized rack to show how to install the WGRU.

Procedure Step 1 Optional: Move the mounting ears on the WGRU. Only when a WGRU is installed on an INS12, move each mounting ear on the WGRU backwards by one hole, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the four M4 screws from the mounting ear on each side of the WGRU.

2.

Move each mounting ear backwards by one hole and tighten the four removed M4 screws on the mounting ear to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1389



Figure 19-16 Moving the mounting ears on the WGRU

Step 2 Slide the WGRU into the cabinet along the guide rails, and then tighten four M6x16 panel screws to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 19-17 Installing a WGRU

(1) Front panel of the WGRU

(2) Rear panel of the WGRU

NOTE

l Reserve a minimum of 25 mm (0.98 in.) space on both the left and right sides of the WGRU for ventilation. l Reserve a minimum of 70 mm (2.76 in.) space in front of the WGRU for cable layout and 800 mm (31.49 in.) space at the rear of the WGRU for maintenance.

Step 3 Install a PGND cable for the WGRU. 1.


2.

Add OT terminals at each end of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

3.

Connect the OT terminal at one end of the PGND cable for the WGRU to the ground bolt on the rear panel of the WGRU and the OT terminal at the other end to the external ground bar, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1390



Figure 19-18 Installing a PGND cable for the WGRU

NOTE

Choose the shortest cabling route to ground the PGND cable for the WGRU.

4.


Step 4 Install a GPS clock signal cable. 1.

Connect the Type N female connector at one end of the GPS clock signal cable to the ATN port on the rear panel of the WGRU and the SMA male connector at the other end to the GPS antenna, as shown in the following figure. Figure 19-19 Installing a GPS clock signal cable

2.

Route the GPS clock signal cable upwards along the column of the rack, and use a cable tie to bind the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements.

Step 5 Install a WGRU power cable. NOTE

One end of the WGRU power cable is a two-hole male connector. The other end is an OT terminal which needs to be prepared onsite.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1391



1.


2.

Add OT terminal to the cable according to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

3.

Connect the two-hole male connector at one end of the WGRU power cable to the POWER port on the rear panel of the WGRU and the OT terminal at the other end to the LOAD7 or LOAD8 port on the DCDU, as shown in the following figure. Figure 19-20 Installing a WGRU power cable

4.

Route the power cable to the rear panel of the WGRU along the right side of the output port on the DCDU, and ensure that the cable cannot obstruct front panels of the DCDU and WGRU. Use a cable tie to bind the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements.

Step 6 Install a PPS signal cable and a GPS signal cable, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

The GPS signal cable transmits GPS signals received from the COM1 port. The PPS signal cable transmits PPS signals received from the PPS1 port. RJ-45 connectors have been installed at both ends of the PPS signal cable and GPS signal cable before delivery. Cut off the RJ-45 connectors at one end of the cables to be installed and use the bare wires.

1.

Connect the RJ-45 connector at one end of the PPS signal cable to the PPS1 port on the front panel of the WGRU and the bare wires at the other end to the RGPS ports on the USCU in the BBU. Table 19-1 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the PPS signal cable.

2.

Connect the RJ-45 connector at one end of the GPS signal cable to the COM1 port on the front panel of the WGRU and the bare wires at the other end to the RGPS ports on the USCU in the BBU. Table 19-1 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the GPS signal cable.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1392



Figure 19-21 Installing a PPS signal cable and a GPS signal cable

Table 19-1 Pin assignment for the wires of a PPS signal cable and a GPS signal cable

3.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Port

Pin Assignment

Port

Silkscreen

Wire Color

WGRU-PPS1

Pin 1CLK1_PPS_T XD+

USCU-RGPS

1S+

White and orange

WGRU-PPS1

Pin 2CLK1_PPS_T XD-

USCU-RGPS

1S-

Orange

WGRUCOM1

Pin 1COM1_COM RXD+

USCU-RGPS

TX+

White and orange

WGRUCOM1

Pin 2COM1_COM RXD-

USCU-RGPS

TX-

Orange

WGRUCOM1

Pin 3COM1_COM_ TXD+

USCU-RGPS

RX+

White and green

WGRUCOM1

Pin 6COM1_COM_ TXD-

USCU-RGPS

RX-

Green



1393









l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1394



l


l




l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l


l




l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1395








(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1396




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1397



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1398



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1399





l


l


l


19.4.2 Installing a PGND Cable for the DCDU A PGND cable for the DCDU ensures proper grounding of the DCDU. The DCDU are classified into DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B.

Context l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

The following figure shows specifications of a PGND cable for the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B which is installed on an indoor centralized rack.


1400



Table 19-2 Specifications of a PGND cable for the DCDU Cable

CrossSectional Area

One End

The Other End

Color


6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)

OT terminal (M4)

OT terminal (M4)

Green and yellow

l

When the DCDU-12B is installed on an INS12, the DCDU-12B is grounded through the mounting ears, and therefore the PGND cable for the DCDU-12B is not required. The specifications of PGND cables for the DCDU-03B and DCDU-11B are the same, as listed in Table 19-2.

l

When a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-03B is installed on an indoor centralized rack or INS12, the PGND cable for the DCDU is required. This section describe the procedure for installing the PGND cable for the DCDU-03B. The procedure for installing the PGND cable for the DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B is the same.

Procedure Step 1 Prepare a PGND cable for the DCDU. 1.


2.


Step 2 Install the PGND cable for the DCDU. Connect one end of the PGND cable for the DCDU to the ground terminal on the DCDU and the other end to the ground screw on the 19-inch rack, as shown in the following figure. Figure 19-30 Installing a PGND cable for the DCDU

Step 3 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Labeling Power Cables. ----End Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1401




Installing DCDU Power Cables DCDUs supported by a wall-mounted and a 19-inch rack DBS3900 include the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B. The DCDU power cables feed -48 V power input into the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B.

Context Specifications of the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B and DCDU-12B power cables are shown in the following table. Table 19-3 Specifications of the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B and DCDU-12B power cables Cable DCDU-03B power cable DCDU-11B power cable DCDU-12B power cable

Color

One End

The Other End

RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue



RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue

OT terminal (M6, 35 mm2 [0.054 in.2], one group; or 16 mm2 [0.025 in.2]), two groups

NOTE

l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If the cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l The following description shows an example of installing the DCDU-11B power cables. The procedure for installing the DCDU-03B power cables and DCDU-12B power cables are the same.

Procedure Step 1 Prepare DCDU power cables 1.

Cut the power cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Add OT terminals to the end of the cables connected to the power equipment according to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.


Connect the OT terminals to one end of the power cables to the wiring terminals marked NEG(-) and RTN(+) on the DCDU.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1402



Figure 19-31 Installing the DCDU power cables (when the DCDU-11B is installed on a wall)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1403



Figure 19-32 Installing the DCDU power cables (when the DCDU-11B is installed in a 19-inch rack)



Context The following table lists the specifications of a BBU power cable. Table 19-4 Specifications of a BBU power cable (1)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Power Equip ment

Cable

DCDU -03B

BBU power cable

RTN (+)

Color

One End

The Other End

Black


3V3 connectors


1404



Power Equip ment

Cable

DCDU -11B

DCDU -12B

Color

NEG (-)

Blue

RTN (+)

Black

NEG (-)

Blue

RTN (+)

Black

NEG (-)

Blue

One End

The Other End


EPC4 connector

NOTE




2.


Power Equipment


DCDU-03B


DCDU-11B


DCDU-12B


Step 2 Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V port on the UPEU in the BBU. Then tighten the screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.). Step 3 Connect the connector at the other end of the BBU power cable to the DCDU. The following table lists the BBU power cable connections to different DCDUs. Figure 19-33 uses the DCDU-03B as an example. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1405



Power Equipment


DCDU-03B

Connect the OT terminals to the LOAD6 terminal on the DCDU-03B, then tighten the screws on the connector to 1.2 N·m (10.61 lbf·in.).

DCDU-11B

Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on the DCDU-11B.

DCDU-12B

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on the DCDU-12B.





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1406




Context The following table lists the specifications of an RRU power cable. Table 19-5 Specifications of an RRU power cable Power Equip ment

Cable

DCDU03B

RRU power cable

DCDU11B

RRU power cable

Color

One End

The Other End

RTN (+)




NEG (-)

Blue (complying with the North American standard)

RTN (+)


NEG (-)

Blue (complying with the European standard)

RTN (+)





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1407



Power Equip ment

DCDU12B

Cable

RRU power cable

Color

NEG (-)

Blue

RTN (+)


One End

The Other End

EPC5 connector

Brown (complying with the European standard) NEG (-)

Blue

NOTE




2.


Power Equipment


DCDU-03B


DCDU-11B


DCDU-12B


Step 2 Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the RRU side to the power port on the RRU. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1408



CAUTION Ensure that the RRU power cable for an RRU added to a running base station must be connected to the RRU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury. Step 3 Route the RRU power cable from the RRU side to the DCDU side through the feeder window. Install a ground clip near the feeder window outside the equipment room, and connect the PGND cable on the ground clip to the external ground bar. The installation procedure of ground clip is as follows: 1.


2.


(1) Hole for a cable tie (12AWG/4 mm2 or 0.006 in.2) (2) Hole for a cable tie (≥ 6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1409



3.


(1) Waterproof tape

(2) Insulation tape

(3) Cable tie

(4) Power cable

(5) PGND cable

-

NOTICE Trim off surplus part of the cable ties at the position 3 mm (0.12 in.) to 5 mm (0.20 in.) away from the head of the cable tie. Step 4 Add a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side, as shown in Figure 19-37 and Figure 19-38. The following table lists the installation positions of the RRU power cable on the power equipment.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Power Equipment


DCDU-03B

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the blue and black/brown wires of the power cable to the NEG(-) and RTN(+) parts in one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-03B. Then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

DCDU-11B

Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-11B.

DCDU-12B

Connect the EPC5 connector at one end of the power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12B.


1410


19 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a 19Inch Rack NOTE

The following figures show how to install RRU power cables when the RRU is powered by a DCDU-11B and is installed on a wall or in a 19-inch rack. The RRU power cable is installed in the same way when the RRU is powered by a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B.

Figure 19-37 Installing an RRU power cable (when the DCDU-11B supplies power to RRUs and is installed on a wall)

(1) Group Clip

(2) Feeder Window

(3) Ground Bar

Figure 19-38 Installing an RRU power cable (when the DCDU-11B supplies power to RRUs and is installed in a Indoor Centralized Support)

(1) Group Clip

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Feeder Window


(3) Ground Bar

1411






Prerequisites


Procedure Step 1 Connect the DB26 male connector of the E1/T1 cable to the E1/T1 port on the GTMU/WMPT/ UTRP/UMPT, as shown in the following figure. Figure 19-39 Installing the E1/T1 cable


Installing the FE/GE Ethernet Cables This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE Ethernet cables. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1412



Context l


l


Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE/GE0 port on the WMPT/GTMU/UMPT/ UTRP in the BBU, as shown in the following figure. Figure 19-40 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable



Context l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1413







2.


3.


4.


5.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1414





Step 3 Lay out the cables along the cable trough on the right side of the cabinet, and then use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 19.4.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. ----End


Prerequisites l


l

Optical modules, fiber optic cables, and electrical cables meeting the following requirements are available: – The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1415



– The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s. – The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable. NOTE



(2) Wavelength

(1) Maximum rate




BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT

M0 port on the UCIU


M1 port on the UCIU




CI port on the UMPT

CI port on the UMPT

UMPT+UMPT



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1416






2.


3.






1. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1417



2.




2.





19.4.6 (Optional) Installing an EMUA/EMUB Monitoring Signal Cable An EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable transmits monitoring signals from an EMUA to a BBU.

Context A BBU provides a maximum of four ports for Boolean signal inputs and a maximum of four ports for RS485 signal inputs. When these eight ports are insufficient, a EMUA/EMUB is required. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1418



The figures in this section use the EMUA as examples.

Procedure Step 1 Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown in Figure 19-48. 1.

Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the EMUA monitoring signal cable to the MON0/ MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

2.

Connect the DB9 male connector at the other end of the cable to the EMUA. Figure 19-48 Installing the EMUA monitoring signal cable




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1419



2.




Context NOTE



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1420





2.


3.


4.


5.






2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1421








Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


1422



No.

Item

2


3


4


5

The paint on the surface is intact. The damaged paint is repaired. For details, see 17.8 Repainting.

6



Item

1


2


3



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


1423



No.

Item

6


7


8


9


10


11


12


13



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7



1424



No.

Item

8




Prerequisites l

Input power cables for the DCDU are correctly connected.

l

The power supply to the DCDU meets the requirements of the power system.

l

External power supply to the DCDU has been shut off.

l

All circuit breakers on the DCDU have been set to OFF.

l


l


Context


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1425



Table 19-11 Circuit breakers on DCDUs Cabinet

Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker

-

DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B

l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the DCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control the power input to the RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fan assembly, and customer transmission equipment.) l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the DCDU-11B (SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers control the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5, BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA/EMUB, and FAN 02B. The SW9 circuit breaker is reserved.)

NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit. Step 2 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the DCDU. Step 3 Optional: Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on the DCDU to ON. Skip this step if there is no circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as the DCDU-12B. Step 4 Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON, and check the power supply status of each component.


Table 19-12 Normal power supply status of each component Component


BBU


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1426



Component


RRU


a: If the indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports are steady red, check whether the optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is broken.

NOTE



Handling Measure





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1427



Failure Type

Handling Measure



----End

Example The following figure shows the power-on check process.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1428




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1429


20 Indoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IMB03

20

Indoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IMB03

About This Chapter This chapter describes the process for installing an IMB03, components in the IMB03, and related cables of a DBS3900 in an indoor scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in an IMB03. 20.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing IMB03. 20.2 Installation Process This section describes the process for installing an independent IMB03. 20.3 Installing the IMB03 This section describes the procedures and the precautions for installing the IMB03 on a wall and on an IFS06. 20.4 Installing Components in the IMB03 If a DBS3900 is installed indoors, IMB03 cabinets can be optionally configured, and BBUs and power equipment can be installed in the IMB03 cabinets. 20.5 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. 20.6 IMB03 Hardware Installation Checklist After the subrack is installed, you need to check whether the hardware is properly installed. 20.7 Powering On a Base Station This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply to the components in a cabinet. 20.8 Installing the Cover Plate of the IMB03 Subrack This section describes procedures for installing the cover plate of the IMB03 subrack.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1430



20.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing IMB03.

20.1.1 Installation Clearances for a Wall-mounted IMB03 This section describes the recommended and minimum installation clearances for a wallmounted IMB03.

Installation Clearances for an IMB03 with Its Right Side Mounted on a Wall The following figure shows the installation clearances for an IMB03 with its right side mounted on a wall. Figure 20-1 Installation clearances for an IMB03 with its right side mounted on a wall

(a) Recommended installation clearances

(b) Minimum installation clearances

Installation Clearances for an IMB03 with Its Left Side Mounted on a Wall The following figure shows the installation clearances for an IMB03 with its left side mounted on a wall.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1431



Figure 20-2 Installation clearances for an IMB03 with its left side mounted on a wall



Installation Clearances for an IMB03 with Its Back Mounted on a Wall The following figure shows the installation clearances for an IMB03 with its back mounted on a wall. Figure 20-3 Installation Clearances for an IMB03 with its back mounted on a wall


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1432



20.1.2 Installation Clearances for an IMB03 Mounted on an IFS06 This section describes the recommended and minimum installation clearances for an IMB03 mounted on an IFS06.

Installation Clearances for the IMB03 with Its Right Side Mounted on an IFS06 The following figure shows the installation clearances for the IMB03 with its right side mounted on an IFS06. Figure 20-4 Installation clearances for the IMB03 with its right side mounted on an IFS06



Installation Clearances for the IMB03 with Its Left Side Mounted on an IFS06 The following figure shows the installation clearances for the IMB03 with its left side mounted on an IFS06.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1433



Figure 20-5 Installation clearances for the IMB03 with its left side mounted on an IFS06



Installation Clearances for the IMB03 with Its Back Mounted on an IFS06 The following figure shows the installation clearances for the IMB03 with its back mounted on an IFS06.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1434



Figure 20-6 Installation clearances for the IMB03 with its back mounted on an IFS06



20.2 Installation Process This section describes the process for installing an independent IMB03. The installation process is shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1435



Figure 20-7 IMB03 installation process

NOTE

This section describes the process for installing an IMB03 on a wall or on an IFS06, and RRUs are installed remotely. For how to install an RRU, see the related RRU installation guides.

20.3 Installing the IMB03 This section describes the procedures and the precautions for installing the IMB03 on a wall and on an IFS06.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1436



20.3.1 Installing an IMB03 on a Wall An IMB03 can be installed with its back or one side against a wall.

Installing an IMB03 on a Wall with One of Its Sides Against a Wall This section describes procedures for installing the IMB03 with one of its sides against a wall.

Context When the IMB03 is installed with one of its sides against the wall, the recommended diameter for the holes in the mounting ears is 14 mm (0.55 in.), the space between the holes in the two upper mounting ears is 292 mm (11.5 in.), and the space between the holes in the upper and lower mounting ears on one side is 611 mm (24.06 in.). Figure 20-8 Space between the holes in two mounting ears

NOTE

This section describes how to install the IMB03 with its right side against a wall. The procedures are the same for installing the IMB03 with its left side against a wall.

Procedure Step 1 Install the GPS surge protector NOTE

The IMB03 supports two GPS surge protectors that are optional, as shown in the following figure. If a GPS surge protector needs to be installed on the IMB03, install the GPS surge protector on the IMB03 before you install the IMB03.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1437



Figure 20-9 GPS surge protector

(1) GPS surge protector A

(2) GPS surge protector B

NOTE

GPS surge protector A does not require a PGND cable.

1.

Install the attachment plate for the GPS surge protector at the bottom of the IMB03, as shown in the following figure. Figure 20-10 Installing the attachment plate for the GPS surge protector

2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Secure the GPS surge protector to the attachment plate. Tighten the attachment plate manually in advance, and then use a wrench to secure it, as shown in the following figure.


1438



Figure 20-11 Installing the GPS surge protector

3.

Install the GPS clock signal cable on the GPS surge protector, as shown in the following figure. Figure 20-12 Installing the GPS clock signal cable

Step 2 Install the IMB03 mounting ears, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1439



Figure 20-13 Installing the mounting ears

(1) Insulation washers

(2) Installation positions for screws

Step 3 Place a marking-off template against the wall, use a level to verify that the marking-off template is placed horizontally, and then use a marker to mark the anchor points, as shown in the following figure. The distance between the marking-off template and the ground ranges from 1000 mm (39.37 in.) to 1200 mm (47.24 in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1440




(1) Level

(2) Drilling positions

NOTICE When installing the IMB03 on a wall, ensure that the wall can bear 1.25 kN (281.25 lbf) outward force vertical to it. Step 4 Drill holes at the anchor points and install expansion anchor bolts in the holes, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1441



Figure 20-15 Drilling holes at the anchor points and installing the expansion anchor bolts

(1) M10x80 bolt

1.

(2) Nut

(3) Spring washer

(4) Flat washer

(5) Expansion tube

Use a hammer drill with a φ12 bit to drill holes vertically at the marked anchor points. Ensure that the depth of each hole ranges from 55 mm (2.17 in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).


Use a vacuum cleaner to clear dust inside and around the holes, and then measure the interhole spacing. If the spacing is too wide or too narrow, drill holes again.

3.

Partially tighten each expansion anchor bolt and place it vertically into the hole.

4.

Use a rubber mallet to pound the expansion anchor bolt until it goes all the way into the hole.

5.

Tighten and then loosen the expansion anchor bolt, and remove the M10 bolt, spring washer, and flat washer in sequence at the behind.

NOTICE After dismantling the expansion anchor bolt, ensure that the top of the expansion tube is on the same level as the wall. Otherwise, the device cannot be installed on the wall evenly and securely. Step 5 Install the IMB03 subrack on the two upper bolts, and partially tighten the two upper nuts, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

After tightening the two lower nuts, tighten the upper nuts to ensure that the subrack is vertical to the horizontal plane.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1442



Figure 20-16 Partially tightening the upper nuts

(1) IMB03 mounting ears

Step 6 Align the holes in the lower mounting ears of the IMB03 subrack with the installation holes, and use a torque wrench to tighten the nuts, as shown in the following figure. Figure 20-17 Tightening the lower nuts

(1) Nut

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

----End Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1443



Installing an IMB03 with Its back Against a Wall This section describes procedures for installing the IMB03 with its back against a wall.

Prerequisites When installing the IMB03 on a wall, ensure that the wall can bear 1.25 kN (281.25 lbf) outward force vertical to it.

Context When the IMB03 is installed with its back against the wall, the recommended diameter for the holes in the mounting ears is 14 mm (0.55 in.), the space between the holes in the two upper mounting ears is 128 mm (5.04 in.), and the space between the holes in the upper and lower mounting ears on one side is 611 mm (24.06 in.). Figure 20-18 Space between the holes in two mounting ears

NOTE

This section describes how to install the IMB03 with its right side against a wall. The procedures are the same for installing the IMB03 with its left side against a wall.

Procedure Step 1 Install the GPS surge protector. For detailed operations, see Installing an IMB03 on a Wall with One of Its Sides Against a Wall. Step 2 Install the IMB03 mounting ears, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1444






Step 3 Use a level to measure whether the two holes are at the same horizontal line, place a markingoff template against the wall, and then use a marker to mark anchor points, as shown in the following figure. The distance between the marking-off template and the ground ranges from 1000 mm (39.37 in.) to 1200 mm (47.24 in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1445




(1) Level

(2) Drilling positions

Step 4 Drill holes at the anchor points and install expansion bolts in the holes. For detailed operations, see Installing an IMB03 on a Wall with One of Its Sides Against a Wall. Step 5 Install the IMB03 subrack on the two upper bolts, and partially tighten the two upper nuts, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

After tightening the two lower nuts, tighten the upper nuts to ensure that the subrack is vertical to the horizontal plane.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1446



Figure 20-21 Partially tightening the upper nuts


Step 6 Align the holes in the lower mounting ears of the IMB03 subrack with the installation holes, and use a torque wrench to tighten the nuts, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1447



Figure 20-22 Tightening the lower nuts

(1) Nut

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

----End

20.3.2 Installing an IMB03 on an IFS06 This section describes the procedures for installing an IMB03 on an IFS06. One or two IMB03s can be installed on the IFS06. When two IMB03s need to be installed on the IFS06, you are advised to install the lower IMB03 first. The procedures for installing the upper and lower IMB03s are the same. This section uses the upper IMB03 as an example to describe the procedures for installing an IMB03 on the IFS06.

Installing an IMB03 on the IFS06 with One of Its Sides Mounted on the IFS06 This section describes procedures for installing an IMB03 on the IFS06 with one of its sides mounted on the IFS06. An IMB03 can be installed with either its left or right side mounted on an IFS06. This section describes the procedures for installing an IMB03 with its right side mounted on the IFS06. The procedures are the same for installing an IMB03 with its left side mounted on the IFS06.

Context One or two IMB03s can be installed on the IFS06. Figure 20-23 shows the installation positions for the IMB03s. When installing the lower IMB03, move the lower adjustable beam to the middle installation hole. When installing the upper IMB03, move the upper adjustable beam to the middle installation hole, and for detailed operations, see Figure 20-25.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1448



Figure 20-23 Installation position for an IMB03 with one of its sides mounted on the IFS06

(1) Upper IMB03 mounting holes

(2) Lower IMB03 mounting holes

(3) Upper adjustable beam (4) Lower adjustable beam


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1449






Step 3 Move the upper adjustable beam of the IFS06 to the middle installation hole, as shown in the following figure. Figure 20-25 Moving the adjustable beams

(1) Default installation positions for the adjustable beams

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Positions where the adjustable beams need to be moved for installing the IMB03s


1450



Step 4 Screw two M10x30 bolts into the two upper mounting holes of the stand, and reserve the length of 20 mm (0.79 in.) to 30 mm (1.18 in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 20-26 Installing the bolts

Step 5 Install the IMB03 subrack on the upper bolts, and use a torque wrench to secure the bolts, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

Partially tighten the two upper bolts, and then secure them after tightening the two lower bolts to ensure that the subrack is vertical to the horizontal plane.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1451



Figure 20-27 Partially tightening the upper bolts


Step 6 Align the holes in the lower mounting ears of the IMB03 subrack with the installation holes, and use a torque wrench to tighten the bolts, as shown in the following figure. Figure 20-28 Tightening the lower bolts

----End Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1452



Installing an IMB03 with Its Back Mounted on the IFS06 This section describes procedures for installing an IMB03 with its back mounted on the IFS06.

Context One or two IMB03s can be installed on the IFS06. Figure 20-29 shows the installation positions for the IMB03s. When installing the lower IMB03, move the lower adjustable beam to the middle installation hole. When installing the upper IMB03, move the upper adjustable beam to the middle installation hole, and for detailed operations, see Figure 20-31. Figure 20-29 Installation position for an IMB03 with its back mounted on the IFS06

(1) Upper IMB03 mounting holes

(2) Lower IMB03 mounting holes

(3) Upper adjustable beam (4) Lower adjustable beam


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1453






Step 3 Move the upper adjustable beam of the IFS06 to the middle installation hole, as shown in the following figure. Figure 20-31 Moving the adjustable beams

(1) Default installation positions for the adjustable beams

(2) Positions where the adjustable beams needs to be moved for installing the IMB03s

Step 4 Screw two M10x30 bolts into the two upper mounting holes of the stand, and reserve the length of 20 mm (0.79 in.) to 30 mm (1.18 in.), as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1454



Figure 20-32 Installing the bolts

Step 5 Install the IMB03 subrack on the upper bolts, and use a torque wrench to secure the bolts, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

Partially tighten the two upper bolts, and then secure them after tightening the two lower bolts to ensure that the subrack is vertical to the horizontal plane.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1455



Figure 20-33 Partially tightening the upper bolts


Step 6 Align the holes in the lower mounting ears of the IMB03 subrack with the installation holes, and use a torque wrench to tighten the bolts, as shown in the following figure. Figure 20-34 Tightening the lower bolts

----End Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1456



20.4 Installing Components in the IMB03 If a DBS3900 is installed indoors, IMB03 cabinets can be optionally configured, and BBUs and power equipment can be installed in the IMB03 cabinets.


Context l


l




l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1457




l



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)




1458




l


l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1459






2.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1460




3.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1461







----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1462



20.4.2 Installing the Power Equipment The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B is installed in the IMB03 in DC scenarios, and the EPS30-4815AF or ETP48100-B1 is installed in the IMB03 in AC scenarios.

Context l

The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, DCDU-12B, EPS30-4815AF, or ETP48100-B1 is installed in the 1 U space in the IMB03.

l

The following describes the procedure for installing a DCDU. The procedures for installing a DCDU-03B, a DCDU-11B, a DCDU-12B, a EPS30-4815AF, and a ETP48100-B1 in the IMB03 are the same.

NOTICE The IMB03 that is equipped with an ETP48100-B1 must be installed in an equipment room that only maintenance personnel can enter.

Procedure Step 1 Optional: Move the mounting ears on the DCDU-03B if the DCDU-03B is installed in the IMB03, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the four M4 screws from the mounting ears on both sides of the DCDU.

2.

Move each mounting ear backwards by one hole and tighten the four removed M4 screws on the mounting ears to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Figure 20-46 Moving the mounting ears on the DCDU

Step 2 Slide the DCDU slowly into the corresponding slots along the guide rails according to the slot assignment drawings. NOTE

The external power input port should be kept in the lower part of the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, DCDU-12B, EPS30-4815AF, or ETP48100-B1.

Step 3 Use a screwdriver to tighten the four M6x16 screws, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1463



Figure 20-47 Installing the DCDU

(1) External power input port

(2) DCDU

----End






l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1464



l




l


l


l


l


l




l


l




l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l

Determine the positions where the clips are installed according to the actual situation. For example, 7/8" feeders are secured with clips at an interval of 1.5 m to 2 m (4.92 ft to 6.56

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1465



ft), CPRI fiber optic cables and power cables are secured with clips at an interval of 1 m to 1.5 m (3.28 ft to 4.92 ft). Ensure that the clips are evenly spaced and in the same direction. l




l







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1466




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1467




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1468



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1469



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1470





l


l


l


20.5.2 Cable Installation Process This section describes the process of installing IMB03 cables.

Process of Installing IMB03 Cables Figure 20-56 shows the cable installation process.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1471



Figure 20-56 Process of installing IMB03 cables

20.5.3 Removing the protective plates at the bottom of the IMB03 This section describes procedures for removing the protective plates at the bottom of the IMB03.

Procedure Step 1 Remove the protective plates at the bottom of the IMB03, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1472



Figure 20-57 Removing the protective plates

NOTE

After all cables are installed, if there is still spare space in the cable holes, cut the protective plates to an appropriate shape to seal the cable holes.

----End

20.5.4 Installing a PGND Cable This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing PGND cables for the IMB03 and modules in this cabinet.

Context The following table lists the specifications of the PGND cables for the IMB03 and modules in the IMB03. Table 20-1 Specifications of the PGND cables

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

PGND cable for the IMB03


Add corresponding OT terminals to the PGND cable onsite.

Green and yellow




Green and yellow

PGND cable for the ETP48100-B1



Green and yellow

PGND cable for the GPS surge protector



Green and yellow


1473



NOTICE When routing the PGND cable at the bottom of the IMB03, avoid obstructing the heat dissipation holes of the IMB03.



2.


Step 2 Install a PGND cable for the IMB03, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the OT terminal at one end of the PGND cable to one of the ground screws inside the IMB03.

2.

Connect the other end of the PGND cable to an external ground bar. Figure 20-58 Installing the PGND cable for the IMB03

Step 3 Install a PGND cable for the DCDU, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the OT terminal at one end of the PGND cable to one of the ground screws on the DCDU.

2.

Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the PGND cable to one of the ground screws inside the IMB03. NOTE

The PGND cables for the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B are installed in the same way. This section uses the DCDU-03B as an example.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1474



Figure 20-59 Installing a PGND cable for the DCDU

Step 4 Install a PGND cable for the ETP48100-B1, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the OT terminal at one end of the PGND cable to one of the ground screws on the ETP48100-B1.

2.

Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the PGND cable to one of the ground screws inside the IMB03. Figure 20-60 Installing a PGND cable for the ETP48100-B1

Step 5 Install the PGND cable for the GPS surge protector, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the OT terminal at one end of the PGND cable to one of the ground screws on the GPS surge protector.

2.

Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the PGND cable to one of the ground screws inside the IMB03.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1475



Figure 20-61 Installing the PGND cable for the GPS surge protector



Installing Input Power Cables for the IMB03 The IMB03 input power cables connect to the power devices in the IMB03 and the external power devices, feeding power to components in the IMB03.

Context The input power cables for the IMB03 are classified into the DCDU power cable, EPS30-4815AF power cable, and ETP48100-B1 power cable according to different power equipment. The following tables lists the specifications of the power cables. Table 20-2 Specifications of the input power cables

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cable

One End

The Other End

DCDU power cables



EPS30-4815AF power cable

C13 connector


1476



Cable

One End

ETP48100-B1 power cable


The Other End

NOTE


NOTICE When routing the input power cables for the IMB03 on the bottom of the IMB03, avoid obstructing the heat dissipation holes of the IMB03.

Procedure l

Install the DCDU power cables. 1.


2.

Add OT terminals at one end of the cables according to the specifications in Table 20-2 and the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

3.

Route the power cables into the cabinet.

4.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cables to the DC input terminals NEG(-) and RTN(+) on the DCDU, as shown in the following figure. Figure 20-62 Installing the DCDU power cables

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1477



l

5.

Connect the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.

6.

Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind them.

7.


Install power cables for the EPS30-4815AF or ETP48100-B1. 1.


2.

Strip 45 mm (1.77 in.) of jacket off the end of the power cable, as shown in the following figure. Figure 20-63 Stripping the jacket off the power cable

3.

Optional: When an ETP48100-B1 is used, add OT terminals to one end of the power cable according to Table 20-2. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. When an EPS30-4815AF is used, skip this step.

4.

Route the power cables into the cabinet.

5.

Connect the power cables to the ports on the corresponding power equipment. – When an EPS30-4815AF is used, connect the end of the power cable with a C13 connector to the AC INPUT port on the external AC input terminal on the EPS30-4815AF, as shown in Figure 20-64. – When an ETP48100-B1 is used, do as follows: Cut a big hole in the rat-resistant net at the bottom of the IMB03, as shown in Figure 20-65. Route the power cable through the big hole in the rat-resistant net. Connect the brown and blue wires to the L/L1 and N/L2 wiring terminals on the input side of the ETP48100-B1, and the green and yellow wire to the ground point on the IMB03, as shown in Figure 20-66. Figure 20-64 Installing the EPS30-4815AF power cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1478



Figure 20-65 Cutting a big hole in the rat-resistant net

Figure 20-66 Installing the ETP48100-B1 power cable

6.

Connect the other end of the power cable to the external power equipment.

7.

Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind them.

8.


----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1479



Installing BBU Power Cables This section describes the procedure for installing the BBU power cables in an IMB in AC and DC scenarios.


Power Equipment

One End

The Other End

Color

BBU power cable (in an AC-powered IMB)

EPS30-4815 AF

3V3 connector

H4 connector

-

ETP48100B1

3V3 connector

EPC5 connector

-

DCDU-03B

3V3 connector


Black

BBU power cable (in a DC-powered IMB)

RTN (+) NEG (-)

Blue

-

DCDU-11B

-

DCDU-12B

3V3 connector


-

EPC4 connector

NOTE


Procedure l

Install the BBU power cable in an AC-powered IMB, as shown in Figure 20-67 and Figure 20-68. 1.

Optional: Add a connector to the BBU power cable when the ETP48100-B1 supplies power to the BBU, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable.

2.


3.

Connect the other end of the BBU power cable to the corresponding port on the power equipment. – When an EPS30-4815AF supplies power, the H4 connector at the other end of the BBU power cable is connected to the LOAD1 port on the EPS30-4815AF. – When an ETP48100-B1 supplies power, the EPC5 connector at the other end of the BBU power cable is connected to the LOAD3 port on the ETP48100-B1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1480



Figure 20-67 Installing a BBU power cable (when the EPS30-4815AF supplies power)

Figure 20-68 Installing a BBU power cable (when the ETP48100-B1 supplies power)

l

4.


5.


Install the BBU power cable in a DC-powered IMB, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Add a connector to the BBU power cable on the power equipment.


1481



– If a DCDU-03B supplies power, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. – If a DCDU-11B supplies power, see Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(2). – If a DCDU-12B supplies power, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable. NOTE

A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. OT terminals must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.

2.


CAUTION Ensure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station must be connected to the BBU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury. 3.

Add a connector to the BBU power cable on the power equipment. – When the DCDU-03B supplies power, connect the OT terminals on the blue wire and black wire at the other end of the BBU power cable to the NEG(-) and RTN (+) terminals, respectively, near the LOAD6 silkscreen on the DCDU-03B. Then tighten the screws on the connector to 1.2 N·m (10.61 lbf·in.). – When the DCDU-11B supplies power, connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at the other end of the BBU power cable to the LOAD6 port on the DCDU-11B. – When the DCDU-12B supplies power, connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on the DCDU-12B. NOTE

When the BBU is configured with two UPEUs, each UPEU must be connected to the power equipment by using a BBU power cable. The 3V3 connector at one end of the second BBU power cable is connected to the -48V port on the UPEU, and the EPC4 connector, tool-less female connector (pressfit type), or OT terminal at the other end is connected to the LOAD7 port or LOAD7 terminal on the DCDU. NOTE

The following figure shows how to install a BBU power cable when the BBU is powered by a DCDU-03B. The BBU power cable is installed in the same way when the BBU is powered by a DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1482



Figure 20-69 Installing a BBU power cable (in a DC-powered IMB)

4.


5.


----End

Installing RRU Power Cables This section describes the procedure for installing the RRU power cables in the IMB in AC and DC scenarios.

Context The specifications of an RRU power cable are the same when the EPS30-4815AF or the DCDU-03B supplies power to the RRUs, as shown in the following table. Table 20-4 Specifications of an RRU power cable (1) Cable RRU power cable

RTN (+)

One End

The Other End

Color

Bent by 90 degrees, OT terminals (M4, 3.3 mm2 or 0.005 in.2 (12AWG))


North American standard Black

NEG (-)

North American standard Blue

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1483



Cable RRU power cable

One End RTN (+)

The Other End


Color European standard Brown

NEG (-)

European standard Blue

The following table lists the specifications of an RRU power cable when a DCDU-11B supplies power to the RRUs. Table 20-5 Specifications of an RRU power cable (2) Cable RRU power cable

RTN (+)

One End

The Other End

Color

Remarks



North American/ European standard

A cable with a black jacket and two wires inside

Black/brown NEG (-)

North American/ European standard Blue

When an ETP48100-B1 and DCDU-12B supplies power, the specifications of RRU power cables are the same, as shown in the following table. Table 20-6 Specifications of an RRU power cable (3) Cable RRU power cable

RTN (+)

One End

The Other End

Color

Remarks

EPC5 connector


North American/ European standard

A cable with a black jacket and two wires inside

Black/brown

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1484



Cable

One End

The Other End

NEG (-)

Color

Remarks

North American/ European standard Blue

NOTE


NOTICE When routing the RRU power cable on the bottom of the IMB03, do not block the heat dissipation holes on the IMB03.

Procedure l

The following figure shows the procedure for installing RRU power cables in an ACpowered IMB. 1.

Add a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side. – For details about cable connections when the EPS30-4815AF supplies the power, seeAssembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. – For details about cable connections when the ETP48100-B1 supplies the power, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable

2.

Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the RRU side to the power port on the RRU.

CAUTION Ensure that the RRU power cable for an RRU added to a running base station must be connected to the RRU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury. 3.

Route the RRU power cable from the RRU side to the power equipment side through the feeder window. Install a ground clip near the feeder window outside the equipment room, and connect the PGND cable on the ground clip to the external ground bar. The installation procedure of ground clip is as follows: a.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Use a utility knife to strip 63 mm (2.48 in.) long jacket off the power cable to expose the shield layer. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1485



Figure 20-70 Stripping the jacket off the power cable

b.


(1) Hole for a cable tie (12AWG/4 mm2 or 0.006 (2) Hole for a cable tie (≥ 6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2) in.2)

c.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Wrap three layers of waterproof tape and three layers of insulation tape around the ground clip.


1486



Figure 20-72 Wrapping the waterproof tape and insulation tape

(1) Waterproof tape

(2) Insulation tape

(3) Cable tie

(4) Power cable

(5) PGND cable

-

NOTICE Trim off surplus part of the cable ties at the position 3 mm (0.12 in.) to 5 mm (0.20 in.) away from the head of the cable tie. 4.

Connect the other end of the RRU power cable to the corresponding port on the power equipment, as shown in Figure 20-73 and Figure 20-74. – When the EPS30-4815AF supplies power, connect the OT terminals on the blue and black (or brown) wires of the power cable to the RRU terminal on the EPS30-4815AF. – When the ETP48100-B1 supplies power, the EPC5 connector on the power cable is connected to the LOAD1 port on the ETP48100-B1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1487



Figure 20-73 Installing an RRU power cable (when an EPS30-4815AF supplies power)

Figure 20-74 Installing an RRU power cable (when an ETP48100-B1 supplies power)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1488


20 Indoor Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IMB03 NOTE

l When 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power is supplied and an EPS30-4815AF is used, only one RRU is supported. When an ETP48100-B1 supplies power, three RRUs are supported. l No surge protection is required for DC power supply. In this case, the maximum length of an RRU power cable is 5 m (16.4 ft.).

l

5.


6.

Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

The following figure shows the procedure for installing RRU power cables in a DCpowered IMB. 1.

Add a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side. – If a DCDU-03B supplies power, see Adding OT Terminals to the DC RRU Power Cable on the DCDU Side. – If a DCDU-11B supplies power, see Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(2). – If a DCDU-12B supplies power, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable.

2.

Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the RRU side to the power port on the RRU.

CAUTION Ensure that the RRU power cable for an RRU added to a running base station must be connected to the RRU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury. 3.

Route the RRU power cable from the RRU side to the power equipment side through the feeder window. Install a ground clip near the feeder window outside the equipment room, and connect the PGND cable on the ground clip to the external ground bar. The installation procedure of ground clip is as follows: a.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1489



b.


(1) Hole for a cable tie (12AWG/4 mm2 or 0.006 (2) Hole for a cable tie (≥ 6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2) in.2)

c.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(1) Waterproof tape

(2) Insulation tape

(3) Cable tie

(4) Power cable

(5) PGND cable

-


1490



NOTICE Trim off surplus part of the cable ties at the position 3 mm (0.12 in.) to 5 mm (0.20 in.) away from the head of the cable tie. 4.

Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the power equipment side to the power equipment. – When the DCDU-12B supplies power, connect the EPC5 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD0 port on the DCDU-12B. – When the DCDU-11B supplies power, connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the power cable to the LOAD0 port on the DCDU-11B. – When the DCDU-03B supplies power, connect the OT terminals on the blue wire and black or brown wire at one end of the RRU power cable to the NEG(-) and RTN(+) terminals near the LOAD0 silkscreen on the DCDU-03B, respectively, then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.). NOTE

When -48 V DC power is supplied, three DC multimode RRUs are supported, and the RRU power cables can be connected to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 terminals on the DCDU-03B. The following figure shows how to install RRU power cables when the RRU is powered by a DCDU-03B. The RRU power cable is installed in the same way when the RRU is powered by a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B.

Figure 20-78 Installing an RRU power cable in a DC-powered IMB

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1491



5.


6.

Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End


Installing the E1/T1 Cables E1/T1 cables transmit E1/T1 signals from the BBU to the external transmission equipment.

Prerequisites Ensure that both ends of the E1/T1 cable are disconnected from any equipment. Then solder a connector to each E1/T1 cable during the same session.

Context This section uses the scenario where the UMPT is configured as an example. For cable connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

NOTICE When the IMB03 is installed on a wall, ensure that the space between the E1/T1 cable and the GPS clock signal cable is not less than 10 mm (0.39 in.).

Procedure Step 1 Connect the DB26 male connector of the E1/T1 cable to the E1/T1 port on the GTMU/WMPT/ UMPT/UTRP, as shown in the following figure. Figure 20-79 Installing the E1/T1 cable



1492




Installing the FE/GE Ethernet Cables When a distributed base station is applied to the indoor scenario, the FE/GE Ethernet cables connect the BBU and the external transmission equipment to transmit the baseband signals.

Context l


l


Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE/GE0 port on the UMPT in the BBU, as shown in the following figure. Figure 20-80 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable



Context l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1493







2.


3.


4.


5.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1494





Step 3 Lay out the cables along the cable trough on the right side of the cabinet, and then use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 20.5.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. ----End




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1495






Context NOTE





1496



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.






2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1497





20.5.9 Installing a Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Equipment This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cable for the EPS30-4815AF or ETP48100-B1 when AC power is supplied.

Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the power equipment to the MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU. Step 2 Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the power equipment. l

When using the EPS30-4815AF, connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable to the RS232 or RS485 port on the PMU of the EPS30-4815AF, as shown in Figure 20-88.

l

When using the ETP48100-B1, connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the PMU of the ETP48100-B1, as shown in Figure 20-89.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1498



Figure 20-88 Installing the monitoring signal cable for the power equipment (1)

Figure 20-89 Installing the monitoring signal cable for the power equipment (2)


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1499



20.6 IMB03 Hardware Installation Checklist After the subrack is installed, you need to check whether the hardware is properly installed. The table lists the standards for checking the hardware. Table 20-7 Hardware installation checklist No.

Item

1

The installation position of each device strictly complies with the engineering design and meets the requirements for installation clearances. Sufficient space is reserved for equipment maintenance.

2

The IMB03, BBU, and auxiliary devices are securely installed, and all screws are tightened.

3

The DIP switches on the BBU are correctly set.

4

None of power cables and PGND cables is short-circuited or reversely connected. In addition, these cables are not damaged or broken.

5

There are no connectors or joints on each power cable or PGND cable.

6

The OT terminals at both ends of each power cable or PGND cable are securely crimped.

7

Bare wires and OT terminals connected to the wiring terminals are tightly wrapped with insulation tapes or heat shrink tubing.

8

The work grounding and protection grounding of the base station share one group of ground bodies with the surge protection grounding of the building.

9

The connectors of signal cables are intact, and these cables are not damaged or broken.

10

The distance between the bundled fibers and the BBU panel is between 40 mm (1.57 in.) and 70 mm (2.76 in.). This avoids the interference by the door.

11


12

Labels are correct, legible, and complete at both ends of each cable.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1500



Prerequisites l

Input power cables for the IMB03 are correctly connected.

l

The power supply to the IMB03 meets the requirements of the power system.

l

The external power supply to the IMB03 is shut off.

l


l

Boards, modules, and cables are installed in the cabinet.

Context


Table 20-8 Circuit breakers in an IMB03 Cabinet

Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker

IMB03

EPS30-4815AF or ETP48100-B1

l Circuit breaker for the transmission equipment l Circuit breaker for the RRU

Procedure Step 1 Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit. Step 2 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the IMB03. Step 3 Set circuit breakers connecting to loads on the power supply devices to ON. Step 4 Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON, and check the power supply to components in the cabinet according to the following table.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1501




Component


IMB03

BBU


-


RRU

l The ALM indicator is steady off. a: If the CPRI indicator is steady red, the optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is broken. In this case, check the optical module or fiber optic cable.

NOTE



Handling Measure





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1502



Failure Type

Handling Measure



----End

Example The following figure shows the power-on check process for a DBS3900 in AC scenarios.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1503



Figure 20-90 Power-on check process in AC scenarios

The following figure shows the power-on check process for a DBS3900 in DC scenarios. NOTE

The power-on check processes in DC scenarios for DBS3900s using a DCDU-03B, a DCDU-11B, and a DCDU-12B are the same.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1504



Figure 20-91 Power-on check process in DC scenarios

20.8 Installing the Cover Plate of the IMB03 Subrack This section describes procedures for installing the cover plate of the IMB03 subrack.

Procedure Step 1 Align the hooks on the cover plate of the IMB03 subrack with the IMB03 slots, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1505



Figure 20-92 Installing the cover plate

Step 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the M3x8 bolt at the bottom of the cover plate to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 20-93 Securing the cover plate

----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1506

21 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TP48600A


21

Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TP48600A

About This Chapter This chapter describes the process for installing components in a TP48600A and related cables of a DBS3900 in an outdoor AC scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in a TP48600A. 21.1 Installation Process When the DBS3900 is deployed outdoors with AC power supply and the BBU is installed in a TP48600A cabinet, you need to install other components in the TP48600A cabinet and cables. Some optional components may also need to be installed based on site requirements. 21.2 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable A PGND cable connects a PGND screw in a cabinet and a PGND bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets. 21.3 Installing Mandatory Components This chapter provides the reference for installing mandatory components in a DBS3900. 21.4 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables This chapter describes procedures for installing the optional modules and their cables onsite. 21.5 Installing Cables You need to install the external cables and cables for mandatory components in the DBS3900 onsite. 21.6 Installation Checklist After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation environment, and cable-related items. 21.7 Powering On a Base Station This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply to the components in a cabinet. 21.8 Subsequent Operations

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1507



This chapter describes the operations that need to be performed after the installation, which include sealing the cable holes on the base of the cabinet and repainting the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1508



21.1 Installation Process When the DBS3900 is deployed outdoors with AC power supply and the BBU is installed in a TP48600A cabinet, you need to install other components in the TP48600A cabinet and cables. Some optional components may also need to be installed based on site requirements. The following figure shows the installation process. NOTE

l This section only describes how to install components and cables in the TP48600A cabinet. For details about how to install the TP48600A cabinet, service outlet unit (SOU), external AC input power cable, heater, storage batteries, and storage battery-related cables, see the TP48600A-H17B1 Quick Installation Guide. l For details about how to install an RRU, see the related RRU installation guides. l The outdoor cable conversion box (OCB) is used to connect cables with different cross-sectional areas, and it is optional. For details about an OCB, see the OCB User Guide.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1509



Figure 21-1 DBS3900 Installation Process

The following figure shows the cable installation process.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1510



Figure 21-2 Cable Installation Process

21.2 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable A PGND cable connects a PGND screw in a cabinet and a PGND bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.

Context l

The equipotential cable between the TP48600A and TMC11H (Ver.C) and between the TP48600A and IBBS300D/IBBS300T must use OT terminals (M6, 25 mm2 or 0.039 in.2. The equipotential cable between other types of cabinets must use OT terminals (M6, 35 mm2 or 0.054 in.2).

l

The PGND cable and equipotential cable need to be prepared onsite. The following table lists the specifications of the PGND cable and equipotential cable. Table 21-1 Cable specifications

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cable

CrossSectional Area

Connector

Color

PGND cable

35 mm2 (0.054 in.2)

OT terminal (M6)

Green and yellow

Equipotential cable

25 mm2 or 35 mm2 (0.039 in.2 or 0.054 in.2)

OT terminal (M6)

Green and yellow


1511




Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the PGND cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground busbar.

2.

Route the other end of the PGND cable into the cable outlet on the bottom left side of the TP48600A, and connect the cable to the ground bar in the TP48600A.

NOTICE When installing the PGND cable, ensure that the OT terminals on the PGND cable are oriented correctly and that the screws are tightened to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1512





(2) Ground bar for the site

Step 3 Install the equipotential cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the cable to the ground bar in the TP48600A.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the ground bar in a second cabinet.

Figure 21-5 Installing an equipotential cable (1)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1513



Figure 21-6 Installing an equipotential cable (2)




Context l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1514




l




l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1515





l



l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1516




l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1517




2.


3.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1518







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1519




----End





2.


3.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1520





----End


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1521




Context l


l

Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks


RJ45 connector

RJ45 connector



Bare wire


-


Procedure Step 1 Optional: If there is a filler module in the installation position, remove the filler module, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1522





2.


3.




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1523



Step 4 Install the surge protection transfer cable for the monitoring signals, as shown in the following figure. Figure 21-23 Installing the surge protection transfer cable for the monitoring signals

1.


2.


3.

Connect the other three surge protection transfer cables, as shown in the following figure. Figure 21-24 Connections of the surge protection transfer cable for the monitoring signals

Step 5 Install external dry contact monitoring signal cables for the SLPU, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Cut the external dry contact alarm cable to length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Strip an 8 mm (0.31 in) length of the jacket off the cable connected to the SLPU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1524



3.

Use a screwdriver to press the bulge of the connector, insert the bare wire of the cable into the connector, and then move the screwdriver away. Pull the cable slightly to check whether it is securely connected.

Figure 21-25 Installing the external dry contact monitoring signal cables for the SLPU


21.4.2 Installing the EMUA/EMUB When an outdoor base station uses 17 to 32 customized alarm inputs, you need to install the EMUA/EMUB and its cables.

Context l


l

The following table lists the specifications of the cables for the EMUA/EMUB. Table 21-3 Cable specifications Cable EMUA/ EMUB

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

RTN(+) wire

Color

One End

The Other End

Black

EPC4 connector

Cord end terminal


1525



Cable power cable

Color NEG(-) wire


One End

The Other End

DB9 male connector

RJ45 connector

Blue Black

Procedure Step 1 Optional: If there is a filler module in the installation position, remove the filler module, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.






Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1526




Step 3 Optional: Align the cable claws with the holes of the mounting ears on the EMUB, and stick the cable claws onto both sides of the EMUB, as shown in the following figure. If you want to install an EMUA, skip this step. Figure 21-28 Sticking cable claws onto both sides of an EMUB




2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1527




Step 5 Install the EMUA/EMUB power cables, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Add a connector to the end of the power cable. For details, see Assembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.

2.


3.

Add a corresponding connector to the other end of the cables according to the type of the base station, and connect the connector to the corresponding installation position, as listed in the following table. Table 21-4 Installation position of the EMUA/EMUB power cables

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Base Station Type




BTS3900AL (Ver.A)

-


LOAD 1 port on DCDU-12C

DBS3900

The EMUA/EMUB is installed in the TP48600A cabinet.


LOAD 2 port on DCDU-11C


1528



Figure 21-30 Installing the EMUA/EMUB power cables

4.


5.



Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the cable to the RS-485 port on the EMUA or COM_485 port on the EMUB.

2.

Install the other end of the cable according to whether the HAU is configured, as listed in the following table.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1529



Table 21-5 Method of installing the EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable Base Station Type


Configuration of the HAU

Installation Method

BTS3900AL (Ver.A)

-

An HAU is configured.

1. Remove the screws from the cover plate of the HAU maintenance compartment and open the cover plate of the compartment. 2. Route the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable through the cable hole on the cover plate into the HAU and connect the cables to the vacant COM_OUT port on the HAU. 3. Close the cover plate and tighten the screws on it.

DBS3900

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

The EMUA/EMUB is installed in the TP48600A cabinet.

No HAU is configured.

Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable to the D_COM3 port on the CCU.

No HAU is configured.

Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable to the D_COM3 port on the CCU.


1530




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1531



3.


4.


----End


Context NOTE

l This section describes the procedure for installing a GPS surge protector in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet and TP48600A cabinet. The procedures for installing GPS surge protectors in the BTS3900AL DC cabinet and BTS3900AL AC cabinet are the same. l A satellite card needs to be installed onsite only for a USCU that uses two satellite cards. To install a satellite card, perform steps 1 to 3.




2.


3.


4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1532





(1) Satellite card


Step 3 Optional: Install the USCU in the BBU, and tighten the captive screws on the USCU to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.). Step 4 Install the GPS clock signal cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Secure the Type N female connector at one end of the cable onto the support for the GPS surge protector.

2.

Connect the SMA male connector at the other end of the cable to the GPS port on the USCU in the BBU.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1533


21 Outdoor AC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TP48600A NOTE



(1) Support for the GPS surge protector

(2) Washer

(3) Nut

(4) BBU

Step 5 Install the GPS surge protector, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Use an inner hexagon wrench to connect the M8 OT terminal at one end of the PGND cable for the GPS surge protector to the ground terminal for the GPS surge protector until the tightening torque ranges from 6 N·m (53.1 lbf·in.) to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

2.

Use a wrench to secure the Protect port on the GPS surge protector onto the Type N female connector at one end of the GPS signal cable until the tightening torque reaches 1 N·m (8.85 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the other end of the PGND cable for the GPS surge protector to the ground bar for the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1534



Figure 21-35 Installing the GPS surge protector

Step 6 Install the GPS jumper, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Install a Type N50 straight male connector at each end of the cable according to the instructions in Installing the Type N Coaxial Connector.

3.

Connect one end of the cable to the Type N female connector on the Surge port on the GPS surge protector.

4.

Route the other end of the cable out of the cable hole on the bottom left side of the cabinet, and connect the cable to an external GPS antenna.

5.

Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1535




21.4.4 Installing a DCDU The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B can be installed at a site to supply power to RRUs.

Context The DCDU supplying power to RRUs varies depending on the base station. A BTS3900AL can use the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B. A TP48600A can use the DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B. l

The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B is installed in the same position in a cabinet. It is preferentially installed in the left slot. Figure 21-37 Position of a DCDU

l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

The accessory bag containing the short-circuiting copper bars for the DCDU is bound to the slot in which the DCDU is to be installed. The following figure shows different shortcircuiting copper bars for different DCDUs.


1536



Figure 21-38 Short-circuiting copper bars for DCDUs

(1) Short-circuiting copper bars for the DCDU-12B



NOTE

The procedures for installing all types of DCDUs are the same. This section describes the procedure for installing a DCDU-12B in a BTS3900AL cabinet.

Procedure Step 1 Optional: If a base station is powered on, turn off the upper-level circuit breakers for the DCDU. Otherwise, skip this step. 1.

Optional: If a DCDU has been installed in a BTS3900AL DC cabinet to supply power to RRUs, modify the management status to block all RRUs. For detailed operations, see RRU Hardware Maintenance Guide. Otherwise, skip this step.

2.

Turn off the upper-level circuit breakers for the DCDU.

Step 2 Remove the two screws from the metal protective cover for the BusBar, and raise the cover to remove it, as shown in the following figure. Figure 21-39 Removing the protective cover

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1537



Step 3 Remove the filler panel from the slot in which the DCDU is to be installed, and take the shortcircuiting copper bars out of the slot. Step 4 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU, as shown in the following figure. Figure 21-40 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU


Step 5 Hold the DCDU with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears on both sides of the DCDU contact the columns. Step 6 Align the holes on the mounting ears on both sides of the DCDU with the holes on the columns, and insert and tighten four M6 screws to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 21-41 Installing a DCDU

Step 7 Remove the plastic protective cover for the input terminals from the DCDU. Step 8 Install the short-circuiting copper bars for the DCDU, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1538



Figure 21-42 Installing the short-circuiting copper bars

Step 9 Install the removed plastic protective cover onto the DCDU, as shown in the following figure. Figure 21-43 Installing the plastic protective cover onto the DCDU

Step 10 Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to remove one or two parts from the metal protective cover for the BusBar corresponding to the DCDU, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1539



Figure 21-44 Removing one or two parts from the metal protective cover

Step 11 Install the protective cover onto the BusBar, as shown in the following figure. Figure 21-45 Installing the protective cover onto the BusBar

----End

21.4.5 Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T When an outdoor base station requires the medium- to long-term backup power, you need to configure one IBBS700D or IBBS700T and install storage batteries in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T cabinet.

Context There are eight power cables for storage batteries. One end of the power cables has already been connected to the power distribution box before delivery. The installation personnel only need to connect the other end of the power cables to the storage batteries onsite. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1540



DANGER l During the installation, avoid any contact between the exposed metal conductors in the power cables and the metal housing of the cabinet. l During the installation, avoid short circuits or reverse connections between the positive and negative poles of the storage batteries. l All tools used for installation must be insulated to avoid burning of storage batteries and to ensure personal safety.

Procedure Step 1 Check that the BAT circuit breaker on the input power device has been turned off. If the BAT circuit breaker is turned on, an excessively large current may occur. Step 2 Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown in the following figure. NOTE



Step 3 Install the power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

You need to install the positive cables first and then the negative cables for the storage batteries when installing the power cables for the storage batteries.

1. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Remove the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1541



2.

Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring storage batteries, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws.

3.

Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end of the black wire to the BTA(-) on the power distribution box and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the M8 screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.). Then connect the OT terminal at the other end to the negative poles of the storage battery and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws.

4.

Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end of the red wire to the BTA(+) on the power distribution box and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the M8 screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.). Then connect the OT terminal at the other end to the positive poles of the storage battery and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws.

5.

Reinstall the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries. NOTE

Serial connection copper bars between storage batteries and wiring terminals for storage batteries use the same screws, which are either M6 or M8 screws. The torque used for an M6 screws is 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.) and the torque used for an M8 screw is 14 N·m (123.91 lbf·in.).



21.4.6 Installing Storage Batteries in the IBBS300D or IBBS300T When an outdoor base station requires the long-term backup power, you need to install storage batteries and the power cables in the battery cabinet (IBBS300D/IBBS300T). Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1542



Context

DANGER l During the installation, avoid any contact between the exposed metal conductors in the power cables and the metal housing of the cabinet. l During the installation, avoid short circuits or reverse connections between the positive and negative poles of the batteries. l All tools used for installation must be insulated to avoid burning of batteries and to ensure personal safety.

Procedure Step 1 Check that the input and output power switches on the storage batteries has been turned off. If the switches are turned on, an excessively large current may occur. Step 2 Install storage batteries in the sequence shown in the following figure. NOTE


Figure 21-48 Installing storage batteries


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end of the black cable to the NEG(-) terminal in the DC junction box in the inner left side of the battery cabinet, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.). Connect OT terminal at the other end of cable to the negative wiring terminal on the storage batteries, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1543



2.

Connect the M6 OT terminal at one end of the red cable to the terminal on the circuit breaker in the battery cabinet, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.). Connect OT terminal at the other end of cable to the negative wiring terminal on the storage batteries, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw. NOTE

There are two types of screws for copper bars and wiring terminals on storage batteries, M6 and M8. They are tightened to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.) and 14 N·m (123.90 lbf·in.), respectively.

Figure 21-49 Installing power cables for storage batteries

Step 4 Install copper bars for the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the terminal covers from poles of the storage batteries.

2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1544



Figure 21-50 Installing copper bars for storage batteries

Step 5 Close the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries. ----End






l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1545



l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l




l


l




l


l


l




l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1546



l


l


l




l







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1547




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1548




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1549



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1550



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1551





l


l


l


21.5.2 Routing Cables Out of a Cabinet This section describes cable routing through the cable bags in a cabinet and methods for sealing the cable bags.

Cable Bags in the TP48600A The following figure shows cable bags in the TP48600A.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1552



Figure 21-59 Plan view of the cable bags in the TP48600A

Table 21-6 describes the cable routing at the cable bags in the TP48600A. Table 21-6 Cable routing through the cable bags

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Description

Cable bag 1

Used for routing RRU power cables

Cable bag 2

Used for routing RRU power cables, monitoring signal cables, and IBBS700D or IBBS700T DC input power cables

Cable bag 3

Used for routing CPRI fiber optic cables, GPS clock signal cables, transmission cables, and TMC11H (Ver.C) DC input power cables

Cable bag 4

Used for routing CPRI fiber optic cables and external AC input power cables

Cable bag 5

Used for routing RRU power cables

Cable bag 6

Used for routing RRU power cables, monitoring signal cables, IBBS700D or IBBS700T DC input power cables, and red wires of power cables for the IBBS700D or IBBS700T

Cable bag 7

Used for routing CPRI fiber optic cables, black wires of power cables for the IBBS700D or IBBS700T, GPS jumpers, transmission cables, and TMC11H (Ver.C) DC input power cables

Cable bag 8

Used for routing CPRI fiber optic cables, external AC input power cables, and the AC power cable for the junction box


1553



l If the space in cable bags 1 and 5 is insufficient, RRU power cables can be routed through cable bags 2 and 6. l If the space in cable bags 4 and 8 is insufficient, CPRI fiber optic cables can be routed through cable bags 3 and 7.

Installing Cable Bags in the TP48600A Route cables through the bags and pull the drawstrings to fasten the bags tightly around the cables, as shown in the following figure. Figure 21-60 Installing cable bags

CAUTION You need to hold the cable bag and route cables through the cable bag slowly so that cables will not puncture the cable bag.


Installing Power Cables from the TP48600A to TMC11H (Ver.C) Power cables from the TP48600A to the TMC11H (Ver.C) consist of the DCDU-11C power cables and the power cables for the AC junction box. The power cables feed power from the Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1554



TP48600A into the TMC11H (Ver.C). The power cables from the TP48600A to the TMC11H (Ver.C) are optional. They are delivered with the TMC11H (Ver.C).

Context There are two types of power cables from the TP48600A to the TMC11H (Ver.C). Both types need to be prepared onsite. The following table lists the specifications of the cables. Table 21-7 Cable specifications Cable DCDU11C power cables

RTN(+)

Power cables for an AC junction box

L

One End

The Other End

Color



Black (in most regions) or blue (in other regions)

NEG(-)

Blue (in most regions) or gray (in other regions) OT terminal (M4, 2.5 mm2 or 0.004 in.2)

N


PE

Brown Blue Green and yellow

NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Prepare power cables. 1.


2.

Route the cables through a cable bag into the TP48600A.

3.

Install connectors at both ends of the cables according to the instructions in Assembling the Power Series 120 Connector and the Power Cable and Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the DCDU-11C power cables, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the power series 120 connector at one end of the cable to the LOAD2 terminal on the left side of the TP48600A.

2.

Route the cables into the cable hole on the bottom left side of the TMC11H (Ver.C).

3.

Remove the left plastic protective cover for the DCDU-11C in the TMC11H (Ver.C).

4.

Connect the OT terminals on the other end of the cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals on the terminal block for the DCDU-11C.

5.

Replace the plastic protective cover.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1555



Figure 21-61 Installing the DCDU-11C power cables

(1) Plastic protective cover

(2) Cable outlet module

(3) DCDU-11C

(4) ETP48400

Step 3 Install the power cables for the junction boxes, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the shells of all the AC junction boxes.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L3, N3, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in the TP48600A.

3.

Route the cables into the cable hole on the bottom left side of the TMC11H (Ver.C).

4.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L, N, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in the TMC11H (Ver.C).

5.

Reinstall the shells of all the AC junction boxes.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1556



Figure 21-62 Power cables for an AC junction box

(1) Shell of an AC junction box

(2) AC junction box


Installing Power Cables Between the TP48600A and the IBBS700D or IBBS700T This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables at a site where an IBBS700D or IBBS700T is configured.

Prerequisites Check that the BAT switch on the ETP48400 in the TP48600A has been turned off. If the BAT switch is turned on, an excessively large current may occur.

Context Power cables from the TP48600A to the IBBS700D or IBBS700T consist of power cables for the IBBS700D or IBBS700T, power cables for the power distribution box, and power cables for the junction box. These cables need to be prepared onsite. The following table lists the specifications of the cables. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1557



Table 21-8 Cable specifications Cable

One End


RTN(+)

Power cables for the power distribution box

RTN(+)

Power cables for an AC junction box

L

NEG(-)

The Other End


Red


Black (in most regions) or blue (in other regions)

NEG(-)

N

Color

Black

Blue (in most regions) or gray (in other regions) OT terminal (M4, 2.5 mm2 or 0.004 in.2)

PE

Brown Blue Green and yellow

DANGER All tools used for installation must be insulated to prevent the batteries from burning and ensure personal safety. NOTE




2.

Route the cables through a cable bag into the TP48600A.

3.

Install connectors at both ends of the cables according to the instructions in Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(1) and Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install two groups of power cables for the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the shells of all the DC junction boxes.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the terminals of the DC junction box.

3.

Route the cables into the cable holes on both sides at the bottom of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1558



4.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cables to the NEG(-)_0, RTN(+)_0, NEG (-)_1, and RTN(+)_1 terminals in the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

5.

Reinstall the shells of all the DC junction boxes.

Figure 21-63 Installing power cables for the IBBS700D or IBBS700T

(1) Shell of a DC junction box

(2) DC junction box

(3) Cable bag

(4) Power distribution box

Step 3 Install the power cables for the power distribution box, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Insert one end of the cable into the LOAD9 port on the DCDU-11C in the TP48600A.

2.

Route the cable into the cable outlet module on the bottom right side of the battery cabinet.

3.

Insert the other end of the cable into the DC INPUT port on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1559



Figure 21-64 Power cables for the power distribution box

Step 4 Install the power cables for the junction boxes, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the shells of all the AC junction boxes.

2.

Connect one end of the cables to the L3, N3, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in the TP48600A.

3.

Connect the other end of the cables to the L, N, and PE terminals in the AC junction boxes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

4.

Route the cables into the cable hole at the bottom left of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

5.

Reinstall the shells of all the AC junction boxes.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1560



Figure 21-65 Power cables for an AC junction box


(2) AC junction box


Installing Power Cables Between the TP48600A and IBBS300D/IBBS300T (TP48600A:IBBS=1:1) This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables when a site is configured with one IBBS300D/IBBS300T.


Context A site can only be configured with either the IBBS300D or IBBS300T. The following table lists the specifications of power cables between the TP48600A and IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1561



Table 21-9 Specifications of the power cables between the TP48600A and IBBS300D/ IBBS300T Cable

Color

One End

RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black


Fan power RTN(+) cable in the IBBS300D NEG(-) and TEC power cable in the IBBS300T

Black

Power cable for an AC junction box (optional)

L

Brown

N wire

Blue

Power cables for the IBBS300D/ IBBS300T

Blue


The Other End



DANGER All tools used for installation must be insulated to prevent the batteries from burning and ensure personal safety. NOTE

l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l The method of installing the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS300T is the same as the method of installing the power cable for the fan in the IBBS300D. This section describes the method of installing the power cable for the fan in the IBBS300D as an example.



2.

Route the cable through a cable bag into the TP48600A.

3.

Add a connector or terminals to each end of the power cables according to Table 21-9. For detailed operations, see Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(1) and Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install power cables for the IBBS300D/IBBS300T, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the shells of all DC junction boxes.

2.

Connect the OT terminal at one end of the black cable to the wiring terminal in the DC junction box labeled NEG(-) on the left of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T, and connect the OT

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1562



terminal at one end of the red cable to the wiring terminal in the DC junction box labeled RTN(+) on the right of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.). 3.

Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the black cable to the terminal in the DC junction box in the inner left side of the TP48600A, and connect the OT terminal at the other end of the red cable to the terminal in the DC junction box in the inner right side of the TP48600A. Then, tighten the screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

4.

Reinstall the protective covers for power input terminals and tighten screws on them to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).


Step 3 Install the power cables for the fan assemblies in the IBBS300Ds, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at the other end to the LOAD9 port on the DCDU-11C in the TP48600A.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1563



Figure 21-67 Installing the power cable for the fan assembly

Step 4 Install the power cables for the AC junction box, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown, blue, and green and yellow wires to the L, N, and PE terminals in the AC junction box and use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the brown, blue, and green and yellow wires to the L3, N3, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in the TP48600A and use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1564



Figure 21-68 Installing the power cable for the AC junction box


(2) AC junction box


Installing Power Cables Between the TP48600A and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts (TP48600A:IBBS=1:2) This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables when a site is configured with two IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts.


Context A site can only be configured with either the IBBS300D or IBBS300T. The following table lists the specifications of power cables between the TP48600A and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1565



Table 21-10 Specifications of the power cables between the TP48600A and IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts Cable

Color

One End

The Other End





Power cables for the IBBS300D/ IBBS300T

RTN(+)

Red

NEG(-)

Black

Power cables for the fan in an IBBS300D, fan power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds, power cables for the TEC in an IBBS300T, and TEC power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ts

RTN(+)

Black

NEG(-)

Blue

Power cable for the AC junction box (optional) and cascading power cable for the AC junction box (optional)

L

Brown

N wire

Blue


NOTE

l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l The method of installing the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS300T is the same as the method of installing the power cable for the fan in the IBBS300D. This section describes the method of installing the power cable for the fan in the IBBS300D as an example. l The method of installing the TEC power cable between cascaded IBBS300Ts is the same as the method of installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS300Ds. This section describes the method of installing the fan power cable between cascaded IBBS300Ds as an example.

Procedure Step 1 Prepare the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. 1.


2.

Add a connector or terminals to each end of the power cables according to Table 21-10. For detailed operations, see Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(1) and Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1566



Step 2 Install two groups of power cables for the IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Remove the shells of all DC junction boxes.

2.

Connect the OT terminal at one end of the black cable to the wiring terminal in the DC junction box labeled NEG(-) on the left of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T, and connect the OT terminal at one end of the red cable to the wiring terminal in the DC junction box labeled RTN(+) on the right of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the black cable to the terminal in the DC junction box in the inner left side of the TP48600A, and connect the OT terminal at the other end of the red cable to the terminal in the DC junction box in the inner right side of the TP48600A. Then, tighten the screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

4.

Reinstall the protective covers for power input terminals and tighten screws on them to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).


Step 3 Install the power cables for the fan assemblies in the IBBS300Ds, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at the other end to the LOAD9 port on the DCDU-11C in the TP48600A.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1567



Figure 21-70 Installing the power cable for the fan assembly


Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the copper bar labeled NEGon the left DC junction box and to the copper bar labeled RTN+ on the right DC junction box in the lower battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

2.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the copper bar labeled NEGon the left DC junction box and to the copper bar labeled RTN+ on the right DC junction box in the upper battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1568



Figure 21-71 Installing fan power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds

Step 5 Install the power cables for the AC junction box, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown, blue, and green and yellow wires to the L, N, and PE terminals in the AC junction box and use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the brown, blue, and green and yellow wires to the L3, N3, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in the TP48600A and use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1569



Figure 21-72 Installing the power cable for the AC junction box


(2) AC junction box

Step 6 Optional: Install the cascading power cables for the AC junction box, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown, blue, and green and yellow wires to the L1, N1, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in the basic IBBS300D/IBBS300T and use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

3.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the brown, blue, and green and yellow wires to the L, N, and PE terminals in the AC junction box in the extension IBBS300D/IBBS300T and use an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

4.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1570



Figure 21-73 Installing the cascading power cable for AC junction boxes


Installing BBU Power Cables The BBU power cable in the TP48600A feeds power from the DCDU-11C into the BBU.

Context l

When installing the second BBU in the capacity expansion scenario, BBU 1 is installed below BBU 0. For details about the installation scenario, see Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply. The following description is based on the configuration of two BBUs.

l

The following table lists the specifications of a BBU power cable. Table 21-11 Specifications of a BBU power cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Cable

One End

The Other End

BBU power cable

3V3 connector



1571




Procedure Step 1 Add a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) to the BBU power cable. For details, see Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(1). NOTE

A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. A tool-less female connector (pressfit type) must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.

Step 2 Install the power cable for BBU 0, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at the other end to the LOAD4 port on the DCDU-11C. NOTE

When the BBU is configured with two UPEUs, each UPEU must be connected to the power equipment by using a BBU power cable. The 3V3 connectors at one end of the BBU power cables are connected to the -48V ports on the UPEUs, and the tool-less female connectors (pressfit type) at the other end are connected to the LOAD4 and LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-11C.


Step 3 Install the power cable for BBU 1, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at the other end to the LOAD6 port on the DCDU-11C.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1572



When the BBU is configured with two UPEUs, each UPEU must be connected to the power equipment by using a BBU power cable. The 3V3 connectors at one end of the BBU power cables are connected to the -48V ports on the UPEUs, and the tool-less female connectors (pressfit type) at the other end are connected to the LOAD6 and LOAD7 ports on the DCDU-11C.



Installing RRU Power Cables This section describes how to install RRU power cables which feed power from a TP48600A into RRUs when a DCDU-12B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-03B is configured.

Context The following table lists the specifications of an RRU power cable.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1573



Table 21-12 Specifications of an RRU power cable Power Equipmen t

Cable

DCDU-03B

RRU powe r cable

DCDU-11B

Color

One End

The Other End

RTN (+)

Black (North American standard)


NEG (-)

Blue (North American standard)

Bent by 90 degrees, OT terminals (M4, 3.3 mm2 or 0.005 in.2 (12AWG))

RTN (+)

Brown (European standard)

NEG (-)

Blue (European standard)

RTN (+)




Brown (European standard)

DCDU-12B

NEG (-)

Blue

RTN (+)


EPC5 connector

Brown (European standard) NEG (-)

Blue

NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Strip 600 mm (23.62 in.) long insulation layer and shield layer from one end of the RRU power cable to expose two coated wires. At the position 750 mm (29.53 in.) away from the end of the Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1574



RRU power cable, strip 50 mm (1.97 in.) long insulation layer off the power cable to expose the shield layer, as shown in the following figure. Figure 21-76 Stripping the RRU power cable

Step 2 Route an RRU power cable into the cabinet through a cable bag. Step 3 Attach a ground clip to the shield layers of the RRU power cables and tighten the M6 screw on the ground clip to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 21-77 Installing the ground clip

NOTE


Step 4 Add a connector to the RRU power cable on the power equipment side. l If a DCDU-03B supplies power, see Adding OT Terminals to the DC RRU Power Cable on the DCDU Side. l If a DCDU-11B supplies power, see Assembling the Tool-Less Female Connector (Pressfit Type) and the Power Cable(2). l If a DCDU-12B supplies power, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1575



NOTICE When preparing a power cable, cut the power cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route. Step 5 Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the RRU side to the power port on the RRU.

CAUTION Ensure that the RRU power cable for an RRU added to a running base station must be connected to the RRU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury. Step 6 Connect the connector on the RRU power cable on the power equipment side to the power equipment, as shown in the following figure. The following figure shows how to install an RRU power cable when the DCDU-11B supplies power. l When the DCDU-03B supplies power, connect the OT terminals on the blue wire and black or brown wire at the other end of the RRU power cable to the NEG(-) and RTN(+) terminals, respectively, near the LOAD0 silkscreen on the DCDU-03B, tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), . l When the DCDU-11B supplies power, connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) of the power cable to the LOAD0 port on the DCDU-11B. l When the DCDU-12B supplies power, connect the EPC5 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD0 port on the DCDU-12B. NOTE

An RRU power cable can be connected to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12B or DCDU-11B or can be connected to the NEG(-) and RTN(+) terminals near any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 silkscreens the DCDU-03B.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1576






Installing the E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable The E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connects the transmission board and surge protection unit for transferring surge protection signals.

Context For details about cable connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1577



Procedure Step 1 Install the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the DB26 connector at one end of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable to the E1/T1 port on the UMPT, GTMU, UTRP, or WMPT in the BBU, and then tighten the plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).

2.

Connect the DB25 connector at the other end of the E1/T1 cable to the INSIDE port on the UELP in the BBU, and tighten the plastic screws on the connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).




Prerequisites Ensure that both ends of the E1/T1 cable are disconnected from any equipment. Then, solder a connector to each E1/T1 cable during the same session.

Context For cable connections in other scenarios, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cable to the OUTSIDE port on the UELP, as shown in Figure 21-80 or Figure 21-81. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1578



Figure 21-80 Installing the E1/T1 cable (1)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1579



Figure 21-81 Installing the E1/T1 cables (2)

Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cable hole on the bottom left of the cabinet. Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End

Installing the FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable The FE/GE surge protection transfer cable connects the transmission board and UFLP for transferring surge protection signals.

Context l

This section uses the scenario where the UFLPb is configured as an example. For details about cable connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1580



Procedure Step 1 Install the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable 1.

Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to the FE/GE0 port on the UMPT/LMPT or to the FE/GE port on the UTRP.

2.

Connect the other end of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable to the FE/GE0 or FE/ GE1 port near the INSIDE silkscreen on the UFLPB.




Context l


l

This section uses the scenario where the UFLPb is configured as an example. For details about cable connections for other boards, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

l


Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE/GE0 or FE/GE1 port near the OUTSIDE silkscreen on the UFLPb, as shown in Figure 21-83 or Figure 21-84. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1581



Figure 21-83 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable (1)

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1582



Figure 21-84 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cables (2)

Step 2 Install a ground clip onto the FE/GE Ethernet cable at a proper position within 1 m (3.28 ft) from the cable hole of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 21-85. 1.

Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE Ethernet cable, and strip a length of 50 mm (1.97 in.) jacket off the cable to expose the shield layer.

2.

Loosen the screw on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE cable through the clip.

3.

Attach the ground clip to the shield layer of the FE/GE Ethernet cable and tighten the M6 screw on the ground clip to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1583




Step 3 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable out of the cabinet through the cable hole on the bottom left of the cabinet, and then lay out the cable along the left of the cabinet interior. Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End


Context l


l


l


l

The SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on an LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, the two ports cannot be used simultaneously.

l

The SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, the two ports cannot be used simultaneously.

l

The cable described in this section is used for the LMPT in an LO base station. For the cable connections in base stations of other modes, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1584






2.


3.


4.


5.




Step 2 Insert the FE/GE fiber optic cable into the optical module, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1585




Step 3 Lay out the cables along the cable trough on the left side of the cabinet, and then use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End


(Optional) Installing a CCU-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a CCU-BBU monitoring signal cable.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1586



Context When two BBUs are configured, the monitoring signal cable for BBU0 is connected to the U_COM0 port on the CCU, and the the monitoring signal cable for BBU1 is connected to the U_COM1 port on the CCU. NOTE

The following description uses the CCU-BBU monitoring signal cable for BBU0 as an example.

Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the cable to the U_COM0 port on the CCU, as shown in the following figure. Step 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU or UEIU in BBU0, as shown in the following figure. Figure 21-89 Installing the CCU-BBU monitoring signal cable

NOTE

When a BBU is configured with a UPEU and a UEIU or two UPEUs, the CCU can only be connected to the MON0 port on one of the boards, and the MON0 ports on the other boards are not used. Do not connect the MON1 port to the CCU.

Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind it. ----End

(Optional) Installing a CCU-TMC11H (Ver.C) Monitoring Signal Cable This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the CCU-TMC11H (Ver.C) monitoring signal cable. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1587



Procedure Step 1 Install a monitoring signal cable between the TP48600A and the TMC11H (Ver.C), as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the cable to the D_COM7 port on the CCU in the TP48600A.

2.

Route the cable out of the cable bag on the bottom right side of the TP48600A and into the cable outlet module on the bottom right side of the TMC11H (Ver.C).

3.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUE in the TMC11H (Ver.C).

Figure 21-90 Installing the CCU-TMC11H (Ver.C) monitoring signal cable

(1) CMUE

(2) CCU

(3) Cable bag in the TP48600A

(4) Cable outlet module in the TMC11H (Ver.C)

Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind it. Step 3 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole in the cabinet. ----End

(Optional) Installing a Monitoring Signal Cable between the CCU and IBBS700D or between the CCU and the IBBS700T This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cable between the CCU and the IBBS700D or between the CCU and the IBBS700T. The IBBS700D or IBBS700T is shortened to the battery cabinet in this document. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1588



Procedure Step 1 Install a monitoring signal cable between the TP48600A and the battery cabinet, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the cable to the FE_R port on the CCU in the TP48600A.

2.

Route the cable out of the cable bag on the bottom right side of the TP48600A and into the cable bag on the bottom left side of the battery cabinet.

3.

Connect the other end of the cable to the FE_L port on the CCU in the battery cabinet.

Figure 21-91 Installing the monitoring signal cable between the CCU and the IBBS700D or between the CCU and the IBBS700T

(1) CCU

(2) Cable bag

Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind it. Step 3 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole in the cabinet. ----End

(Optional) Installing a CCU-IBBS300D/IBBS300T Monitoring Signal Cable This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the CCU-IBBS300D/ IBBS300T monitoring signal cable. The IBBS300D/IBBS300T is shortened to the battery cabinet in this document.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1589



Procedure Step 1 Install a monitoring signal cable between the TP48600A and the battery cabinet, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the cable to the FE_R port on the CCU in the TP48600A.

2.

Route the cable out of the cable bag on the bottom right side of the TP48600A and into the cable bag on the bottom left side of the battery cabinet.

3.

Connect the other end of the cable to the FE_L port on the CCU in the battery cabinet.

Figure 21-92 Installing the CCU-IBBS300D/IBBS300T monitoring signal cable

(1) Cabinet control unit (CCU)

(2) Cable bag

Step 2 Optional: When a TP48600A is configured with two IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, one additional CCU01D-03 cascading monitoring signal cable is required, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect one end of the cable to the FE_L port on the CCU01D-03 on the door of the upper IBBS300D or IBBS300T.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the FE_R port on the CCU01D-03 on the door of the lower IBBS300D or IBBS300T.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1590



Figure 21-93 Installing the monitoring signal cable for the IBBS300D/IBBS300T

Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable hole on the cabinet. ----End


Prerequisites l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1591




(1) Maximum rate

(2) Wavelength




BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT

M0 port on the UCIU


M1 port on the UCIU




CI port on the UMPT

CI port on the UMPT

UMPT+UMPT




Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1592





2.


3.






1.


2.




2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1593









2.


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1594






Context NOTE





1595



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.






2.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1596







Item

1


2


3


4


5


6




1597




Item

1


2


3



Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8


9


10


11


12


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1598



No.

Item

13



Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1599




Prerequisites l

Input power cables for the TP48600A are correctly connected.

l

The power supply to the TP48600A meets the requirements of the power system.

l

External power supply to the TP48600A has been shut off.

l

All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDU in the TMC11H are set to OFF.

l

All circuit breakers in the power distribution box in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T are set to OFF.

l

All circuit breakers in the IBBS300D/IBBS300T are set to OFF.

l


l


Context


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1600



Table 21-18 Circuit breakers in a TP48600A Cabinet

Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker

TP48600A

PDU05A-03, ETP, DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-11C

l Circuit breakers, such as PSU1/5, PSU2/6, and PSU3/4/7, on the PDU05A-03 control power inputs to the PSU. l The HEATER circuit breaker on the PDU05A-03 controls power inputs to the HAU in a TP48600A, a TMC11H (Ver.C), or a battery cabinet. l The SERVICE OUTLET 10A MAX circuit breaker on the PDU05A-03 controls power outputs from the SOU. l LOAD0 to LOAD5 on the ETP control power inputs to the DCDU in the TP48600A, TMC11H (Ver.C), and components in the TMC11H (Ver.C). l The BAT circuit breaker on the ETP controls the power supply from the storage batteries to other components in the TP48600A or battery cabinet. l Switches SW0 to SW9 on 0# and 1# DCDU-11Bs (Switches SW0 to SW5 control power inputs to RRU 0 to RRU 11.) l Switches SW0 to SW9 on the DCDU-11C (Switches SW0 to SW5 control power inputs to transmission equipment. Switches SW6 to SW9 control power inputs to the BBU 0, BBU 1, CMUF, FAU02D_07, and power distribution box in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T.)

IBBS700D/ IBBS700T

Power distribution box

l The FAN, CCU, and TEC-SW switches in the power distribution box in the battery cabinet controls power inputs to the CCU and CMUF.

NOTE


Operation Procedure The following figure shows the power-on check process.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1601




Procedure Step 1 Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit. Step 2 Optional: If a site is configured with battery cabinets, set the BAT circuit breakers on the ETP and circuit breakers in the power distribution box in the battery cabinets to ON. Otherwise, skip this step. Step 3 Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the TP48600A and battery cabinet. Step 4 Set the power circuit breakers connecting loads on the PDU05A to ON, and check the power supply to components in the cabinet according to the following table. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1602




Table 21-19 Normal status of the components powered by the PDU05A Cabinet

Component


TP48600A

PMU


PSU


IBBS700D/ IBBS700T

HAU

The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

HAU


Step 5 Set the power switches connected to loads on the ETP to ON. Step 6 Set the power switches connected to loads on each DCDU in the cabinet to ON. Step 7 Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON. Step 8 Check the power supply to each component according to the following figure. Table 21-20 Normal status of components in the cabinet Cabinet

Componen t


TP48600A

BBU


Battery cabinet

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


The fan or TEC is working properly.

CMUF or CMUEA



1603



TMC11H (Ver.C)

-

CCU

The RUN indicator is steady on or blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

CCU01D-03

The RUN indicator is steady on or blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).



FAN 02B


RRU


a: If the CPRI indicator is steady red, the optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is broken. In this case, check the optical module or fiber optic cable.

NOTE



Handling Measure





Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1604



Failure Type

Handling Measure



----End


21.8.1 Sealing the Cable Holes on the Base After all cables are installed, you need to seal all the cable holes on the base.

Procedure Step 1 Check that all cable bags are fastened. Step 2 Sealing the Cable Holes on the Base of the TP48600A/BTS3900AL/IBBS700D/IBBS700T 1.

Use baffle plates to fill the empty space in the cable holes.

2.

Install the front cover plate for the base. Tighten the three M6 countersunk screws on the cover plate to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1605



Figure 21-104 Sealing the cable holes on the base of the TP48600A, BTS3900AL, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T


(2) Baffle plate


----End


Prerequisites Before repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to the following table. Table 21-22 Color codes

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

Intended Object

Color

Huawei Code

International Code

Cabinet

RAL7035

YB026

RAL7035

Base

3010 light gray

YB030

Pantone 422U


1606







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1607






----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1608

22 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IBC10


22

Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IBC10

About This Chapter This section describes the procedure for installing the cabinet, components, and cables in a DC scenario where BBUs are installed in an IBC10. 22.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing a cabinet. The clearances are retained for cable layout and future maintenance. 22.2 Installation Process This section describes the process for installing an IBC10 in a DBS3900. The process includes checking pre-installed modules and cables, installing a cabinet, installing a PGND cable, prerouting CPRI fiber optic cables, installing components, installing cables, checking the installed cabinet, and performing a power-on check. 22.3 Installing a Cabinet This section describes the procedure for installing a cabinet on a concrete floor or an ESD floor. 22.4 Installing a PGND Cable This section describes the procedure for installing a PGND cable. A PGND cable connects a PGND screw on a cabinet and an external ground bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet. 22.5 Pre-routing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables This section describes the procedure for pre-routing CPRI fiber optic cables. 22.6 Installing Components This section describes the procedure for installing components in an IBC10. 22.7 Installing Cables This section describes the procedure for installing cables in an IBC10. 22.8 Installation Checklist After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation environment, and cable-related items. 22.9 Powering On a Base Station Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1609



This section describes the procedure for powering on an IBC10 and handling failures in the power supply to internal components in the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1610



22.1 Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the clearance requirements for installing a cabinet. The clearances are retained for cable layout and future maintenance. The cabinet can be installed on a concrete floor or an ESD floor, requiring the same clearance. The following figure shows the clearance requirements for installing an IBC10 in a DBS3900. l

The minimum clearance between the front of a cabinet and that of another cabinet must be 1,400 mm (55.12 in.).

l

The minimum clearance between the wall and the nearest cabinet must be 800 mm (31.50 in.).

l

The passage in the equipment room has a minimum width of 800 mm (31.50 in.).

Figure 22-1 Installation clearance requirements

22.2 Installation Process This section describes the process for installing an IBC10 in a DBS3900. The process includes checking pre-installed modules and cables, installing a cabinet, installing a PGND cable, prerouting CPRI fiber optic cables, installing components, installing cables, checking the installed cabinet, and performing a power-on check. The following figure shows the process for installing an IBC10 which is used for a DBS3900. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1611




22.3 Installing a Cabinet This section describes the procedure for installing a cabinet on a concrete floor or an ESD floor.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1612



22.3.1 Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor (Using Expansion Bolt Assemblies) This section describes the procedure for installing a cabinet using expansion bolt assemblies on a concrete floor.

Procedure Step 1 Determine the holes for installing the cabinet according to the anchor points on the marking-off template, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

l The marking-off template is made of paper and is prone to deformation. Before using the marking-off template, check whether it is deformed based on the dimensions specified in engineering design documents. If it is deformed, use a ruler to determine the positions for expansion bolt assemblies. l Ensure that the semicircle notch of the marking-off template indicates the front of the cabinet.

Figure 22-3 Determining the position of the cabinet


(2) Anchor point

Step 2 Drill holes at the anchor points and insert expansion bolt assemblies in the holes, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1613




(1) M12x60 bolt

1.

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer

(4) Expansion tube

Use a hammer drill with a Φ16 drill bit to drill holes with a depth ranging from 52 mm to 60 mm (2.05 in. to 2.36 in.).


Use a vacuum cleaner to clear the dust out from inside and around the holes, and measure the distances between holes. If any of the holes is beyond the acceptable range, mark a new anchor point and drill a new hole.

3.


4.

Use a rubber mallet to hit the expansion bolt assembly until the expansion tube completely enters the hole.

5.

Remove the M12x60 bolt, spring washer, and flat washer in sequence.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1614



CAUTION After dismantling the expansion bolt assembly, ensure that the top of the expansion tube is level with the concrete floor. Otherwise, the cabinet cannot be installed on the concrete floor evenly and securely. Step 3 Install the cabinet, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Place the cabinet on the planned position. Align the installation holes on the cabinet with the holes for expansion bolt assemblies.

2.

Fit the spring washers, flat washers, and insulation washers on the four bolts. Vertically insert the bolts through the lower enclosure frame of the cabinet into the expansion tubes, and partially tighten the bolts.

3.

Push an insulation plate to the bottom of the cabinet from the front and rear directions to ensure that the notch on the plates holds the expansion bolt assemblies.

Figure 22-5 Installing a cabinet

Step 4 Level and secure the cabinet. 1.

Use a level and plummet apparatus to check whether the cabinet is level or vertical, respectively.

2.

If the cabinet is not level, use a socket wrench to adjust the leveling bolts.

3.

After the cabinet is leveled, use a torque wrench to tighten the four expansion bolts to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.). NOTE

A leveling foot can be adjusted from 0 mm to 10 mm (0 in. to 0.39 in.).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1615



Figure 22-6 Leveling and securing the cabinet

Step 5 Check the insulation between the ground bolts and expansion bolts. 1.

Set the multimeter to the megohm scale (MΩ).

2.

Measure the resistance between the ground bolts and expansion bolts, as shown in the following figure. Figure 22-7 Measuring the resistance between the ground bolts and expansion bolts

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1616



l If the resistance is less than 5 megohms, the cabinet is not insulated from the ground. Go to Step 5.3. l If the resistance is greater than or equal to 5 megohms, the cabinet is insulated from the ground. 3.

Remove the expansion bolt assemblies and check whether the insulation washers are missing or damaged. l If yes, reinstall the expansion bolt assemblies and re-level the base. l If no, check whether the multimeter works properly and whether the setting is correct.

----End

22.3.2 Installing a Cabinet on an ESD Floor This section describes the procedure for installing a cabinet on an ESD floor.

Procedure Step 1 Adjust the support height, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Use a ruler to measure the distance between the concrete floor and the upper surface of the ESD floor.

2.

Adjust the support to the required height based on the measurement results and the scale on the support.

3.

Partially tighten height-locking bolts on both sides of the support.

Figure 22-8 Adjusting the support height

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1617



Step 2 Check whether the six M8x20 bolt assemblies are securely tightened. If no, use a torque socket to tighten them to 13 N·m (115.06 lbf·in). Step 3 Assemble and level the supports, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Use eight M8x20 bolt assemblies to assemble an expansion lever and two supports. Ensure that the protruding side of a guide rail faces outwards. Then, use a torque socket to tighten all bolt assemblies to 13 N·m (115.06 lbf·in).

2.

Use a level to check whether the support is level. If no, loosen the height-locking bolts slightly to adjust the support until it is level.

3.

Use a torque socket to tighten the height-locking bolts to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in).

Figure 22-9 Assembling and leveling the support

Step 4 Remove the ESD floor from the position for installing a cabinet and remove the support beams. Step 5 Determine the position for installing the cabinet according to the cabinet installation hole diagram or the marking-off template, and use a marker to mark the positions for installing screws. For details, see Step 1 in section "Installing a Cabinet on a Concrete Floor". The following figure shows the position for a support.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1618



Figure 22-10 Determining the support position

Step 6 Drill holes at the anchor points and insert expansion bolt assemblies in the holes, as shown in the following figure. Figure 22-11 Drilling a hole and inserting an expansion bolt assembly

(1) M12x60 bolt

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer


(4) Expansion tube

1619



1.

Use a hammer drill with a Φ16 drill bit to drill holes with a depth ranging from 52 mm to 60 mm (2.05 in. to 2.36 in.).


Use a vacuum cleaner to clear the dust out from inside and around the holes, and measure the distances between holes. If any of the holes is beyond the acceptable range, mark a new anchor point and drill a new hole.

3.


4.

Use a rubber mallet to hit the expansion bolt assembly until the expansion tube completely enters the hole.

5.

Remove the M12x60 bolt, spring washer, and flat washer in sequence.

CAUTION After dismantling the expansion bolt assembly, ensure that the top of the expansion tube is level with the concrete floor. Otherwise, the cabinet cannot be installed on the concrete floor evenly and securely. Step 7 Install the support, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Align installation holes on the support with expansion bolt assembly holes on the floor and secure four M12x60 expansion bolt assemblies (each consists of a spring washer, flat washer, insulation washer, and a bolt).

2.

Correct the support position, and use a level to check whether the support is level.

3.

If no, add spacers under the support.

4.

Use a torque socket to tighten the four expansion bolts to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in).

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1620



Figure 22-12 Installing the support

Step 8 Install the cabinet, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Place the cabinet on the support and align the installation holes on the cabinet with those on the support.

2.

Fit spring washers, flat washers, and insulation washers on the four M12x40 bolts. Insert the bolt assemblies into the installation holes on the cabinet and support, and tighten them to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in).

3.

Push two insulation plates to the bottom of the cabinet from the front and rear directions to ensure that the notch on the plates holds the M12x40 bolts.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1621



Figure 22-13 Installing a cabinet

Step 9 Check the insulation between the ground bolts and M12x40 bolts. 1.

Set the multimeter to the megohm scale (MΩ).

2.

Measure the resistance between the ground bolts and M12x40 bolts, as shown in the following figure. l If the resistance is less than 5 megohms, the cabinet is not insulated from the ground. Go to Step 9.3. l If the resistance is greater than or equal to 5 megohms, the cabinet is insulated from the ground.

3.

Remove the expansion bolt assemblies and check whether the insulation washers are missing or damaged. l If yes, reinstall the expansion bolt assemblies and re-level the cabinet. l If no, check whether the multimeter works properly and whether the setting is correct.

Step 10 Use the M12x25 screw assemblies to secure the front and rear pallets to the support.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1622



Figure 22-14 Securing front and rear pallets

----End

22.4 Installing a PGND Cable This section describes the procedure for installing a PGND cable. A PGND cable connects a PGND screw on a cabinet and an external ground bar to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet.

Context The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable for an IBC10. Table 22-1 Specifications of a PGND cable Cable

One End

The Other End

Cross-Sectional Area of the Wire

Color

PGND cable

OT terminal (M8)

OT terminal (M8)

l 16 mm2 or 0.025 in.2

Green and yellow

l 25 mm2 or 0.039 in.2

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1623


22 Indoor DC Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an IBC10 NOTE

l The colors and structures of the PGND cable in this document are for reference only, which may differ from those of the cables onsite. l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations. l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues: l The cables and connectors are provided by the customer. l Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.



2.



Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bolt on the top side of an IBC10, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the bolt to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in).

2.

Connect the other end of the PGND cable to the external ground bar. NOTE


Figure 22-15 Installing an OT terminal

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1624




(1) Ground busbar outside the cabinet


22.5 Pre-routing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables This section describes the procedure for pre-routing CPRI fiber optic cables.

Context Before installing components, pre-route CPRI fiber optic cables according to the actual routing path to prevent the event that component installation leaves insufficient space for cabling on the side of the cabinet.

Procedure Step 1 Pre-route CPRI fiber optic cables through the cable holes on the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1625



Figure 22-17 Pre-routing CPRI fiber optic cables

----End

22.6 Installing Components This section describes the procedure for installing components in an IBC10.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1626



22.6.1 Installing a USU Every five BBUs need to be configured with one level-1 USU. This section describes the procedure for installing a USU.

Context For the installation positions of USUs in an AC IBC10 and a DC IBC10, see Components in IBC10s.

Procedure Step 1 Optional: Check the installation direction of the mounting ears for the USU. If the mounting ears are installed reversely, skip this step. If the mounting ears are installed in standard mode, reinstall them reversely as follows: 1.

Remove the four M4 screws from the mounting ear on each side of the USU.

2.

Install the mounting ears reversely and tighten the four M4 screws on each of the mounting ears, with a torque of 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.). Figure 22-18 Installing mounting ears reversely

Step 2 Align cable claws with the holes on each side of the USU. Then use two M4 screws to secure the cable claws to the USU and tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1627



Figure 22-19 Installing cable claws on a USU

NOTICE When installing a USU equipped with boards, hold the bottom of the USU with your hands and slide it into the cabinet slowly to prevent it from falling.

NOTICE The USU guide rails are above a 1 U air baffle and shorter than the air baffle. Before sliding the USU into the cabinet along the guide rails, ensure that the USU is placed on the guide rails rather than the air baffle, as shown in the following figure. Figure 22-20 Placing a USU on guide rails

(1) Guide rails

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

(2) Air damper


1628



Step 3 Slide the USU along the guide rails into the cabinet, and then use a torque screwdriver to tighten the four M6x16 screws to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 22-21 Installing a USU

----End

22.6.2 Installing a BBU This section describes the procedure for installing a BBU.

Context For positions of BBUs in an IBC10 AC cabinet and an IBC10 DC cabinet, see Components in IBC10s.

Procedure Step 1 Align a cable claw with the holes on each side of the BBU case. Then use two M4 screws to secure the cable claws to the BBU case and tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure. Figure 22-22 Installing cable claws on a BBU

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1629




NOTICE The BBU slide rails are above a 1 U baffle plate and shorter than the baffle plate. Before sliding the BBU into the cabinet along the slide rails, ensure that the BBU is placed on the slide rails rather than the baffle plate, as shown in the following figure. Figure 22-23 Placing a BBU on the slide rails

(1) Slide rail

(2) Baffle plate

Step 2 Slide a BBU into the cabinet along the guide rails, and then use a torque screwdriver to tighten the four M6x16 screws to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1630



Figure 22-24 Installing a BBU

----End

22.6.3 Installing Boards in a BBU This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing boards in a BBU.

Context This section describes the procedure for installing a UMPT and a UPEU as examples. Other boards can be installed in the same method based on site conditions, such as the UMPT, LBBP, UTRP, and UPEU.

Operation Rules l

When moving a board, you must hold the board with both hands, as shown in the following figure. Figure 22-25 Incorrect and correct operations when moving a board

l

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

When installing a board, you must hold the ejector lever side of the board with one hand and hold another side of the board with the other hand to ensure that the board is moving Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1631



in the correct direction. Do not hold the board with only one hand and never apply lateral forces to the board. The following figure shows incorrect and correct operations when installing a board. Figure 22-26 Incorrect and correct operations when installing a board (1)

l

When installing a board, ensure that your hands are level so that the board and the guide rails are on one level. Do not apply lateral forces to the board. Otherwise, the board will be distorted. The following figure shows incorrect and correct operations when installing a board. Figure 22-27 Incorrect and correct operations when installing a board (2)

CAUTION l Handle the board with care and avoid collision. Do not pile or compress boards after they are unpacked. l When inserting a board into a subrack, prevent it from colliding with the subrack and push it into the subrack until it snaps into place.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1632



Procedure Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

NOTICE Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components. Step 2 Install a UMPT and a UPEU. 1.

Loosen the screws on the filler panel in the slot to be used, and remove the filler panel.

2.

If there is an ejector lever on a board, raise the ejector levers on the board and remove the board. If there is no ejector lever, directly remove the board.

3.

Push the board into the slot slowly, and lower the ejector lever.

4.

Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the board panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in).

Figure 22-28 Installing boards in a BBU

----End

22.7 Installing Cables This section describes the procedure for installing cables in an IBC10.

22.7.1 Cabling Requirements Cables must be laid out according to the specified cabling requirements to prevent signal interference. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1633






l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l


l


l




l


l




l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1634





l


l


l


l


l


l


l




l







Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1635




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1636




(1) 3-hole clip

(2) 6-hole clip



l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1637



l


l




l


l


l


l


l


l




l


l


l



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1638



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1639





l


l


l


22.7.2 Cable Outlets This section describes the cable layout at the cable outlets of an IBC10. The following figure shows a planform for the cable outlets of an IBC10.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1640



Figure 22-37 Planform for the cable outlets in an IBC10

(1) Cable outlet for a signal transfer cable for a GPS power splitter (2) Left cable outlet (3) Right cable outlet

The following table describes the cable routing through the cable outlets in an IBC10. Table 22-2 Cable routing through the cable outlets in an IBC10 Item

Description

Left cable outlet

Used for routing input power cables for the cabinet and CPRI fiber optic cables for baseband processing boards on the left side.

Right cable outlet

Used for routing FE/GE Ethernet cables, FE/GE fiber optic cables, BBU alarm cables, and CPRI fiber optic cables for baseband processing boards on the right side.

NOTE

Remove the cover plate adjacent to the current cable outlet on the top of the cabinet for routing the cables which cannot be routed from the current cable outlet 2 and cable outlet 3. When CPRI fiber optic cables need to be routed out of the cabinet through the right side of the cabinet, route them only through cable outlet 3.

22.7.3 Installing DCDU-12C power cables This section describes the procedure for installing DCDU-12C power cables, which connect external power equipment to the DCDU-12C and feed external power into an IBC10 DC cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1641



Prerequisites l


l


l

External power supply to the IBC10 has been shut off.

l

The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which may differ from those of the cables onsite.

l


l

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:

Context

– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer. – Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened. The IBC10 can be supplied with -48 V power. The following figure lists the specifications of a DCDU-12C power cable. Table 22-3 Specifications of a DCDU-12C power cable Cable

One End

The Other End

Cross-Sectional Area of the Wire

Color

RTN(+) wire

OT terminal (M6)


l One group of power cables with a crosssectional area of 35 mm 2(0.055 in. 2) and an upper-level circuit breaker supporting 1x160 A current

Black

NEG(-) wire

Blue

l Two groups of power cables with a cross-sectional area of 16 mm 2(0.025 in. 2) and an upper-level circuit breaker supporting 2x80 A current

Procedure Step 1 Add a DCDU-12C power cable. 1.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)



1642



2.

Add OT terminals at the end of the cable that connects the DCDU-12C according to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable, and add a connector to the other end of the power cable depending on the external power equipment.

Step 2 Install the input power cables for three DCDU-12Cs in the IBC10. 1.

Remove the protective cover from the DC input wiring terminal block on the DCDU-12C, connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the DC input wiring terminals on the DCDU-12C, and then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

2.

Install the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal block, and use a screwdriver to tighten the screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N•m (2.66 lbf•in.).

3.

Connect the other end of the power cable to external power equipment.

Figure 22-38 Installing DCDU-12C power cables


22.7.4 Installing USU Power Cables This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing USU power cables.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1643



Context The following table lists specifications of a USU power cable. Table 22-4 Specifications of a USU power cable Cable USU power cable

Color

One End

The Other End

RTN(+) wire

Black

EPC4 connector

3V3 connector

NEG(-) wire

Blue

NOTE

The colors and structures of cables vary depending on countries and regions. Cables purchased locally must comply with local rules and regulations.

Procedure Step 1 Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the USU power cable. For detailed operations, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable. NOTE

A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the USU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connector must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.

Step 2 Install the USU power cables, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the ends of the power cables with 3V3 connectors to the -48V ports on the UPEU boards in two USUs (USU 0 and USU 1). Then tighten the screws on the connectors to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).

2.

Connect the other ends of the power cables with EPC4 connectors to the LOAD0 and LOAD1 ports on top DCDU-12C (No. 0 DCDU-12C).

CAUTION In a running base station, the USU power cable should be connected to the USU first and then to the power equipment. The operation in the reverse sequence may cause personal injury or component damage.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1644



Figure 22-39 Installing USU power cables


22.7.5 Installing BBU Power Cables This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing BBU power cables.

Context The following table lists the specifications of a BBU power cable. Table 22-5 Specifications of a BBU power cable Cable BBU power cable Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

RTN(+) wire

Color

One End

The Other End

Black

EPC4 connector

3V3 connector


1645



Cable

Color NEG(-) wire

One End

The Other End

Blue

NOTE


Procedure Step 1 Add an EPC4 connector to a BBU power cable. 1.


2.

Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable. NOTE

A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of a BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connector must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.

Step 2 Install BBU power cables, as shown in the following figure. 1.

Connect the 3V3 connectors at one end of the BBU power cables to the -48V ports on the UPEUs in two groups of BBUs (BBU 0 to BBU 4 in group 0 and BBU 0 to BBU 4 in group 1), from top to bottom. Then, tighten the screws on the connectors to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).

2.

Connect the EPC4 connectors at the other end of the BBU power cables to the LOAD0 to LOAD4 ports on the second DCDU-12C (1#DCDU-12C) and third DCDU-12C (2#DCDU-12C) from top to bottom.

CAUTION Ensure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station must be connected to the BBU first and then to the power equipment. The operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1646





22.7.6 (Optional) Installing BBU Alarm Cables This section describes the procedure for installing BBU alarm cables, which transmit alarm signals from external alarm equipment to a BBU. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1647




Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the BBU alarm cable to the EXT-ALM0/EXTALM1 port on the UPEU in a BBU.

2.

Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable to the external alarm equipment. NOTE

This section describes the procedure for routing and installing BBU alarm cables in an IBC10 DC cabinet as an example. The BBU alarm cables can be routed and installed in the same method in an IBC10 AC cabinet.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1648



Figure 22-41 Installing BBU alarm cables

Step 2 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 22.7.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 3 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label. ----End Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1649



22.7.7 Installing a Monitoring Signal Cable for a Fan Assembly One end of the monitoring signal cable for a fan assembly has been installed before delivery. You only need to connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to a BBU.

Procedure Step 1 Connect the RJ45 connector of the monitoring signal cable to the MON1 port on the UPEU in a BBU, as shown in the following figure. Figure 22-42 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a fan assembly


22.7.8 (Optional) Installing Interconnection Cables This section describes the procedure for installing interconnection cables, which include baseband interconnection cables and infrastructure interconnection cables.

Context l

A QSFP cable connects the LBBPd in a BBU to the UCXU in a USU to exchange IQ and SRIO data between BBUs.

l

An SFP cable connects the UMPT in a BBU to the UCIU in a USU to exchange management data between BBUs and synchronize the reference clock.

l

Baseband interconnection cables in a cabinet and between cabinets (QSFP cables in a cabinet and between cabinets): A 2 m (6.56 ft) electrical cable is used in a cabinet, and a

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1650



10 m (32.81 ft) fiber optic cable is used between cabinets. Infrastructure interconnection cables in a cabinet and between cabinets (QSFP fiber optic cables in a cabinet and between cabinets): A 2 m (6.56 ft) fiber optic cable is used in a cabinet, and a 10 m (32.81 ft) fiber optic cable is used between cabinets. l

A single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and a multimode optical module is labeled as MM. The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode optical module is black or gray.

l

Optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.

l

This section describes the procedure for installing and routing interconnection cables. For details about interconnection cable connections in different scenarios, see section "Interconnection Signal Cable Connections" in USU3900 Hardware Description.

NOTICE The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20 minutes. The following figure shows cable connections of a USU. The board configurations in the following figure may be different from onsite configurations. Figure 22-43 Cable connections of a USU

S0: SFP fiber optic cable

S1 and S2: QSFP cables

Procedure Step 1 Install the SFP optical module, as shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1651



Figure 22-44 Installing an SFP optical module

1.


2.

Insert the optical modules into the M0 to M4 ports on the UCIU in the USU, and then insert the optical modules of the same type into the CI ports on the UMPT boards in BBU 0 to BBU 4. NOTE


3.


Step 2 Install the SFP fiber optic cable, as shown in the following figure. Figure 22-45 Installing an SFP fiber optic cable

1.

Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors on the fiber optic cables.

2.

Insert the DLC connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the SFP fiber optic cable into the optical module in the UCIU, and then insert the DLC connectors labeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical module in the UMPT.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1652



NOTICE If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX port on the USU must be connected to the TX port on the BBU, and the RX port on the USU must be connected to the RX port on the BBU. Step 3 Route the SFP fiber optic cable along the right side of the cabinet by referring to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then use a cable tie to bind the cable. Step 4 Install the QSFP optical module. 1.


2.

Insert the optical module into the M0 port on the UCXU in the USU, and then insert the optical module of the same type into the HEI port on the LBBPd3 in the BBU.

3.


Step 5 Install QSFP cables. 1.

Remove the dustproof cap from the connector on the QSFP fiber optic cable.

2.

Insert the MPO connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the QSFP cable into the optical module in the UCXU, and then insert the MPO connectors labeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical module in the LBBPd3.

Step 6 Route the QSFP cables along the left side of the cabinet by referring to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then use cable ties to bind the cables.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1653



Figure 22-46 Installing an SFP fiber optic cable and QSFP cables

----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1654



22.7.9 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE Ethernet cables.

Context l

FE/GE Ethernet cables are shielded straight-through cables.

l

This section describes the procedure for installing and routing FE/GE Ethernet cables. For details about FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in different scenarios, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 33900 Series Base Station Cables and USU3900 Hardware Description.

Procedure Step 1 Connect one ends of the FE/GE Ethernet cables to the FE/GE0 ports on the SMPT in the USU and the UMPT or UTRP in the BBU. Step 2 Route the other ends of FE/GE Ethernet cables out of the cabinet through the cable hole on the top right side of the cabinet, and then connect FE/GE Ethernet cables to the external transmission equipment, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1655



Figure 22-47 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables

Step 3 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in 22.7.1 Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties to bind them. Step 4 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label. ----End Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1656



22.7.10 Installing FE/GE Fiber Optic Cables This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables. FE/ GE fiber optic cables transmit optical signals between the BBU and the transmission equipment.

Prerequisites

NOTICE l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves to prevent damage to any module. l The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20 minutes.

Context l


l

This section describes the procedure for installing and routing FE/GE fiber optic cables. For details about FE/GE fiber optic cable connections in different scenarios, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in 3900 Series Base Station Cables and USU3900 Hardware Description.


Remove the dustproof caps from the FE/GE optical ports on the SMPT in the USU and the UMPT or UTRP in the BBU.

2.


3.


4.


5.



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1657




Step 2 Install FE/GE fiber optic cables, as shown in Figure 22-50 and Figure 22-51. 1.

Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors and insert the connectors into the optical modules in the USU and BBU.

2.

Route the fiber optic cables out from the cable hole on the top right side of the cabinet.

3.

Connect the other ends of the fiber optic cables to a routing device.

Figure 22-50 Removing dust-proof caps from a fiber optic cable

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1658






1659



22.7.11 Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables This section describes the procedure for installing CPRI fiber optic cables, which transmit CPRI signals between a BBU and an RRU.

Context l



Procedure Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in the following figure. 1.


2.

Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the LBBPd3, and insert a new optical module of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on the RRU. NOTE


3.




Remove the dust-proof cap from a connector on the fiber optic cable.

2.

Insert the LC connector at one end of the CPRI fiber optic cable into the optical module on the LBBPd3, and connect the other end of the cable to an external routing device.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1660



3.

Route the CPRI fiber optic cable along the left or right side of the cabinet and route the cable out of the cabinet from the cable outlet on the top.

NOTICE l The CPRI fiber optic cable must be routed out from the cabinet of the nearest cable outlet. l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX and RX ports on a BBU must be connected to the TX and RX ports on an RF module, respectively.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1661



Figure 22-53 Routing CPRI fiber optic cables



1662





Item

1


2


3


4


5


6



Item

1


2


3


Electrical Connection Checklist The following table lists the items to be checked for electrical connections.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1663




Item

1


2


3


4


5


6


7


8


9


10


11


12


13



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)

No.

Item

1



1664



No.

Item

2


3


4


5


6


7


8



22.9 Powering On a Base Station This section describes the procedure for powering on an IBC10 and handling failures in the power supply to internal components in the cabinet.

Prerequisites l

The input power cables for the IBC10 are correctly connected.

l

The power supply to the IBC10 meets the requirements of the power system.

l

External power supply to the IBC10 has been shut off.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1665



l

Power circuit breakers on a BBU have been turned off.

l


l

All power circuit breakers on an EPU05A-02 have been turned off. Skip this step when powering on an IBC10 DC cabinet.

Context



Operation Process The following figure shows the process for performing the power-on check on an IBC10.

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1666



Figure 22-55 Power-on check on an IBC10

Procedure Step 1 Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit. Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1667



Step 2 Turn on the circuit breaker for the external power supply to power on an IBC10. Step 3 Optional: Turn on the power circuit breaker connected to loads on the EPU05A-02, and check the power supply to components in the cabinet according to the following table. Skip this step when powering on an IBC10 DC cabinet. Table 22-10 Normal status of the components powered by an EPU05A-02 Component


PMU

l RUN indicator: blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) l ALM indicator: steady off

PSU

l Power indicator: steady green l Fault indicator: steady off

Step 4 Turn on the power circuit breaker on the UPEU in a BBU. Step 5 Check the power supply to components in the cabinet according to the following table. Table 22-11 Normal status of the components Component


BBU

l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on. l FAN: The STATE indicator blinks (on for 1s and off for 1s). l Other boards: The RUN indicator blinks (on for 1s and off for 1s).

Fan assembly

l RUN indicator: blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) l ALM indicator: steady off


Handling Measure



Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1668



Failure Type

Handling Measure





----End

Issue 03 (2014-08-30)


1669

Installation Guide DBS3900

Recommend Documents